20 ga om en usc t - alfa romeo … · with respect to any vehicles sold in canada, the name fca us...

2 0 2 0 O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

2020

GIU

LIA

20_GA

_OM

_EN

_US

C

Second Edition

©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).

Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date documents by visiting these links:

Owner’s Manual and Media:www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Warranty Booklet:www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/warranty (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-844-253-2872 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation /Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com (U.S.), www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

WARNING!

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

1

DEAR CUSTOMERDear Customer,We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take thenecessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the tech-nical features of your Alfa Romeo.You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with thecontrols of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces.This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and main-tenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.In the Warranty Information Booklet available online, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo.For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact:Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI48321–8004Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA(1-844-253-2872)Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada):P.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English)Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French)

20_GA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1

2

RE

AD

TH

IS C

AR

EF

ULL

Y RefuelingDo not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vitalcomponents of the supply system.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see "Fuel Requirements" in the "Technical Specifications".

Starting The EngineMake sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal,and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable MaterialThe catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on potential fire hazards such as: grass, dryleaves, pine needles or other flammable material.

Respecting The EnvironmentThe vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect theenvironment.

Electrical AccessoriesIf you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an authorizeddealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled ServicingCorrectly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in perfor-mance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.


3

VE

HIC

LE C

HA

NG

ES

/ A

LTE

RA

TIO

NS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessoriesthat in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact an authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether thevehicle's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.

NOTE:Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes andaffect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.).

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or notinstalled in compliance with the provided instructions.

Installing Electrical/Electronic DevicesFCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufac-turer's specifications.

NOTE:Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may voidthe warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.

FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or notinstalled in compliance with the provided instructions.

WARNING!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.


VE

HIC

LE C

HA

NG

ES

/ A

LTE

RA

TIO

NS

4

Radio Transmitters And Mobile PhonesRadio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a sepa-rate antenna is mounted externally.Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobilephones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone manufacturer.

CAUTION!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction.This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.

If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the PassiveEntry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.


5

HO

W T

O U

SE

TH

IS M

AN

UA

L Operating InstructionsEach time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occu-pant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate.The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of yourvehicle.To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the Index at the end of this manual.Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know thechapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page.

Warnings And CautionsWhile reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the componentsof the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

Personal Safety:

Vehicle Safety:

NOTE:This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific Markets or particular models are not identifiedas such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production ofthe model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped.The data contained inthis publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the vehiclesproduced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.For further infor-mation, contact an authorized dealer.


HO

W T

O U

SE

TH

IS M

AN

UA

L

6

SymbolsSome car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to followall warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

READ THE OWNER’S MANUAL

DO NOT TOUCH WITH HANDS

IT CAN START AUTOMATICALLY ALSO WITH ENGINE OFF

PROTECT YOUR EYES DO NOT OPEN THE CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT

DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT A DISTANCE BURSTING

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS OF YOUR BODY AND CLOTHES

AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH FLAMES CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX


8

DEAR CUSTOMER

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling..................................................... 2Starting The Engine....................................2Parking On Flammable Material ...............2Respecting The Environment .................... 2Electrical Accessories ................................2Scheduled Servicing ..................................2

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS

Accessories Purchased By The Owner......3Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices ....3Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ... 4

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Operating Instructions ...............................5Warnings And Cautions..............................5Symbols ......................................................6

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS..........................................................14Key Fob ..................................................14Operation................................................ 14Replacing The Electronic Key Fob Battery ....................................................15Request For Additional Keys.................16General Information ..............................16

IGNITION SYSTEM ....................................17Operation................................................ 17Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery ....................................................18General Information ..............................18

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ............................ 19Engine Immobilizer Operation .............. 19

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............................................. 19

Alarm Activation..................................... 19To Arm The Alarm .................................. 20To Disarm The Alarm............................. 20Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If Equipped............................................. 21To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive Entry ....................................................... 21

DOORS...................................................... 21Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside .............................................. 21Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside................................................... 22Passive Entry ........................................ 22General Information .............................. 25Child Safety Locks ................................. 26Locking The Doors With A Discharged Battery.................................................... 26

SEATS ....................................................... 27Power Seats........................................... 27Sparco Racing Seats (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped......................... 29Heated Seats — If Equipped ................ 29Rear Seats ............................................. 30Split Folding Rear Seat ......................... 30Easy Entry Function............................... 32

HEAD RESTRAINTS ................................. 32Sparco Racing Seat Head Restraints (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped .. 32Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) .. 32Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) ... 33Head Restraints (Removal)................... 33

STEERING WHEEL ....................................34Adjustments ...........................................34Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped..35

MIRRORS ..................................................36Electrochromic Mirror ............................36Outside Power Mirrors ...........................36Heated Mirrors ......................................37

EXTERIOR LIGHTS ....................................37Headlight Switch ....................................37Automatic Headlights ............................37Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ..............37Rear Fog Light ........................................38Parking Lights.........................................38Headlight Off Delay ................................38Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS Function) — If Equipped ................38High Beam Headlights ...........................39Turn Signals............................................39Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — If Equipped .............................................40

INTERIOR LIGHTS .....................................40Front Map Reading Lights .....................40Glove Compartment Light......................41Interior Ambient Lighting .......................41Door Light ...............................................42Rear Overhead Light ..............................42Courtesy Trunk Lights ............................43Instrument Panel Dimmer Control .......43

WINDSHIELD WIPERS ..............................43Windshield Wiper Stalk..........................43Windshield Wiper/Washers ..................44Rain Sensor ............................................45


9

CLIMATE CONTROL .................................46Passenger Compartment Air Vents ..... 46Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System ......................................47Description .............................................49Operating Mode .....................................49Climate Control Display Settings .........50Air Temperature Adjustment.................50Air Distribution Selection.......................50Fan Speed Adjustment .......................... 50AUTO Button...........................................51SYNC Button...........................................51Air Recirculation And Air Quality System (AQS)..........................................51A/C Compressor.....................................51Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Function..................................................52Rear Defroster ....................................... 52Humidity Sensor.....................................52Switching Off/On The Climate Control System....................................... 52Stop/Start .............................................. 53System Maintenance.............................53

POWER WINDOWS ...................................53Power Window Switches........................53

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........54Power Sunroof........................................ 54Opening ..................................................55Closing ....................................................55Vent Opening..........................................55Sun Shade Movement........................... 55Pinch Protect Feature............................ 55Re-Initialization Procedure .................... 56

HOOD ....................................................... 56Opening.................................................. 56Closing.................................................... 57

TRUNK ...................................................... 57Opening.................................................. 57Closing.................................................... 58Trunk Initialization................................. 58Trunk Specifications ............................. 59

GARAGE DOOR OPENER.......................... 59Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®............................................ 60Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......................................... 61Using HomeLink® ................................. 62Security .................................................. 62Troubleshooting Tips............................. 62General Information .............................. 63

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT............................ 64Glove Compartment ............................. 64Sun Visors .............................................. 64Center Console ...................................... 64Cupholder............................................... 65Power Outlet .......................................... 65Cigar Lighter And Ash Tray — If Equipped............................................. 66Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped .. 66

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS.................................................. 67ACTIVE AERODYNAMIC SPOILER (QUADRIFOGLIO VEHICLES) .................... 67

Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Spoiler .................................................... 67

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES .............68Instrument Cluster .................................68Tachometer ............................................69Engine Oil Temperature Gauge.............69Fuel Level Gauge....................................70Speedometer..........................................70

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ............70Instrument Cluster Display Description .............................................70Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display ....................................................70Reconfigurable Display Items ...............70Customer Programmable Settings........74

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL..................75

Red Warning Lights................................76Amber Warning Lights............................78Green Telltale Indicator Lights ..............83Blue Telltale Indicator Light...................84Red Symbols...........................................84Amber Symbols ......................................88Green Symbols .......................................95Blue Symbols..........................................96

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ............97Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity..........................................97

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS.....................97


10

SAFETY

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ........................99Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ..........99Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) — If Equipped ................................................ 99Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) .........100Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If Equipped ..............................................100Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ........100Hill Start Assist (HSA)...........................101Panic Brake Assist (PBA) .....................101Traction Control System (TCS) ............102

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.............. 102Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System — If Equipped .........................103Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) System — If Equipped .........................105Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System..................................................109Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....................................115

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....... 118Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..............................................118Important Safety Precautions .............118Seat Belt Systems ...............................119Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)......................................125Child Restraints....................................136Transporting Pets ................................148

SAFETY TIPS ..........................................149Transporting Passengers .................... 149Exhaust Gas......................................... 149Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ..............................150Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle .................. 151

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE .........................152Starting Procedure ..............................152Remote Starting System ..................... 152Cold Weather Operation...................... 153Extended Park Starting .......................153If Engine Fails To Start ........................ 154After Starting — Warming Up TheEngine ..................................................154Stopping The Engine ........................... 154Turbocharger Cool Down .................... 155

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..........................................155ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ............................155

Engine Break-In ................................... 155ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE.........................156

Electric Park Brake Operating Modes ..................................................157Safe Hold ............................................. 158

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION................. 158Display ................................................. 159Gear Selector....................................... 159Transmission Operating Modes ......... 160Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ......................................... 162Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System ...................... 163Important Notes .................................. 163

ALFA DNA / PRO SELECTOR ................. 164Alfa DNA System ................................. 164Driving Modes ..................................... 165

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED .............................................. 167STOP/START SYSTEM ........................... 167

Stop/Start System .............................. 167Operating Mode .................................. 167System Manual Activation/Deactivation ........................................ 168Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop .............................. 168Engine Restarting Conditions............. 169Safety Functions ................................. 169Irregular Operation.............................. 169Vehicle Inactivity ................................. 169

SPEED LIMITER ..................................... 170Description .......................................... 170Activation ............................................. 170Speed Limit Programming.................. 170Exceeding The Programmed Speed... 170Programmed Speed Icon Flashing..... 170Deactivation ........................................ 170


11

SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ............................... 171

Speed Control Description ..................171Activating..............................................171Setting The Desired Speed .................172Increasing/Decreasing Speed ............172Recalling The Speed............................172Deactivating .........................................173

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED .......................................... 173

System Description..............................173Activation/Deactivation.......................175Setting The Desired Speed .................175To Vary The Speed Setting ..................176Accelerating When Overtaking............177Resuming The Speed ..........................177Setting The Distance Between Vehicles ................................................177“Stop And Go” Function.......................178Deactivation .........................................178Limited Operation Warning .................178Precautions While Driving ...................179General Information ............................181

HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM (HAS) — IF EQUIPPED .......................................... 182

Activation/Deactivation.......................182Operation..............................................183Indications On The Display..................183System Status ......................................184Limited System Availability/Operation..............................................185

TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED...........................................186

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 186Operation ............................................. 187Indications On The Display ................. 187System Status...................................... 187Limited System Availability/Operation ............................................. 188

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........................189

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 190Indications On The Display ................. 190

INTELLIGENT SPEED CONTROL (ISC) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........................191

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 191Indications On The Display ................. 191Acceptance/Rejection Of The Suggested Speed ................................ 191

DRIVER ATTENTION ASSIST (DAA) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........................192

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 192System Intervention ............................ 193

PARKSENSE SYSTEM ............................194Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only ....... 194Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors ................................................ 196

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........................198

Description...........................................198System Activation/Deactivation .........199Symbols And Messages On The Display..................................................199

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA) SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED......................... 201

Activation/Deactivation ...................... 201Symbols And Messages On The Display ................................................. 201

REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES............................................. 204

Description .......................................... 204Symbols And Messages On The Display ................................................. 205Important Notes .................................. 205

REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................... 206Refueling The Vehicle ......................... 206Refueling Capacity .............................. 206Refueling Procedure .......................... 206

VEHICLE LOADING ................................ 207Certification Label............................... 207

TRAILER TOWING .................................. 208SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING ............... 208

Saving Fuel .......................................... 208Driving Style......................................... 209Conditions Of Use................................ 209Transporting Passengers.................... 209Transporting Animals.......................... 210Exhaust Gas......................................... 210Performance — Quadrifoglio............... 210


12

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............ 212SOS - EMERGENCY CALL ...................... 212BULB REPLACEMENT ........................... 215

General Instructions ............................215Types Of Bulbs .....................................216Replacement Bulbs .............................217Replacing Exterior Bulbs ....................218Replacing Interior Bulbs .....................219

FUSES ................................................... 221General Information ............................221Fuse Location.......................................223Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard .............................................223Luggage Compartment Fuse Box .......223Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard .............................................224Under hood Power Distribution Center (PDC).........................................225

TIRE SERVICE KIT .................................. 226Description ...........................................226Inflation Procedure ..............................227Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure ...............................................229Sealant Cartridge Replacement .........229

JUMP STARTING ................................... 230Remote Battery Connection Posts......230Jump Starting.......................................231Bump Starting ......................................232

ENGINE OVERHEATING ......................... 232MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................... 233TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............. 233

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ........234All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ............234

TOW EYES ..............................................234ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .....................................235EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............235

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING .......................236Periodic Checks ................................... 236Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle ............... 236Maintenance Plan — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine ..................................................237Maintenance Plan — 2.9 V6 Engine ...240

ENGINE COMPARTMENT .......................243Checking Levels — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine ..................................................243Checking Levels — 2.9L V6 Engine ...244Engine Oil ............................................. 245Engine Coolant Fluid ........................... 246Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights............................................246Brake Fluid...........................................246Automatic Transmission Activation System Oil ............................................246Useful Advice For Extending The Life Of Your Battery .............................246Battery..................................................246Pressure Washing ............................... 247

BATTERY RECHARGING .........................247Important Notes .................................. 247

DEALER SERVICE .................................. 249Engine Oil............................................. 249Engine Oil Filter ................................... 249Air Filter................................................ 249Air Conditioning System Maintenance ....................................... 249Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Bodywork ............................................. 250Windshield Wiper ................................ 250Exhaust System................................... 251Cooling System.................................... 252Braking System ................................... 253Automatic Transmission ..................... 254Replacing The Battery......................... 254

RAISING THE VEHICLE ......................... 255TIRES ..................................................... 255

Tire Safety Information ...................... 255Tires — General Information .............. 262Spare Tires — If Equipped .................. 267Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .............. 268Tire Types............................................. 268Tire Chains And Traction Devices ...... 269Tire Rotation Recommendations ....... 270

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....... 271

Treadwear............................................ 271Traction Grades................................... 271Temperature Grades........................... 271

STORING THE VEHICLE ........................ 272


13

BODYWORK ........................................... 273Protection Against Atmospheric Agents...................................................273Corrosion Warranty..............................273Preserving The Bodywork....................273

INTERIORS ............................................. 274Seats And Fabric Parts ........................274Leather Seats.......................................275Plastic And Coated Parts.....................275Alcantara Parts — If Equipped.............275Genuine Leather Parts — If Equipped ...........................................275Carbon Fiber Parts...............................275

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA........................... 276Vehicle Identification Number ............276Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Plate ..............................276

ENGINE .................................................. 277POWER SUPPLY..................................... 278TRANSMISSION ..................................... 278BRAKES.................................................. 279SUSPENSION ......................................... 279STEERING SYSTEM ............................... 279DIMENSIONS — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine... 280DIMENSIONS — 2.9L V6 Engine ........... 281

WEIGHTS — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine..........282WEIGHTS — 2.9L V6 Engine ..................282FUEL REQUIREMENTS...........................283

Reformulated Gasoline ...................... 283Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............... 283CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ....................................... 283MMT In Gasoline.................................. 283Materials Added To Fuel ..................... 284Fuel System Cautions ......................... 284

FLUID CAPACITIES..................................2852.0L T4 MAir Engine............................ 2852.9L V6 Engine ....................................286

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.....................287Engine Lubrication — 2.0L T4 MAirEngine ..................................................287Engine Lubrication — 2.9L V6 Engine ....................................287Chassis Lubrication — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine............................ 288Chassis Lubrication — 2.9L V6 Engine ....................................289

PERFORMANCE — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine.....................................................289PERFORMANCE — 2.9L V6 Engine .......289

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE .............................. 290

Prepare For The Appointment ............ 290Prepare A List ...................................... 290Be Reasonable With Requests........... 290

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE.................... 290Alfa Romeo Customer Center............. 290Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada) .............................................. 290Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).......... 291Service Contract.................................. 291

WARRANTY INFORMATION .................. 291REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............. 291

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.................................. 291In Canada ............................................ 292

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............. 292


14 (Continued)

GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LEIn this section, you will find important informa-tion to help you become familiar with thefeatures needed to operate your vehicle, andhow they function.

KEYS

Key Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.This system includes a key fob and a keylesspush button ignition.The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows youto lock or unlock the doors and trunk or acti-vate the panic alarm from distances. The keyfob does not need to be pointed at the vehicleto activate the system.

Key FobPANIC FunctionThe key fob contains a PANIC button. Shouldyou ever feel threatened, push this button andthe vehicle security alarm will sound.

To activate the PANIC function, push and holdthe PANIC button for at least one second.When the panic alarm is active, the headlightsturn on, the turn signals flash, the horn honksintermittently, and all interior adjustable lightsturn on. The panic alarm will remain active forthree minutes, and can be deactivated: By pushing the PANIC button again

Automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds5 mph (8 km/h)

In both cases, the panic alarm is immediatelydeactivated.

Operation

Door And Trunk Lid UnlockPush and release the unlock button on the keyfob once to unlock the driver side front door ortwice within one second to unlock all doorsand the trunk lid.The current unlock setting can be changedthrough the radio system menu, so that thesystem unlocks: All doors on the first push of the key fob

unlock button.

The driver door on the first push of the keyfob unlock button.

Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/unlocking the doors and activation of the cour-tesy light upon unlocking the doors can be acti-vated or deactivated through the radio system.For further information, refer to the Informationand Entertainment System Owner’s ManualSupplement.The doors can also be unlocked by using theemergency key, located inside the key fob.

WARNING!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK, applythe parking brake, turn the engine OFF,remove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-dren. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

WARNING! (Continued)


15

Door And Trunk Lid LockBriefly pushing the lock button on the key fob willlock the doors and trunk lid, turn off the interiorlights, and flash the turn signals (if activated inthe radio system).If one or more doors are open, these doors willalso lock, and this is indicated by a rapidflashing of the turn signals. The doors preparefor locking, which becomes active from themoment they are closed. The doors will unlockagain only if the key fob is detected inside thepassenger compartment.The doors can be locked by using the emer-gency key in the driver’s side door lock.Trunk Lid OpeningRapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twiceto open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flashto indicate that the trunk lid has been opened.Remote StartThe remote start button on the key fobenables engine starting (push the button twicewithin five seconds to start the engine).Car FinderPush the lock or unlock button to remotely andtemporarily turn on the turn signals and headlights.This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in acrowded area like a parking garage, for example.

Pushing the lock or unlock button again willrestart the lights turn on timer (if the parkinglights functions were already active, it willremain active).This function is available only if the doors areclosed.

Replacing The Electronic Key Fob Battery

To replace the battery, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward andextract the cover pulling downwards.

Key Fob Cover Removal

2. Remove the emergency key from itshousing.

Removing Emergency Key

3. Remove the battery plug by rotating itcounter clockwise.

Removing Battery Plug


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

16

4. Remove the battery from its slot andreplace it with a new one of the same type.

Battery Location

Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key.

Request For Additional Keys

The system can recognize up to eight key fobswith remote control.To guarantee that the engine starts and thevehicle operates correctly, use only electronickey fobs specifically coded for the vehicle’selectronics.If an electronic key fob is coded for a vehicle,it cannot be used on any other vehicle.

Duplicating KeysIf you need a replacement key fob, go to anauthorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies toall Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped inthis vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and with Innovation, Science andEconomic Development Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNRd`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-ment applicables aux appareils radio exemptsde licence. L'exploitation est autorisée auxdeux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-lage, et

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter toutbrouillage radioélectrique subi, même si lebrouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-ettre le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a lassiguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo nocause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptarcualquier interferencia, incluyendo la quepueda causar su operación no deseada.

RF Exposure RequirementsTo comply with FCC RF exposure compliancerequirements, the device must be installedand operated to provide a separation distanceof at least 20 cm from all persons.This equipment complies with Canada radiationexposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-ronment. This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance 20 cm betweenthe radiator and your body.

NOTE:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corps.

CAUTION!

The battery replacement operation must bedone with care, in order not to damage theelectronic key.


17

(Continued)

REMARQUE:Des changements ou des modificationsn’ayant pas été expressément approuvés parla partie responsable de la conformité pour-raient révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation del’équipement.

IGNITION SYSTEM

Operation

To activate the keyless ignition, the key fobmust be inside the passenger compartment.

Keyless Ignition START/STOP Ignition ButtonThe keyless ignition has the following modes: OFF: engine off, steering locked. Some elec-

trical devices (e.g. central door lockingsystem, alarm, etc.) are still available.

ACC: all electrical devices are available. Thisstate can be entered by pushing the ignitionbutton once, without pressing the brakepedal.

ON/RUN: engine starting. This state can beentered by pushing the ignition button oncewhile pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:

With the keyless ignition in the ACC position:if 30 minutes pass with the gear selector inPARK and the engine stopped, the keylessignition will automatically reset to the OFFposition.

With the engine started, it is possible toremove the key fob from the vehicle. Theengine will remain running and the instru-ment cluster will indicate the absence of thekey fob when the door is closed.

For more information on the engine start-up,refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting AndOperating."

WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the parking brake. Always applythe parking brake fully when parked toguard against vehicle movement andpossible injury or damage.

When exiting the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the transmission gearselector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition in theACC or ON/RUN mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-gaged before driving; failure to do so canlead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury. Also be certain toleave the transmission in PARK. Failure todo so may allow the vehicle to roll andcause damage or injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brakeengaged, or repeated use of the parkingbrake to slow the vehicle may causeserious damage to the brake system.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

18

Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery

If the key fob battery is discharged, proceed asfollows to start the vehicle:

1. Lift the front armrest.

2. Lay the key fob on the indicated spot in thebottom of the center console, positioningthe key fob as shown in the followingimage, while pushing the START/STOPignition button to start the ignition.

Key Fob Placement Location

General Information












Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corpsREMARQUE:Des changements ou des modificationsn’ayant pas été expressément approuvés parla partie responsable de la conformité pour-raient révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation del’équipement.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remainson with the parking brake released, a brakesystem malfunction is indicated. Have thebrake system serviced by an authorizeddealer immediately.


19

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER

Engine Immobilizer Operation

The Engine Immobilizer system prevents unau-thorized use of the vehicle by disabling enginestarting.The system does not need to be enabled oractivated. Operation of the immobilizer is auto-matic whether the vehicle's doors are lockedor unlocked.When the ignition is placed in the ACC posi-tion, the Engine Immobilizer system identifiesthe code transmitted by the key. If the code isrecognized as valid, the Engine Immobilizersystem enables engine starting.When the ignition is brought back to OFF, theEngine Immobilizer system deactivates thecontrol unit controlling the engine, disablingengine starting.For the correct engine starting procedures,refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting AndOperating.”Irregular OperationIf the key code is not recognized during starting, theEngine Immobilizer Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is displayed on the instrument panel. Refer to"Warning Lights And Messages" in "Getting To KnowYour Instrument Panel". This condition leads to the

engine turning off after two seconds. In this case,cycle the ignition to the OFF position, and then toACC; if it is still blocked, try with the other keysprovided. If it is still not possible to start the engine,contact an authorized dealer.If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-inAttempt icon is displayed while driving, thismeans that the system is running a self-diag-nosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop). If the displaypersists, contact an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

Do not tamper with the Engine Immobilizersystem. Any modifications or alterationscould cause the protection function to bedeactivated.

The Engine Immobilizer system is not compat-ible with certain aftermarket remote startingsystems. The use of these devices couldcause problems when starting, as well as thedeactivation of the protection function.

All keys provided with the vehicle have beenprogrammed in accordance with the elec-tronics on the vehicle itself.

Each key has its own code which must bestored by the system's control unit. Contactan authorized dealer to have new keys (upto eight) stored with a code.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Alarm Activation

While armed, the alarm will sound in thefollowing scenarios: Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid (perimeter

protection)

Operation of ignition with a key which is notvalidated

Cutting of the battery cables

Movement inside the passenger compart-ment (volumetric protection — if equipped)

Unexpected lifting/tilting of the vehicle(anti-lift protection — if equipped)

Activation of the alarm triggers the acousticwarning and the turn signals.

NOTE:The alarm system is activated by the EngineImmobilizer system, which is automaticallyactivated when you get out of the vehicle withthe key fob and lock the doors.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

20

To Arm The Alarm

With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed andthe keyless ignition system placed in the OFFposition, push and release the lock button onthe key fob. The alarm can also be armed bypushing the Passive Entry door handle button,located on the exterior door handle. Forfurther information, refer to "Passive Entry" inthis chapter.

Passive Entry Door Handle ButtonWhen the alarm is armed, the warning lightson the panels of the interior front door handleswill flash.

Lock/Unlock ButtonsThe activation of the alarm is preceded by aself-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, thesystem emits a further acoustic signal.If a second acoustic signal is emitted after thealarm is already armed, wait about four secondsand disarm the alarm by pushing the unlockbutton. Verify that the doors, hood, and trunk lidare closed correctly and then rearm the systemby pushing the lock button on the key fob.If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even whenthe doors, hood, and trunk lid are correctlyclosed, a fault has occurred in system operation.In this case, contact an authorized dealer.

To Disarm The Alarm

Push the unlock button to disarm the alarm.While disarming, the following operations areperformed: Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if

programmed)

Two brief acoustic signals (if programmed)

Doors are unlocked

The alarm can also be disarmed using thePassive Entry system, by grasping one of thePassive Entry front door handles with a validkey fob in hand to unlock. For further informa-tion refer to "Passive Entry" in this chapter.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

NOTE:The alarm does not disarm when the doors areunlocked by inserting the blade of the emer-gency key, found inside the key fob, into thedoor handle lock cylinder.


21

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If Equipped

To ensure the correct operation of the Volu-metric/Anti-Lift Protection system, completelyclose the side windows.To disable the function, push the Volumetric/Anti-LiftProtection button before activating the alarm.When the function is disabled, this is indicatedby the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protec-tion button flashing for several seconds.

Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection ButtonAny disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-LiftProtection must be repeated each time theinstrument panel is switched off.

To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive Entry

To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.during a long period of vehicle inactivity),insert the blade of the emergency key, foundinside the key fob, into the door handle lockcylinder and turn the emergency key to theright (clockwise) to lock the door(s).

DOORS

Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside

If all doors are closed properly, they will automati-cally lock once the vehicle has exceeded approxi-mately 12 mph (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” functionactive).Push the interior lock button on the driver orpassenger side door panel trim to lock thedoors.With doors locked, push the unlock button onthe interior trim panel to unlock the doors.

NOTE:The key fob may not be found if it is locatednext to a mobile phone, lap top or other elec-tronic device; these devices may block the keyfob’s wireless signal.

Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

WARNING!

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injury ordeath.

For personal security and safety in theevent of a collision, lock the vehicle doorsas you drive as well as when you park andleave the vehicle.

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift theautomatic transmission into PARK, applythe parking brake, turn the engine OFF,remove the key fob from the vehicle andlock your vehicle.


Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake,brake pedal or the gear selector.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

22

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside

When locking the doors from the outside withthe doors closed, push the lock button on thekey fob.The door lock can be activated with all doorslocked and the trunk lid open. When the lockbutton on the key fob is pushed, all locks areactivated, including the open trunk lid. Thetrunk lid will be locked when it is closed.When unlocking the doors from the outside,push the unlock button on the key fob.Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside InAn EmergencyIf the battery is discharged or the key fob isinoperable, you can lock or unlock the doorsfrom the outside by inserting the blade of theemergency key, found inside the key fob, intothe door handle lock cylinder and turn theemergency key as follows. Lock — Turn the emergency key to the right

(clockwise)

Unlock — Turn the emergency key to the left(counter clockwise)

Passive Entry

The Passive Entry system can identify the pres-ence of a key fob near the doors and trunk lid.The system enables the doors and trunk lid tobe locked or unlocked without pushing anybutton on the key fob.The key fob is detected only after the systemrecognizes the presence of a hand on one ofthe front door handles. If the detected key fobis valid, the doors and the trunk lid areunlocked. Refer to the Information and Enter-tainment System Owner’s Manual Supple-ment for Passive Entry Settings.

NOTE:The key fob may not be able to be detected bythe vehicle keyless entry system if it is locatednext to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-tronic device; these devices may block the keyfob’s wireless signal and prevent the keylessentry system from starting the vehicle.

Grasping the handle of the driver's doorunlocks the driver's side door, or all doorsdepending on the mode set using the radiosystem. Refer to the Information and Enter-tainment System Owner’s Manual Supple-ment for Passive Entry Settings.

NOTE:If wearing gloves, or if it has rained and thedoor handle is wet, the activation sensitivity ofthe Passive Entry function may be reduced,resulting in a longer reaction time.

Door LockingTo lock the doors, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that you have the key fob andare close to the driver’s or passenger’sside door handle.

2. Push the Passive Entry door handle buttonor the Passive Entry trunk lid button, whichis located next to the exterior trunk lidrelease button. This will lock all doors andthe trunk lid. Door locking will activate thealarm as well.


CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Alwaysremove the key from the ignition and lockall of the doors when leaving the vehicleunattended.


23

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Switch (Vehicles With Passive Entry)

NOTE:After pushing the Passive Entry door handlebutton, you must wait two seconds before thedoors can be unlocked again using the passiveentry door handle button. This feature makesit possible to check whether the vehicle hasbeen locked correctly by pulling the doorhandle within two seconds. The doors will notbe unlocked again.

The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be lockedby pushing the lock button on the key fob or onthe interior door lock.

Driver Side Door Emergency OpeningIf the key fob does not work, e.g. because itsbattery is discharged or the vehicle battery isdischarged, the emergency key can be used tounlock the driver side door.To remove the emergency key from the keyfob, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward andextract the cover pulling downwards.

2. Remove the emergency key from the keyfob housing.

3. Insert the emergency key in the driver sidedoor lock cylinder and turn it to the left(counter clockwise) to unlock the door.

Emergency Key Release Buttons

Emergency Key

NOTE:

The emergency key blade is not directionaland can be inserted in either direction intothe lock.

To avoid leaving the key fob inside thevehicle accidentally, the Passive Entry func-tion features an automatic door unlockingfunction.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

24

If one of the vehicle doors is open and thePassive Entry door handle button or theinterior door lock switch is pushed, a checkof the inside and outside of the vehicle forthe presence of the key fob is made once allthe open doors are closed.


Interior Lock Switch Panel

While pulling the handle, do not push the doorlock/unlock button on the handle.

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When LockingIf the key fob is detected inside the vehicle, thePassive Entry function automatically unlocksall the vehicle doors and flashes the turnsignals.If one or more key fobs are inside the passengercompartment, the lock button on the key fobinside the passenger compartment is tempo-rarily disabled.The vehicle will not unlock the doors if anunauthorized key fob has been detected closeto the outside of the vehicle.If the Passive Entry function is disabled usingthe radio system, the protections to avoid acci-dentally leaving the key fob inside the vehicleare deactivated.

Trunk Lid AccessApproaching the trunk lid with a valid key fob,push the trunk lid release button.

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button

NOTE:

If the key fob is inadvertently forgotteninside of the trunk, and an attempt is madeto close it from outside, the trunk lid will notlock. With the doors locked, the trunk lidunlocked, and the key fob detected insidethe vehicle, the trunk lid will unlock againand the lights flash twice.

Before driving, make sure the trunk lid isclosed correctly.


25

Trunk Lid LockThe trunk lid of the vehicle may be locked bypushing the lock button on the key fob,pushing the door lock button on the doorhandles, or pushing the lock button on theinterior door panel of the vehicle.The trunk lid and the doors can be locked bypushing the passive entry button located aspart of the trunk lid release button switch.

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Switch (Vehicles With Passive Entry)

System Activation/DeactivationThe Passive entry system can be activated ordeactivated using the radio system.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies toall Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped inthis vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rulesand with Innovation, Science and Economic Devel-opment Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions:












GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

26

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corpsREMARQUE:Des changements ou des modifications n’ayantpas été expressément approuvés par la partieresponsable de la conformité pourraient révo-quer l’autorisation d’utilisation de l’équipement.

Child Safety Locks

To provide a safer environment for small childrenriding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equippedwith Child-Protection Door Lock system.This device can be engaged only with thedoors open.

Child Safety Lock Positions

Lock position: device locked (door openedfrom exterior only)

Unlock position: device unlocked (door maybe opened from the inside)

The Child Safety Locks remain locked even ifthe doors are unlocked.

NOTE:The rear doors cannot be opened from theinside when the Child Safety Lock is engaged.

Locking The Doors With A Discharged Battery

Proceed as follows to lock the doors if thevehicle battery is discharged.Rear Doors And Passenger Door

1. With the doors unlocked insert the emer-gency key from the key fob or a flat bladedscrewdriver into the door lock manualrelease lock cylinder.

Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder

2. Turn the manual release lock cylinderclockwise for the right door locks or coun-terclockwise for the left door locks.

3. Remove the key/screwdriver from themanual release lock.

Proceed in one of the following ways to realignthe door lock device (only when the batterycharge has been restored): Push the lock button on the key fob

Push the unlock button on the door panel

Unlock the driver’s door lock cylinder withthe emergency key

Operate the internal door handle

NOTE:For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks areengaged, and the previously described lockingprocedure is carried out, operating the internalhandle will not open the door. Instead, it willonly realign the lock release device. To openthe door, the outside handle must be used.The door central locking/unlocking buttonsare not deactivated when the emergency lockis engaged.


27

SEATSThe front seats can be adjusted to ensuremaximum comfort for the occupants. Whenadjusting the driver’s seat, keep the shouldersresting firmly against the backrest, and thewrists within reach of the top of the steeringwheel. The driver must also be able to fullypress the brake pedal.

Power Seats

NOTE:The seat layout may vary according to theversions.

The power seat switches are located on theoutboard side of the seat near the floor. Use theseswitches to move the driver's seat up, down,forward, rearward, or to recline the seatback.

Power Seat Adjustment

Forward/Rearward AdjustmentPush the seat switch forward or rearward toadjust to your desired position.

Seatback ReclineThe angle of the seatback can be adjustedforward or rearward. Push the seatback switchin the desired direction, and the seat will movein the direction of the switch. Release theswitch when the desired position is reached.Power LumbarThe power lumbar switch is located on theoutboard side of the power seat. Push theswitch forward or rearward to increase ordecrease the lumbar support. Push the switchupward or downward to raise or lower thelumbar support.Height AdjustmentThe height of the seats can be adjusted up ordown. Pull upward or push downward on theseat switch, and the seat will move in thedirection of the switch. Release the switchwhen the desired position is reached.Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If EquippedThe seat angle can be adjusted in four directions.Lift or push the front part of seat switch to movethe front part of the seat in the correspondingdirection. Release the seat switch when the seathas reached the desired position.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

1 — Seat Adjustment2 — Recline Adjustment3 — Lumbar Adjustment

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat orimpede its ability to move as it may causedamage to the seat controls. Seat travel maybecome limited if movement is stopped by anobstruction in the seat's path.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

28

Power Bolster Adjustment — If EquippedPush the power bolster adjustment buttons toregulate the width of the backrest through thelateral padding.

Seatback Width Adjustment

Seat Cushion Extension — If EquippedLift the adjustment lever and push the front ofthe cushion forward or rearward to extend thecushion by a few inches (centimeters).

Seat Cushion Extension

Driver Memory SeatStoring and recalling can be done with the igni-tion in the ACC position, vehicle speed at0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side doorclosed, or for three minutes after havingopened the driver's side door. An audiblechime is heard to confirm a memory profile isset or recalled. To set a memory profile, firstadjust your seat (and power mirror position ifdesired) until you are in the desired position.

Then, push the memory button you want toassign the set position to for 1.5 seconds.When a new seat position is memorized, thepreviously memorized position on the samebutton is automatically overwritten. Recallinga memorized position can also be done forapproximately three minutes after the doorsare opened and for approximately one minuteafter the engine is stopped. To recall a memo-rized position, push the assigned buttonbriefly.

4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons

6 — Adjustment Lever

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may bedangerous. Moving a seat while drivingcould result in loss of control which couldcause a collision and serious injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before fasteningthe seat belts and while the vehicle isparked. Serious injury or death couldresult from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined sothat the shoulder belt is no longer restingagainst your chest. In a collision you couldslide under the seat belt, which couldresult in serious injury or death.


29

Sparco Racing Seats (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped

Forward/Rearward AdjustmentThe adjustment lever is at the front of the seat,near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move theseat forward or rearward. Release the baronce the seat is in the desired position. Usingbody pressure, move forward and rearward onthe seat to be sure that the seat adjustershave latched.

Manual Seat Adjustment

Height AdjustmentPush the height adjustment button upward ordownward to obtain your desired height.Seatback ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the recline leverlocated on the outboard side of the seat, leanback to the desired position and release thelever. To return the seatback, lift the lever,lean forward and release the lever.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

NOTE:Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with SparcoRacing Seats will not be equipped with theheated seat feature.

With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, pushthe driver or passenger heated seat button located on the instrument panel.

NOTE:The heated seat function can also be activatedthrough the radio system. Refer to the Infor-mation and Entertainment System Owner’sManual Supplement for further information.

Heated Seat ButtonsYou can select three heating levels: Maximum — three LED indicators illumi-

nated on the buttons

Average — two LED indicators illuminatedon the buttons

Minimum — one LED indicator illuminatedon the buttons

After selecting a heating level, heat will be feltwithin a few minutes.A quick push of the heated seat button willselect the heat levels in order of highest tolowest. A fourth push of the button will turn theheated seat off.The “minimum” setting is automatically deacti-vated once a certain period of time has elapsed.This varies on a case-by-case basis, in accor-dance with the specific operating conditions.

NOTE:The heated seat function can only be activatedwith the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

1 — Adjustment Lever2 — Height Adjustment Button3 — Recline Lever


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

30

Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remotestart, the front heated seats can beprogrammed to come on during remote start.The feature can be activated through the radiosystem. Refer to the Information and Enter-tainment System Owner’s Manual Supple-ment for further information.

NOTE:The heated seat function can only be activatedwith remote start in temperatures below 39°F(4°C).

Rear Heated SeatsIf equipped with rear heated seats, thecontrols can be found on the rear of the centerconsole and will function the same as the frontheated seat controls.

Rear Heated Seat Buttons

NOTE:To preserve the battery charge, this functioncannot be activated when the engine is off.

Rear Seats

The rear seats allow for three passengers.

NOTE:Middle Seat: The rear seat is designed as a4+1 seat vehicle. The middle seat is of limiteduse. It is recommended that this seat only beused by a person who can use the backrest asa substitute for the head restraint.

Rear SeatThe seats and the seat belts are consideredcomponents of the vehicle’s OccupantRestraint System.

NOTE:Refer to "Seat Belt Systems" in "Safety" forfurther information.

Split Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward toprovide an additional storage area.Partial Extension Of The Luggage Compart-ment (1/3 Or 2/3)Extending the right side of the trunk allows youto carry two passengers on the left part of therear seat, while extending the left side allowsyou to carry one passenger.

WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to theskin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or otherphysical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may causeburns even at low temperatures, espe-cially if used for long periods of time.

Do not place anything on the seat or seat-back that insulates against heat, such asa blanket or cushion. This may cause theseat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seatthat has been overheated could causeserious burns due to the increasedsurface temperature of the seat.


31

Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat headrestraints. Refer to “Head Restraints” inthis chapter for further information.

2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn'timpede the movement of the backrestwhile tilting it.

3. From inside the luggage compartment,operate lever 1 to tilt the left part or lever2 to tilt the right part of the backrest: it willautomatically tilt forward. If necessary,assist the backrest during the initial stageof tilting.

Seat Release Levers

Full Expansion Of The TrunkTilting the rear seat forward completely allowsmaximum loading volume.Proceed as follows:

1. Completely lower the rear seat headrestraints.

2. Place the seat belts so that they don'timpede the movement of the backrestwhile tilting it.

3. From inside the luggage compartment,use levers 1 and 2 to fold down the back-rests; these will fold down forwards auto-matically. If necessary, accompany thebackrests during the initial stage of tilting.

Repositioning The BackrestsMove the seat belts to the side, making sure thatthey are correctly extended and not twisted, andthat they are not trapped behind the backrests ofthe seats. Make sure the seat belts are in thefront of the seatback and lift the backrests,pushing them back until you hear the lockingclick on both latch mechanisms.

Center Backrest Section TiltingThe center backrest can be tilted forward for a“Ski-Pass Through” feature from the trunk.Before tilting the backrest, make sure that therear center seat belt is not fastened and thatthere are not any objects in the middle part ofthe cushion.Using the release strap, release the centerpart of the backrest from its housing and tilt itusing the head restraint.

Center Backrest Section TiltingCenter Backrest Section RepositioningUsing the head restraint, lift the center portionupwards, accompanying it during its move-ment, and lightly push to make sure that it isproperly attached. Make sure that the armrestis properly attached by attempting to move it.If it is not attached, repeat the operation.

1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securelylocked into position. If the seatback is notsecurely locked into position the seat willnot provide the proper stability for childseats and/or passengers. An improperlylatched seat could cause serious injury.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

32

(Continued)

Easy Entry Function

The Easy Entry function is designed to movethe driver side seat forward automatically by2.36 inches (60 mm) to make it easier for thedriver to get in and out of the car.The movement is activated only if the seat isset to a driving position which is in front of theB-Pillar of the vehicle.The function is associated with power driverseats for each of the three stored positions.The Easy Entry function can be activated/deactivated through the radio system.

HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints are designed to reduce therisk of injury by restricting head movement inthe event of a rear impact. Head restraintsshould be adjusted so that the top of the headrestraint is located above the top of your ear.

Sparco Racing Seat Head Restraints (Quadrifoglio Vehicles) — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with non-adjust-able head restraints on the driver's andpassenger's seatbacks.The non-adjustable head restraints consist of atrimmed foam covering over the upper structureof the seatbacks and are intended to helpprotect you and the passenger from neck injury.Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, on-roadpositions so that the head restraint is positionedas close as possible to the back of your head.

Front Head Restraints (Adjustments)

The front head restraints may beheight-adjustable. To adjust them, operate asfollows: Upward adjustment: Raise the head

restraint until it clicks into place.

Downward adjustment: Push the adjust-ment button and push downward on thehead restraint to lower.

NOTE:To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if thehead restraints are not in use, lower the headrestraint all the way.

WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle.Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside the occu-pant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-stalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants. Follow the re-installationinstructions above prior to operating thevehicle or occupying a seat.

Do not place items over the top of theReactive Head Restraint, such as coats,seat covers or portable DVD players.These items may interfere with the opera-tion of the Reactive Head Restraint in theevent of a collision and could result inserious injury or death.


WARNING!

All occupants, including the driver, shouldnot operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seatuntil the head restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to minimize the riskof neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjustedwhile the vehicle is in motion. Driving avehicle with the head restraints improp-erly adjusted or removed could causeserious injury or death in the event of acollision.


33

Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments)

The height of the outboard head restraints canbe adjusted. The head restraint of the centerseat can only be removed. The height cannotbe adjusted.For upward adjustment, pull up on the headrestraint until it clicks into place.For downward adjustment, push in the adjust-ment button and lower the head restraintwhile holding the button to the desired height.

Rear Head Restraint

NOTE:To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if thehead restraints are not in use, lower the headrestraint all the way.

Head Restraints (Removal)

To remove the head restraints, proceed asfollows:

1. Raise the head restraints to theirmaximum height.

2. Push the adjustment button and the releasebutton at the side of the two supports.

3. Remove the head restraints by pullingthem upwards.

To reinstall the head restraints, proceed asfollows:

1. Hold down both the adjustment buttonand release button while placing the headrestraint post into the holes.

2. Then, reposition the head restraint to theappropriate height for the passengers.

WARNING!

All occupants, including the driver, shouldnot operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seatuntil the head restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to minimize the riskof neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjustedwhile the vehicle is in motion. Driving avehicle with the head restraints improp-erly adjusted or removed could causeserious injury or death in the event of acollision.

1 — Adjustment Button2 — Release Button

WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in acollision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle.Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside the occu-pant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-stalled in the vehicle to properly protectthe occupants. Follow the re-installationinstructions above prior to operating thevehicle or occupying a seat.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

34

STEERING WHEEL

Adjustments

This feature allows you to tilt the steeringcolumn upward or downward. It also allowsyou to lengthen or shorten the steeringcolumn. The tilt/telescoping lever is locatedbelow the steering wheel at the end of thesteering column.

Steering Wheel Adjustment1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control HandleA — OpenB — Closed

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column whiledriving. Adjusting the steering columnwhile driving or driving with the steeringcolumn unlocked, could cause the driverto lose control of the vehicle. Failure tofollow this warning may result in seriousinjury or death.

Do not place any objects on the steeringwheel (e.g. permanently fixed covers ofany type or material) which could interferewith the capacitive hand detection sensoron the steering wheel of the Active BlindSpot Assist (ABSA), Lane Keeping Assist(LKA), Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) or HighwayAssist (HAS) systems (if equipped).


35

To Adjust The Position:

1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handledown to the open position.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

3. Lock the desired position by pushing theTilt/Telescoping Control Handle to theclosed position.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

NOTE:Quadrifoglio vehicles equipped with SparcoRacing Seats will not be equipped with theheated steering wheel feature.

While the engine is running, push the heatedsteering wheel button on the instrumentpanel.

Heated Steering Wheel ButtonWhen the function is enabled, the indicator onthe button will illuminate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remotestart, the heated steering wheel can beprogrammed to come on during remote start.The feature can be activated through the radiosystem. Refer to the Information and Enter-tainment System Owner’s Manual Supple-ment for further information.

NOTE:The heated steering wheel function can onlybe activated with remote start in temperaturesbelow 39°F (4°C).

WARNING!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out anyafter-market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications (e.g.installation of anti-theft device) that couldadversely affect performance. Doing so couldvoid the New Vehicle Limited Warrant, causeSERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDINGINJURY, and also result in the vehicle notmeeting type-approval requirements.

WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to theskin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi-cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or otherphysical conditions must exercise carewhen using the steering wheel heater. Itmay cause burns even at low tempera-tures, especially if used for long periods.

Do not place anything on the steeringwheel that insulates against heat, such asa blanket or steering wheel covers of anytype and material. This may cause thesteering wheel heater to overheat.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

36

MIRRORS

Electrochromic Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlightglare from vehicles behind you.The electrochromic mirror has a power button toactivate/deactivate the automatic dimming/anti-glaring function.

Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

Outside Power Mirrors

Power AdjustmentThe power mirrors can be adjusted with theignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.To adjust the power mirrors, first select thedesired mirror using the power mirror control.

Power Mirror Control

To adjust the selected mirror, push the knob inthe direction desired.

NOTE:Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knobto the neutral position to prevent accidentalmovements.

Power FoldingTo fold the door mirrors in using the PowerFolding Mirror function, make sure the powermirror control knob is in the neutral position,and move the knob to the power folding posi-tion. Move the knob again to return the mirrorsto the driving position.If the power mirror control knob is movedagain during door mirror folding (from closedto open position and vice versa), the move-ment direction is reversed.Automatic ActivationActivating the central door locking systemfrom outside the vehicle automatically foldsthe mirrors. The mirrors return to the drivingposition when the vehicle is then unlocked.If the door mirrors were folded using the powermirror control knob, they can only be returnedto the driving position by moving the knob tothe power folding position again.

NOTE:The power folding operation can be enabledonly when the vehicle speed is lower than31 mph (50 km/h).

1 — Power Mirror Control KnobA — LeftB — RightC — Power Folding PositionD — Neutral


37

Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If EquippedLike the inside electrochromic mirror, an auto-matic dimming feature is also available on theoutside rear view mirrors to prevent glare. Theautomatic dimming button is the same for allrear view mirrors.

Heated Mirrors

Push the rear defrost button in the climatecontrols to activate the heated mirrors.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located to the left ofthe steering wheel on the instrument panel.This switch controls the operation of the head-lights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,instrument panel light dimming, interior lightsand rear fog lights.In addition, there are buttons for parkingsensors deactivation and Engine Stop/Start.Refer to “Starting And Operating” for furtherinformation.

Headlight Switch

The instrument panel and the various controlson the dashboard will be illuminated when theexterior lights are turned on.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns the headlightson or off according to ambient light levels.Function ActivationRotate the light switch to the (AUTO) position.

NOTE:The function can only operate with the ignitionposition cycled to ON/RUN.

Function DeactivationTo deactivate the function, turn the lightswitch to a position other than the (AUTO)position.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

With the ignition placed in the ON/RUN posi-tion, and the light switch turned to the posi-tion, if the dusk sensor detects sufficientexternal light, the Daytime Running Lights willturn on automatically while the other lightsremain off.If the turn signals are operated, the brightnessof the corresponding Daytime Running Lightswill be decreased as long as the turn signalsare on.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in anoutside convex mirror will look smaller andfarther away than they really are. Relyingtoo much on side convex mirrors couldcause you to collide with another vehicle orother object. Use your inside mirror whenjudging the size or distance of a vehicleseen in a side convex mirror.

1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation Button2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running Lights,Headlight Switch3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer4 — Rear Fog Light Button5 — Engine Stop/Start Button


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

38

The DRL can be activated/deactivated fromthe radio system, by selecting the followingfunctions in sequence on the main MENU:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Daytime Running Lights.”

NOTE:The Daytime Running Lights cannot be deacti-vated in Canadian markets.

Rear Fog Light

The rear fog light switch is integrated with theheadlight switch.

Push the button to turn the rear fog lightson/off.The rear fog lights turn on only when the head-lights or parking lights are turned on. The lightscan be turned off by pushing the buttonagain or by turning the headlight switch to theO (off) position and holding it there for a fewseconds.When the engine is stopped with the rear foglights on, they will remain off the next time theengine is started.

Parking Lights

With the ignition in the OFF position, turn theheadlight switch to the position to turn theparking lights on. All of the parking lights willturn on for eight minutes, and opening thedoor activates an audible warning.To leave only the lights on one side (right/left)illuminated, you must move the multifunctionlever (located on the left side of the steeringwheel) to the side that you want to remain on.With the parking lights on, the warning lighton the instrument panel will illuminate.

Headlight Off Delay

The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays theturning off of the headlights for a set timewhen the ignition is placed in the OFF position.The function can be activated from the radiosystem by selecting the following functions insequence on the main menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Headlight Off Delay.”

The side lights and the headlights stay on for atime that can be set between 30, 60, and 90seconds.

Function ActivationWith the headlights on, place the ignition inthe OFF position, the timer will then start.

NOTE:To activate this function, the headlights mustbe deactivated within two minutes after theignition has been placed in the OFF position.

Function DeactivationThis function is deactivated by turning on theheadlights, the side lights, or by placing theignition in the ON/RUN position.

Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS Function) — If Equipped

This is a system combined with Xenon head-lights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if equipped)which directs the headlights horizontally, andcontinuously and automatically adapts themto the driving conditions around bends orwhen cornering.The system directs the headlights to light upthe road in the best way, taking into accountthe speed of the vehicle and the bend orcorner angle, as well as the speed at which thesteering wheel is turned.The adaptive lights are automatically activatedwhen the vehicle is started.


39

High Beam Headlights

To activate the fixed high beam headlights,push the multifunction lever, located on theleft side of the steering wheel, towards theinstrument panel. The headlight switch must

be turned to the (auto) or (on) position.

With high beam headlights on, the HighBeam Indicator on the instrument panel willilluminate.

Multifunction LeverThe high beam headlights are turned off bypulling the lever to its original position. Thewarning light/icon will turn off in the instru-ment panel when the headlights are turned off.Flashing The HeadlightsPulling the multifunction lever toward thesteering wheel will activate the high beamheadlights manually. The lights will remain onas long as the lever is held. Once the lever isreleased, the lights will resume the previousposition.

Automatic High Beam Headlights — IfEquippedThe Automatic High Beam Headlights systemprovides increased forward lighting at night byautomating high beam control through the useof a digital camera mounted on the wind-shield. This camera detects vehicle specificlight and automatically switches from highbeams to low beams until the approachingvehicle is out of view.This function is enabled with the radio system,and can only be activated with the light switchturned to (auto).If the high beam headlights are on, the blueicon/warning light will illuminate in theinstrument panel.When the speed is higher than 25 mph(40 km/h) and the function is active, the lightswill turn off if the multifunction lever is pushedagain.When the speed is lower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and the function is active, the func-tion switches the high beam headlights off.If the high beam headlights are operatedquickly again (pushing the multifunction levertowards the instrument panel), the warninglight/icon will illuminate in the instrumentpanel, and the high beam headlights will turnon constantly until the speed exceeds 25 mph(40 km/h).When the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) isexceeded again, the automatic functioning isreactivated.

If the multifunction lever is pushed again withthe Automatic High Beam Headlights acti-vated, the Automatic High Beam Headlightsfunction deactivates.To deactivate the automatic headlight func-

tion, rotate the headlight switch to the position.

NOTE:

If the system recognizes heavy traffic areas,the automatic functions remain disabledindependently of the vehicle’s speed.

The Automatic High Beam functionality mayalso be influenced by:

• Reflections on road signs

• Dim headlights from oncoming traffic

• Poor weather conditions

• Presence of dirt or other obstructions onthe sensor

• Damage to the windshield

Turn Signals

To activate the turn signals function, move themultifunction lever, located on the left side ofthe steering wheel, up or down until it reachesthe detent. Moving the lever upward flashesthe right turn signal and moving the leverdownward will flash the left turn signal.

The or turn signal will blink on the instru-ment panel.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

40

The turn signals turn off automatically whenthe vehicle is brought back onto a straightcourse.Lane Change FunctionTap the lever up or down once, without movingbeyond the detent, and the turn signal (right orleft) will flash five times. Then, the turn signal(right or left) will automatically turn off.To turn off the flashing before the end of thecycle, move the lever in the opposite directionuntil the first click (about half way).

Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — If Equipped

The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting Diodes(LEDs) in order to better illuminate the streetand increase the light angle while turning. Thisfunction is enabled by rotating the light switch

to position (on) or (auto). The SBL LEDsactivate when the speed is below 25 mph(40 km/h) and the steering radius is below0.3 miles (500 m).This function can be activated/deactivated onthe radio system by selecting the followingfunctions in sequence on the main menu:

1. “Settings.”

2. “Lights.”

3. “Cornering Lights.”

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Front Map Reading Lights

The front map/reading and overhead lights aremounted in the overhead console. Each light canbe turned on by pushing the correspondingswitch on the console. These switches are backlitfor night time visibility. To turn the lights off, pushthe switch a second time.

Overhead Console

NOTE:Before getting out of the vehicle, ensure thatthe overhead lights are off. This will preventthe battery level from being drained once thedoors are closed. If a light is left on acciden-tally, the overhead lights turn off automaticallyapproximately 15 minutes after the enginehas been turned off.

Overhead Light TimingTo assist getting in and out of the vehicle atnight or in poorly-lit areas, two timed modesare available to keep the interior lighting onafter the engine is turned off.Timing While Getting Into The VehicleThe overhead lights will illuminate as follows: For a few seconds when the doors are

unlocked.

For approximately three minutes when oneof the doors is opened.

For a few seconds when the doors arelocked.

Timing is interrupted when the ignition isplaced in the ON/RUN position.

1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch3 — Overhead Lights Switch4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light Switch6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light7 — Center Reading/Map Light8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light


41

Exiting Overhead Light TimingThe overhead lights will turn off as follows: After all doors are closed upon entering the

vehicle, the three minute timer will stop anda second timer will start for the overheadlights. This timing will end when the ignitionis placed in the ON/RUN position.

When the doors are locked (either with keyfob or with key inserted on driver’s sidedoor).

After 15 minutes to preserve the battery.

Timing While Getting Out Of The VehicleAfter placing the ignition in the OFF position,the overhead lights will turn on as follows: For a few seconds after the engine stops.

For approximately three minutes when oneof the doors is opened.

For a few seconds when the last door isclosed.

The timing ends automatically when the doorsare locked.

Vanity Mirror LightsOn the driver and passenger sun visor, there isa light which illuminates the sun visor mirrorwhen folded down.

Sun Visor Mirror

The courtesy light turns on automatically bylifting the cover.

Glove Compartment Light

This light turns on automatically when theglove compartment is opened and turns offwhen it is closed.The light turns on and off regardless of theignition status.

Glove Compartment Light

Interior Ambient Lighting

The brightness of the interior lighting can beadjusted via the radio system.To access the adjustment function, on themain menu select the following items insequence:

1. "Settings."

2. "Lights."

3. "Interior Ambient Lighting."

The lights can be adjusted to seven differentlevels of brightness.

1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

42

Door Light

This vehicle is equipped with door courtesylamps that illuminate the entry way for thedriver or passenger when the door is opened,and turns off when it is closed.The light turns on and off regardless of theignition status.

Door Light

As part of the "Passive Entry" system, anotherlight can be found under each exterior doorhandle.

Exterior Door Handle Light

Rear Overhead Light

The rear overhead lights are activated or deac-tivated by two on/off switches located withinthe lights on the ceiling above the rear seats.

Rear Overhead Light

The light turns on when a door is opened.

NOTE:The light will turn off automatically after a fewminutes if a door is left open. To turn it onagain, open another door or close and reopenthe same door.

1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch4 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light Switch


43

Courtesy Trunk Lights

The trunk features two courtesy lights.These courtesy lights turn on automaticallywhen the trunk is opened and turn off when itis closed.

Courtesy Trunk LightsThe courtesy lights will turn on and off regard-less of the ignition status.

NOTE:If the trunk is left open, the lights will automat-ically turn off after 15 minutes to preservebattery life.

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

With the daytime running lights or headlightson, rotate the dimmer control upward toincrease the instrument panel brightness andthe control button icons. Rotate the dimmercontrol downward to decrease brightness.

Dimmer Control

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Windshield Wiper Stalk

The windshield wiper stalk is located on theright side of the steering wheel.The windshield wipers will only operate withthe ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

CAUTION!

Turn the windshield wipers off whendriving through an automatic car wash.Damage to the windshield wipers mayresult if the wiper control is left in any posi-tion other than off.

In cold weather, always turn off the wiperswitch and allow the wipers to return tothe “Park” position before turning off theengine. If the wiper switch is left on andthe wipers freeze to the windshield,damage to the wiper motor may occurwhen the vehicle is restarted.

Always remove any buildup of snow thatprevents the windshield wiper blades fromreturning to the off position. If the wind-shield wiper control is turned off and theblades cannot return to the off position,damage to the wiper motor may occur.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

44

Windshield Wiper/Washers

Windshield Wiper Switch

Windshield Wiper OperationRotating the switch to the Low ContinuousWiper Speed position (2) activates the first(low) level continuous speed of the windshieldwipers in manual mode.Rotating the switch to the High ContinuousWiper Speed position (1) activates the second(high) level continuous speed of the wind-shield wipers in manual mode.

Rain SensorsRotating the switch to the Low Sensitivity RainSensing position (4), activates the first, lesssensitive level of the Rain Sensing function.Rotating the switch to the High Sensitivity RainSensing position (3), activates the second, moresensitive level of the Rain Sensing function.Refer to “Rain Sensor” in this section for moreinformation on how this system functions.Windshield Washer OperationPull the stalk toward the steering wheel tooperate the windshield washer.Keep the stalk pulled to activate both thewindshield washer jet and the windshieldwiper with a single movement. The wipers andwashers will continue to operate until you letgo of the stalk.The windshield wiper stops working threestrokes after the stalk is released, followed bya final stroke six seconds later to complete thecycle.

MistUse this feature when weather conditionsmake occasional usage of the wipers neces-sary. Push the stalk upward to the MIST posi-tion and release for a single wiping cycle. Thisfunction is useful to remove small deposits ofdust from the windshield or morning dew.

NOTE:This function does not activate the windshieldwasher. To spray windshield washer fluid ontothe windshield, the washing function must beused.

1 — High Continuous Wiper Speed2 — Low Continuous Wiper Speed3 — High Sensitivity Rain Sensing4 — Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing5 — Windshield Wiper Off

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through thewindshield could lead to a collision. Youmight not see other vehicles or otherobstacles. To avoid sudden icing of thewindshield during freezing weather, warmthe windshield with the defroster beforeand during windshield washer use.


45

Rain Sensor

The Rain Sensor is located behind the interiorrear view mirror. This feature senses moistureon the windshield and automatically activatesthe wipers for the driver.

Rain SensorThe feature is especially useful for road splashor over spray from the windshield washers ofthe vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multi-function lever to one of four settings to acti-vate this feature.The sensor has an adjustment range thatvaries progressively from wiper still (no stroke)when the windshield is dry, to wiper at contin-uous speed (fast operation) with intense rain.

ActivationRotating the wiper switch to the Low SensitivityRain Sensing position (4) or High SensitivityRain Sensing position (3) activates the rainsensor.The activation of the rain sensor system isdone by tapping the wiper stalk upwards whilethe switch is in the Low Sensitivity RainSensing position (4) or High Sensitivity RainSensing position (3).The variation in sensitivity during rain sensoroperation is also signaled by a stroke of thewiper (command acquired and implemented).This stroke is also executed with the wind-shield dry.If the windshield washer is used with the rainsensor activated, the normal washing cycle isperformed, after which the rain sensorresumes its normal automatic operation.

NOTE:

Keep the glass in the sensor area clean.

With the windshield wiper lever in the LowSensitivity Rain Sensing position (4) or HighSensitivity Rain Sensing position (3), wipingoperates automatically and is disabledwhen the outside temperature is below32°F (0°C).

DeactivationUse the wiper switch or place the ignition inthe OFF position.In the event of malfunction of the rain sensorwhile it is active, the windshield wiper oper-ates intermittently at a speed consistent withthe sensitivity setting of the rain sensor,whether or not there is rain on the glass for aslong as the sensor failure is indicated on thedisplay.The sensor continues to operate and it ispossible to set the windshield wiper to contin-uous mode (1 or 2). The failure indicationremains on for as long as the sensor is active.The rain sensor is able to recognize and auto-matically adjust itself in the presence of thefollowing conditions: Presence of dirt on the controlled surface

(salt, dirt, etc.).

Presence of streaks of water caused by theworn window wiper blades.

Difference between day and night.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

46

CLIMATE CONTROL

Passenger Compartment Air Vents

Side Air Vents To adjust the position of the Side Air Vents,

move the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) in anydirection.

Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) toadjust the air flow. Rotating the Side AirVent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close thevent. Rotating it counterclockwise will openthe vent.

Side Air Vents

Central Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central Air

Vents, move the Central Air Vent Adjuster(2) up or down.

Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster(3) to adjust the air flow. Rotating Central AirVent Air Flow Adjuster (3) up will open thevents, allowing for maximum airflow.Rotating it down will close the vents.

Central Air Vents

Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Rear Air Vents,

move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) in anydirection.

Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) toadjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear AirVent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close thevent. Rotating it counterclockwise will openthe vent.

Rear Air Vents

1 — Demister Air Vents2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster


47

Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Automatic Climate Control System (Instrument Panel Controls)

1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation) 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selection Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — If Equipped4 — Max Defrost Button 12 — Air Conditioning Button5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — If Equipped6 — Rear Defrost Button 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button — If Equipped7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Selection Button 15 — Air Recirculation Button8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

48

Touchscreen Controls

Automatic Climate Control System (Touchscreen Controls)

1 — Driver Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 8 — Heated Rear Window On/Off Button2 — Driver Side Air Distribution Buttons 9 — MAX-DEF Activation/Deactivation Button (Rapid Defrosting/Demisting)3 — Fan Speed Adjustment Button 10 — Air Recirculation On/Off Button4 — Passenger Side Air Distribution Buttons 11 — Climate Control System Compressor On/Off Button5 — Passenger Side Temperature Adjustment Bar 12 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)6 — SYNC Button 13 — Climate Control System On/Off Button7 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)


49

Description

The Automatic Dual Zone Climate ControlSystem adjusts the temperature and air distri-bution independently between the driver andpassenger.The system maintains the set temperatureinside the passenger compartment andcompensates for outside temperature change.

NOTE:The reference temperature is 72°F (22°C) foroptimal comfort management.

The automatic setting will adjust the followingto maintain comfort within the passengercompartment: Air temperature from the driver/front

passenger side vents

Air distribution from the driver/frontpassenger side vents

Fan speed (continuous variation of the airflow)

Compressor variations (for cooling/dehu-midifying the air)

Air recirculation

The Climate Control System can also be oper-ated manually by using the buttons and knobson the faceplate.Manual selections will override the automaticsettings, which are stored until the AUTObutton is pushed. If the system intervenes forsafety reasons, the automatic setting will takecontrol of the system.The below operations will not deactivate theautomatic (AUTO) function: Air Recirculation activation/deactivation

A/C activation/deactivation

SYNC function activation

Rear Window Defrost activation/deactiva-tion

When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s internaltemperature is controlled according to the settemperature.

The following can be manually set or adjusted: Driver/passenger air temperature

Blower speed (continuous variation)

Air distribution (seven positions for driverand passenger)

A/C activation

Front Defroster

Air recirculation

Rear Defroster

System deactivation

Operating Mode

The Climate Control system can be activatedin different ways. It is recommended to use theautomatic function. Push the AUTO button andset the desired temperatures.The automatic system adjusts the tempera-ture, quantity, and distribution of air intro-duced into the passenger compartment. Italso controls air recirculation and the activa-tion of the air conditioner.At any time during automatic operation, youcan change the temperature, activate or deac-tivate the Rear Defroster, activate SYNC, acti-vate or deactivate the air conditioner, andactivate or deactivate air recirculation. Thesystem will automatically adjust to the newsettings.

CAUTION!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, whichdoes not pollute the environment in the event ofaccidental leakage. Under no circumstances,use R134a and R12 fluids, which areincompatible with the components of thissystem.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

50

Climate Control Display Settings

The Climate Control settings are visible on theradio screen.The display on the radio system is a pop upwindow, which is activated by pushing thebuttons or turning the knobs on the ClimateControl system. The indicator lights located onthe number of buttons and knobs indicate thatthe selected feature is on/off. If no operationis performed for a predetermined time, thepop-up will close on the display.

Air Temperature Adjustment

Rotate the driver or passenger TemperatureAdjustment Knob clockwise for warmer tempera-tures or counterclockwise for cooler tempera-tures. The set temperatures are shown on theradio system.Push the SYNC button to sync the driver andpassenger air temperatures.Rotate the passenger Temperature Adjust-ment Knob to cancel the SYNC function. Thiswill set a new passenger side temperature.Rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob fullyclockwise to engage the HI (maximum heating)setting or fully counterclockwise to engage theLO (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivatethese functions, rotate the TemperatureAdjustment Knob to the desired temperature.Rear passengers’ temperature is linked todriver side selection.

Air Distribution Selection

Push the Air Distribution Selection button onthe faceplate to change the mode of air distri-bution.

Air flow to the windshield and front sidewindow vents to demist/defrost them.

Air flow at the central and side dash-board vents to ventilate the chest andface.Air flow to the front and rear floorvents. This setting heats thepassenger compartment the quickest.Air flow distributed between floorvents (hotter air) and the central andside dashboard vents (cooler air).This air distribution setting is useful

on sunny days during spring and autumn.Air flow distributed between floorvents, windshield, and front sidewindow defrosting/demisting vents.This distribution setting allows the

passenger compartment to warm up withoutfogging up the windows.

Air flow distribution between wind-shield demisting/defrosting ventsand side/central dashboard vents.This setting allows air to flow to the

windshield on sunny days.

Air flow distribution to all vents.

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls automati-cally manage the air distribution. When setmanually, the respective symbols on the radiosystem indicate the air distribution setting.

Fan Speed Adjustment

Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase ordecrease the blower speed. The speed isdisplayed with lighted indicators in the radiosystem display. Maximum fan speed = all indicators illumi-

nated on the radio system display

Minimum fan speed = one indicator illumi-nated on the radio system display

The fan can be turned off by rotating theBlower Speed Knob counterclockwise to theoff position (all segments on the radio systemdisplay are turned off).

NOTE:To restore automatic control of the fan speed,push the AUTO button.


51

AUTO Button

When the AUTO button is pushed (indicatorilluminated), the Climate Control system auto-matically adjusts the following settings: Quantity and distribution of air flow in the

passenger compartment

The air conditioner

Air recirculation

Cancels any manual settings

Selecting the AUTO function illuminates theindicator on the A/C button or .If air distribution or the fan speed is manuallyadjusted, the AUTO button indicator turns offto indicate that the Climate Control system isno longer in AUTO mode.After a manual adjustment, push the AUTObutton to resume the automatic system.

SYNC Button

Push the SYNC button (indicator illuminated)to sync the passenger side air temperaturewith the driver side air temperature.This function makes temperature regulationeasier when the driver is traveling alone.Turn the passenger Temperature AdjustmentKnob or push the passenger side Air Distribu-tion Selection Button to change the passengerside air temperature and return to separate airtemperature management.

Air Recirculation And Air Quality System (AQS)

Air Recirculation is managed according to thefollowing operating mode: Automatic engagement: indicator is illumi-

nated above the “A” on the Air RecirculationButton

Forced activation (air circulation alwaysactivated): indicator illuminated above the

icon on the Air Recirculation Button

Forced deactivation (air recirculationalways off with intake of outside air): bothindicators not illuminated on the Air Recir-culation Button

The three operating conditions are obtained bypushing the Air Recirculation Button insequence.Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Func-tion — If EquippedWhen the automatic recirculation function isselected, the AQS function automatically acti-vates internal air recirculation when theoutside air is polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic andtunnels).At low external temperatures or in highhumidity, the automatic function turns off toavoid fogging up the windows. The user canselect the function again by pushing the AirRecirculation Button.

In automatic operation, air recirculation will becontrolled by the system according to outsideenvironmental conditions.

NOTE:

With the AQS function active and after theinternal air recirculation system has beenfunctioning for a set amount of time, theClimate Control System enables air intaketo cycle the air in the passenger compart-ment for a set time. The AQS function isdisabled during the air changes.

The engagement of the recirculation systemmakes it possible to reach the requiredheating or cooling conditions faster. It is,however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/colddays as it can increase the possibility of thewindows fogging. When the outsidetemperature is low, recirculation is forcedoff to prevent the windows from fogging up.

A/C Compressor

Push the A/C button to activate or deactivatethe A/C compressor (indicator illuminatedwhen activated). The A/C compressor willremain off even after the engine has stopped.When the A/C compressor is turned off, thesystem deactivates air recirculation to preventthe windows from fogging up. If the climatecontrol system can maintain the temperature,with the A/C turned off, the AUTO feature willremain on and the AUTO button indicator lightwill not switch off.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

52

To restore automatic control of the A/Ccompressor, push the A/C button or the AUTObutton. With the A/C compressor off, the airspeed can be set manually using the Air SpeedAdjustment Knob.When the A/C compressor is on, and theengine is running, air speed cannot be lowerthan the minimum speed (only one indicatorlight is lit).

NOTE:When the A/C is off the Climate Control systemcan not produce air that is colder than thecurrent outside temperature. Under certainenvironmental conditions, windows could fogup rapidly, since the air is not dehumidified.

Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Function

Push the MAX-DEF button (indicator illumi-nated) to defrost the windshield and sidewindows.While in MAX-DEF function, the air conditionerwill: Activate the air conditioner compressor

when the weather allows

Turn air recirculation off

Set the maximum air temperature (HI) onboth the driver and passenger side

Activate a blower speed based on thetemperature of the engine coolant

Adjust the air flow towards the windshieldand front side windows

Activate the Rear Window Defroster

Display the fan speed (indicators illumi-nated) and current air distribution setting

NOTE:The MAX-DEF function remains active forapproximately three minutes once the enginecoolant reaches the proper temperature.

When the function is on, AUTO mode will deac-tivate. The only manual operations possibleare adjusting blower speed and turning off theRear Window Defroster.

Pushing the button switches off theMAX-DEF function.

Rear Defroster

Push the Rear Defroster button to activate(indicators illuminated) the Rear Defroster.The Rear Defroster will turn off after20 minutes or once the engine is turned off. Toreactive the Rear Defroster, push the RearDefroster button.

NOTE:To avoid damage, do not apply stickers overthe interior heating filaments of the RearDefroster.

Humidity Sensor

The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent thewindows from fogging up. The AUTO function(indicator illuminated) must be on for theHumidity Sensor to function.When outside temperature is low, the systemmay turn the compressor on and turn air recir-culation off for safer driving.

Switching Off/On The Climate Control System

Switching Off The Climate Control SystemRotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knobcompletely counterclockwise to turn off theClimate Control System.With the air conditioner off: Air recirculation is on

The A/C compressor is off

The fan is off

The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated

NOTE:The climate control system stores the previ-ously set temperatures and resumes opera-tion when any button on the system is pushed.

Switching On The Climate Control SystemTo switch the climate control system on inautomatic mode, push the AUTO button.


53

Stop/Start

The Stop/Start system shuts off the enginewhen the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), asa fuel conservation measure.In order to maintain comfort in the cabin, theStop/Start feature will not activate if any of thefollowing conditions exist: The climate control system is in AUTO mode

(indicator illuminated), and the vehicle hasyet to reach the set temperature

The climate control system is in LOmaximum cooling

The climate control system is in HImaximum heating

The climate control system is in theMAX-DEF status

When the Stop/Start system is active, theengine will restart if the inside temperaturechanges significantly, or if the LO setting, orMAX-DEF setting, is activated.With Stop/Start system on (engine is OFF), airflow is reduced to keep the compartmentcomfort conditions for longer.Until the temperature drastically changeswithin the cabin, the climate control systemwill continue to maintain the temperaturewhile the engine is off. By deactivating theStop/Start system with the button (locatedby the headlight switch), the climate controlsystem operates normally according to thesettings.

NOTE:

In harsh climate conditions, limit the use ofthe Stop/Start system to prevent thecompressor from continuously switching onand off. This will prevent rapid misting of thewindows and the accumulation of humidityin the passenger compartment.

When the Stop/Start system is on, theclimate control system will always take air infrom outside, reducing the probability of thewindows fogging up.

System Maintenance

In winter, the Climate Control System must beturned on at least once a month for approxi-mately ten minutes.Have the system inspected at an authorizeddealer before the summer.

POWER WINDOWS

Power Window Switches

The power window switches work with the igni-tion in the ACC or ON/RUN position and forthree minutes after the ignition has beenplaced in the OFF position. When one of thefront doors is opened, this operation isdisabled.Driver Side Front Door ControlsThe switches are located on the door paneltrim. All windows can be controlled from thedriver side door panel.

Power Window Switches

Window OpeningPush the buttons to open the desired window.Each button has two position steps. Pushgently, without going past the detent formanual window operation, while pushing thesame button harder, past the detent, activates“continuous automatic” operation.If the button is pushed again, the window willstop in the desired position.Window ClosingPull the window switch up to move the windowupward. Hold the switch for at least half of asecond and the window will go up automatically.

1 — Front Left Window Switch2 — Front Right Window Switch3 — Rear Right Window Switch4 — Window Lockout Switch5 — Rear Left Window Switch


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

54

To stop the window during Auto-Up operation,push or pull the window switch again.Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door ControlsThere are single window controls on thepassenger and rear door trim panels whichoperate the door windows.Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch ProtectionThe vehicle is equipped with an anti-pinchsafety device for closing the windows.If the safety system senses any obstacle whilethe window is closing, it will stop the window’smovement and reverse it, depending on itsposition.This device is also useful if the windows areactivated accidentally by children inside thevehicle.The anti-pinch safety function is activated bothduring the manual and the automatic opera-tion of the window.When the anti-pinch system is activated, thewindow closing is immediately interrupted.Then the window closing is automaticallyreversed and the window lowers by about8 inches (20 cm) in relation to the first stopposition. The window cannot be operatedduring this time.

NOTE:In the event of an error, or if the anti-pinchprotection is activated three consecutivetimes, the automatic closing operation of the

window will be deactivated. In order to restorethe correct operation of the system, thewindow must be lowered.

Power Window System InitializationIf power supply is interrupted, the electricwindow automatic operation must be reinitial-ized.To perform the initialization procedure, whichmust be done on each door with the doorsclosed, manually fully close the window to beinitialized.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

Power Sunroof

The power sunroof consists of two glasspanels (the front one is power and the rear onefixed) and is fitted with a power sunshade inthe front, as well as a manually operatedsunshade in the rear.Operation of the sunroof is only possible withthe ignition placed in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-tion. Refer to “Ignition System” in this chapterfor further information.The sunroof has three preset positions: Fully closed

Comfort (intermediate opening)

Fully open

NOTE:You cannot have the sunshade closed whenthe sunroof is open.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in avehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. Never leave the key fob in or nearthe vehicle, or in a location accessible tochildren. Do not leave the ignition of avehicle equipped with keyless ignition in theON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularlyunattended children, can becomeentrapped by the power sunroof while oper-ating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-ment may result in serious injury or death.

In a collision, there is a greater risk ofbeing thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be seriouslyinjured or killed. Always fasten your seatbelt properly and make sure all passen-gers are also properly secured.

Do not allow small children to operate thesunroof. Never allow your fingers, other bodyparts, or any object, to project through thesunroof opening. Injury may result.


55

Opening

To open the sunroof’s front panel, push theopen/close button toward the rear of thevehicle to open to the comfort position (halfway). Pushing the button a second time willopen to the fully open position.The automatic motion can be interrupted inany position by pushing the open/close buttonagain.

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

Closing

From the fully open position, push the open/close button toward the front of the vehicle.The roof will close completely.The automatic motion can be interrupted inany position by pushing the open/close buttonagain.

Vent Opening

To bring the roof into vent position, push andrelease the vent button.This type of vent opening can be activatedregardless of the position of the sunroof.When starting with the roof in the closed posi-tion, pushing the vent button automaticallycauses the sunroof to open to the vent posi-tion. If the roof is already open, the buttonmust be held until the roof reaches thevent-opening position.Pushing vent button again during automaticmovement of the roof will stop it.

Sun Shade Movement

The front sunshade is power operated.Push the Power Shade open/close buttontoward the rear of the vehicle to open the frontsun shade to the three quarter open position.Pushing the button a second time will open thesunshade completely.Push the Power Shade open/close buttontoward the front of the vehicle to close the sunshade.The automatic motion can be interrupted inany position by pushing the Power Shade on/off button again.To open the rear sunshade, pull sunshademanually toward the rear of the vehicle.

Pinch Protect Feature

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety systemcapable of detecting the presence of anobstacle during the closing movement. If anobstacle is detected, the system intervenesand the movement of the sunroof is immedi-ately reversed into opening.

1 — Power Shade Open/Close2 — Open/Close Button3 — Vent Open/Close

CAUTION!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack orcrossbars are fitted. Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you maydamage it.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

56

Re-Initialization Procedure

Automatic operation of the sunroof must bere-initialized in case of faulty sunroof opera-tion. It may also be necessary to initialize thesunroof after the vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected and then reconnected.

NOTE:The anti-pinch safety device is deactivatedduring the re-initialization procedure.

Proceed as follows:

1. With the ignition in the ON/RUN position,make sure the sunroof glass is fully closed(sunshade open).

2. Open the driver’s side door, and place theignition in the OFF position.

3. Within five seconds, place the ignition inthe ACC or ON/RUN position.

4. Within 10 seconds, push and hold the sunroofclose switch (forward). After 8 - 10 seconds ofholding the switch, the re-initialization processwill begin. Continue to hold the switch while thesunroof motor cycles, and the sunshade willfully close.

5. Once the sunroof glass and the powersunshade have stopped motion, releasethe sunroof close switch, then push andhold it again within five seconds. Continueto hold the switch while the sunshade fullyopens, the sunroof glass fully opens,followed by the glass fully closing then thesunshade fully closing.

6. Release the switch once the operationsstop. Re-initialization of the sunroofmotors is now complete.

NOTE:If the switch is released prior to full completionof the operations described, the entirere-initialization procedure must be repeatedfrom step 1.

7. Confirm express operations for thesunroof glass and sunshade is functionalfor opening and closing operations.

HOOD

Opening

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the release lever located on thedriver’s side kick panel.

Hood Release Lever

2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and posi-tion yourself in front of the grille.

3. Lift the hood slightly.


57

4. Move the under-hood latch from right toleft to release the hood.

Release Hood Latch To The Left

5. Raise the hood completely. The operationis assisted by the addition of two gas propswhich hold it in the open position.

NOTE:

Do not tamper with the props and assist thehood while lifting it.

Use both hands to lift the hood. Beforelifting, check that the windshield wiper armsare not raised from the windshield or inoperation, that the vehicle is stationary andthat the electric park brake is engaged.

Closing

To close, lower the hood to approximately16 inches (40 cm) from the engine compart-ment then let it drop. Make sure that the hoodis completely closed and fully latched. Do thisby trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed,do not try to push the hood lid down, but openit and repeat the procedure.

NOTE:Always check that the hood is closed correctlyto prevent it from opening while the vehicle istraveling. Since the hood is equipped with adouble locking system, one for each side, youmust check that it is closed on both its sideends.

TRUNK The trunk unlocking is electrically operatedand is deactivated when the vehicle is inmotion.

Opening

Opening From The OutsideWhen unlocked, the trunk lid can be openedfrom outside the vehicle using the exteriortrunk lid release button located between theplate lights. Push the button until you hear a“click.” The trunk lid can also be opened byquickly pushing the exterior trunk lid releasebutton on the key fob twice.

Exterior Trunk Lid Release ButtonThe turn signal indicators will blink and theinterior lights will turn on when the trunk lid isopened. They turn off automatically when thetrunk lid is closed.The lights turn off automatically after a fewminutes if the trunk lid is left open.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched beforedriving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle is inmotion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

58

Opening From The InsideWhen unlocked, the trunk lid can be openedfrom inside the vehicle using the interior trunklid release button, located under the dash-board near the engine hood opening lever.Push the trunk lid release button until youhear a “click.”

Interior Trunk Lid Release ButtonTrunk Lid Emergency OpeningA lever can be found in the trunk lid over thelock to allow opening from the inside.

Emergency Release ButtonPull the lever in the direction indicated by thearrow to open the trunk lid. The lever can beseen in the dark.

Closing

Grip one of the handles and lower the trunk liduntil it clicks.

Trunk Lid Interior Handles

NOTE:

It will not be possible to open the trunk lidwith a key or by pushing the button in thepassenger compartment when the batteryis disconnected. So, always position themanual trunk lid opening strap on the trunklid lock before disconnecting the battery.Refer to “Storing The Vehicle” in “ServicingAnd Maintenance” for the procedure.

Trunk Initialization

NOTE:If the battery is disconnected or the protectionfuse blows, the trunk lid opening/closingmechanism must be re-initialized as follows:

1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.

2. Push the lock button on the remotecontrol.

3. Push the unlock button on the remotecontrol.


59

Trunk Specifications

Access To The Tire Service Kit (QuadrifoglioModels)To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the carpet inthe trunk. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “InCase Of Emergency” for information on its use.

Cargo Area (Quadrifoglio Models)Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If EquippedThere are four hooks inside the trunk forattaching the cargo net or cables which cansafely secure the cargo.

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

NOTE:Do not apply a load greater than 22 lbs (10 kg)on a single hook.

Cargo Net — If EquippedThis is useful for correctly arranging the cargoand/or for transporting light materials.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-heldtransmitters that operate devices such asgarage door openers, motorized gates, lightingor home security systems. The HomeLink®unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Voltbattery.

The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sunvisor or the overhead console, designate thethree different HomeLink® channels. TheHomeLink® indicator is located above thecenter button.

HomeLink® Buttons

NOTE:HomeLink® is disabled when the VehicleSecurity Alarm is active.

1 — Homelink® Button 12 — Homelink® Button 23 — Homelink® Button 34 — Homelink® Indicator


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

60

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside ofthe garage before you begin programming.For more efficient programming and accuratetransmission of the radio-frequency signal it isrecommended that a new battery be placed inthe hand-held transmitter of the device that isbeing programmed to the HomeLink® system.To erase the channels, place the ignition in theON position, and push and hold the twooutside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to20 seconds or until the orange indicatorflashes.

NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only beperformed when programming HomeLink®for the first time. Do not erase channelswhen programming additional buttons.

If you have any problems, or require assis-tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com forinformation or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

Garage door openers that were manufacturedafter 1995 can be identified by the “LEARN” or“TRAIN” button located where the hangingantenna is attached to the garage dooropener.

NOTE:It is NOT the button that is normally used toopen and close the door. The name and colorof the button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener

For programming these garage door openers,proceed as follows:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® buttonyou wish to program while keeping the Home-Link® indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button youwant to program while you push and holdthe hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observethe indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after

HomeLink® has received the frequencysignal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons after the indicatorlight changes from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in thegarage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached tothe garage door opener/device motor.Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or“TRAINING” button. On some garage dooropeners/devices there may be a light thatblinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE:You have 30 seconds in which to initiate thenext step after the LEARN button has beenpushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push theprogrammed HomeLink® button twice(holding the button for two seconds eachtime). If the garage door opener/deviceactivates, programming is complete.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remain-ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.

NOTE:If the garage door opener/device does notactivate, push the button a third time (for twoseconds) to complete the training.

1 — Door Opener2 — Training Button


http://www.homelink.com/home/welcome

61

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button(Rolling Code)To reprogram a channel that has been previ-ously trained, follow these steps:


2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®button until the indicator light begins toflash after 20 seconds. Do not release thebutton.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 andfollow all remaining steps.”

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers manu-factured before 1995:



3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button youwant to program while you press and holdthe hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observethe indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-cator will flash slowly and then rapidly afterHomeLink® has received the frequency

signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons after the indicatorlight changes from slow to rapid.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®button and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and the garagedoor/device should activate when theHomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink®buttons, repeat each step for eachremaining button. DO NOT erase the chan-nels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button(Non-Rolling Code)To reprogram a channel that has been previ-ously trained, follow these steps:


2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button until the indicator light begins toflash after 20 seconds. Do not release thebutton.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

The programming of transmitters in Canada/United States require the transmitter signalsto “time-out” after several seconds of trans-mission.Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after severalseconds of transmission – which may not belong enough for HomeLink® to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to time-out in the same manner.It may be helpful to unplug the device duringthe cycling process to prevent possible over-heating of the garage door or gate motor.



3. Continue to press and hold the Home-Link® button, while you press and release(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter everytwo seconds until HomeLink® hassuccessfully accepted the frequencysignal. The indicator light will flash slowlyand then rapidly when fully trained.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

62

(Continued)

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator tochange flash rates. When it changes, it isprogrammed. It may take up to 30 secondsor longer in rare cases. The garage door mayopen and close while you are programming.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®button and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and the garagedoor/device should activate when theHomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink®buttons, repeat each step for eachremaining button. DO NOT erase the chan-nels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at thistime.Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button(Canadian/Gate Operator)To reprogram a channel that has been previ-ously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button until the indicator light begins toflash after 20 seconds. Do not release thebutton.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, push and release the programmedHomeLink® button. Activation will now occurfor the programmed device (i.e. garage dooropener, gate operator, security system, entrydoor lock, home/office lighting, etc.). Thehand-held transmitter of the device may alsobe used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before yousell or turn in your vehicle.To do this, push and hold the two outsidebuttons for 20 seconds until the orange indi-cator flashes. Note that all channels will beerased. Individual channels cannot be erased.The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver isdisabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm isactive.

NOTE:The universal garage door opener only oper-ates when the engine is running for securityreasons associated with removable tops anddoors.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming Home-Link®, here are some of the most commonsolutions: Replace the battery in the garage door

opener hand-held transmitter.

Push the LEARN button on the garage dooropener to complete the training for a rollingcode.

Did you unplug the device for programmingand remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assis-tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,on the Internet at HomeLink.com for informa-tion or assistance.

WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle inthe garage while programming the trans-ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injuryor death.


http://www.homelink.com/home/welcome

63

General Information










RF Exposure RequirementsTo comply with FCC RF exposure compliancerequirements, the device must be installedand operated to provide a separation distanceof at least 20 cm from all persons.

This equipment complies with Canada radia-tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment. This equipment shouldbe installed and operated with minimumdistance 20 cm between the radiator and yourbody.


Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corpsREMARQUE:Des changements ou des modificationsn’ayant pas été expressément approuvés parla partie responsable de la conformité pour-raient révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation del’équipement.

Your motorized door or gate will open andclose while you are programming theuniversal transceiver. Do not program thetransceiver if people, pets or other objectsare in the path of the door or gate. Onlyuse this transceiver with a garage dooropener that has a “stop and reverse”feature as required by Federal safety stan-dards. This includes most garage dooropener models manufactured after 1982.Do not use a garage door opener withoutthese safety features.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

64

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Glove Compartment

To open the glove compartment proceed asfollows:

1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the glovecompartment by placing the emergencykey in the lock on the handle.

2. Pull handle to open the glove compartment.

Opening The Glove CompartmentWhen the glove compartment is opened, alight turns on to illuminate the inside of thecompartment.

NOTE:Do not insert large objects that will prevent theglove compartment from closing completely.Always make sure that the glove compartmentis completely closed when driving.

Sun Visors

The sun visors are located at the sides of theinterior rear view mirror. They can be adjustedforward and toward the side window.To direct the visor toward the side window,detach the visor from the interior rear viewmirror side hook and turn it towards the sidewindow.From this position, the sun visor can also beextended toward the rear of the vehicle foradditional blockage of sunlight.Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on theback of the sun visors and can be used even inpoor light conditions.

Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger Window

NOTE:A rear facing child restraint system shouldnever be fitted in the front passenger seat.Always comply with the instructions on the sunvisor. Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety" formore information.

Center Console

The center console storage compartment islocated between the front seats.To access the center console storage, lift theupper part of the center console as shownbelow.

Center Console

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a consolecompartment lid in the open position.Driving with the console compartment lidopen may result in injury in a collision.


65

(Continued)(Continued)

Cupholder

Two cupholders are available in the centerconsole.

Cupholders In Center Console

Power Outlet

Your vehicle is equipped with a 12 Volt (15 Amp)power outlet that can be used to power cellularphones, small electronics and other low poweredelectrical accessories. The power outlet islabeled with either a “key” symbol to indicatehow the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeledwith a “key” are powered when the ignition is inthe ON/RUN or ACC position.

NOTE:All accessories connected to the “battery”powered outlets should be removed or turnedoff when the vehicle is not in use to protect thebattery against discharge.

115 Volt Power Inverter — If EquippedThe Power Inverter is located inside of thecenter console. It can be used for smallbattery-powered electrical appliances withpowers up to 150 W (e.g. cameras, videocamera, tablets, razors, etc.)

NOTE:Do not connect devices with powers higherthan 150 W to the socket. Do not damage thesocket by using unsuitable adapters.

Center Console Power Outlet

1 — Storage

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

Only devices designed for use in this type ofoutlet should be inserted into any 12 Voltoutlet.

Do not touch with wet hands.

Close the lid when not in use and whiledriving the vehicle.

If this outlet is mishandled, it may causean electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not insert any other object inthe power outlets as this will damage theoutlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damage not coveredby your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Many accessories that can be plugged indraw power from the vehicle's battery, evenwhen not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).Eventually, if plugged in long enough, thevehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently todegrade battery life and/or prevent theengine from starting.

Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) willdegrade the battery even more quickly.Only use these intermittently and withgreater caution.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

VE

HIC

LE

66

Cigar Lighter And Ash Tray — If Equipped

If equipped, the cigar lighter is located on thebottom of the center stack, in front of thecupholders.To activate the cigar lighter, push in and wait afew seconds. Once the cigar lighter has returnedto its original position, it is ready for use.

NOTE:Always ensure the cigar lighter is turned offwhen not in use.

1 — Cigar Lighter

If equipped, the ash tray is a removable plasticcontainer located inside the cupholder.

Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped

Wireless Charging PadYour vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3AQi wireless charging pad located inside of thecenter console. This charging pad is designedto wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobilephone. Qi is a standard that uses magneticinduction to transfer power to your mobiledevice.Your mobile phone must be designed for Qiwireless charging.

NOTE:

Do not place the key fob or any other type ofmetal/magnetized object inside the mobilephone housing or near the wirelesscharging pad.

Be sure to place the mobile device correctly(display facing upward) on the wirelesscharging pad.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUN positionin order for the phone to charge.

To avoid interference with the key fobsearch, the wireless charging pad will stopcharging when any door is opened.

After the use of high power draw accesso-ries, or long periods of the vehicle not beingstarted (with accessories still plugged in),the vehicle must be driven a sufficientlength of time to allow the generator torecharge the vehicle's battery.

CAUTION! (Continued)

CAUTION!

The key fob should not be placed on thecharging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) ofit. Doing so can cause excessive heatbuildup and damage to the fob. Placing thefob in close proximity of the charging padblocks the fob from being detected by thevehicle and prevents the vehicle fromstarting.


67

The following messages will display in theradio system: “Your phone is being charged” — The phone

has begun to charge.

“Phone Fully Charged” — The phone hascompleted charging its battery.

“Foreign Object Detected” — The phone isnot enabled for wireless charging or anobject that is not permitted has been placedon the wireless charging pad.

“Unavailable System” — There is a malfunc-tion with the wireless charging pad.

The driver can deactivate these messagesthrough the radio system. Refer to the Infor-mation and Entertainment System Owner’sManual Supplement for further information.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMSThe following systems are used for reducingengine emissions: Catalytic Converter

Oxygen Sensors

Evaporation Control System

ACTIVE AERODYNAMIC SPOILER (QUADRIFOGLIO VEHICLES)

Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Spoiler

This is an automatic device working at vehiclespeed to regulate air flow in the lower part ofthe vehicle. It allows higher reactivity ataverage speeds and higher vehicle stability athigh speeds.

NOTE:The Active Aero Spoiler is active in theDynamic or RACE mode of the Alfa DNA ProSelector; it is not active in any mode whenexternal temperatures are near or below zero.

Front FasciaIf there is a fault, a generic failure icon will lightup on the instrument panel display, along witha message that will identify the type ofmalfunction. See an authorized dealer if afault occurs.


68

GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL This section gives you all the information you need to understand and use the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

Instrument Cluster

Base Instrument Cluster


69

Quadrifoglio Instrument Cluster

1. Tachometer

2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge WithOverheating Warning Light

3. Driver Interactive Display

4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle OnThe Left Side Of The Symbol indicates thatthe Fuel Door Location is on the left side ofthe vehicle)

5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

Tachometer

The Tachometer indicates the engine Revolu-tions Per Minute (Giri).Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting (Brightness Sensor)Inside the Tachometer there is a light sensorcapable of detecting light and adjusting thebrightness of the instrument panel and the Infor-mation and Entertainment System display.

Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

The digital indicator monitors the temperatureof the engine oil and starts supplying indica-tions when the oil temperature reachesapproximately 122°F (50°C).Under normal usage, the temperature shouldremain around the middle of the digital scaleaccording to the working conditions.

The warning light will turn on to signal theexcessive increase of the engine oil temperature.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

70

In the event of excessive engine oil tempera-ture, stop the engine immediately and contactan authorized dealer.

Fuel Level Gauge

The digital fuel gauge monitors the amount offuel in the tank.

When the warning light turns on, a message isdisplayed, and a chime will sound when 2.3 Gallons(9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.Proceeding further, the second white notchwill go off and the last one will become red,together with the indication "E" present at thebottom of the tank.

Fuel Level Gauge

NOTE:If the low fuel warning light turns on, refuel thevehicle at your nearest fuel station.

Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed inmiles per hour and/or kilometers per hour(mph/km/h).

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Instrument Cluster Display Description

This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interac-tive display that is located in the instrumentcluster.When one or more of the doors have beenopened or closed and the ignition is in the OFFposition, the instrument cluster will display thevehicle mileage for a few seconds.

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display

During operation, the instrument cluster displayis divided into multiple sections which showdriving data, warnings and failure indications.

Instrument Cluster Display

Reconfigurable Display Items

1. External Lights (Low Beam/High Beam)Display

2. Front, Side Anti-Collision Systems, CruiseControl Change Information

3. Speed Limiter Display

4. Driving Assistance Systems (Forward CollisionWarning (FCW), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Highway Assist System (HAS)) Informa-tion Display

5. Active Cruise Control (ACC) / CruiseControl (CC) Information Display

CAUTION!

Do not travel with the fuel tank almostempty: any gaps in fuel supply coulddamage the catalytic converter.


71

6. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) / SpeedLimiter Information Display

7. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) InformationDisplay

8. Time

9. External Temperature

10. Main Display: Vehicle Speed Display, TripComputer Information, etc...

The screens can be selected, on rotation,by pushing the MENU selection button onthe windshield wiper stalk.

MENU Selection/Reset ButtonDepending on the driving mode chosen us-ing the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural, andAdvanced Efficiency) the screens can begraphically different. Navigation instruc-tions and call information can be set anddisplayed in the Information and Entertain-ment System.

Home

The parameters shown on the display, forthe modes: Dynamic, Normal and Ad-vanced Efficiency are:

• Time

• External Temperature

• Current speed (shown only if the repeatmode of the “Navigation” and “Phone” func-tions have not been previously activated)

• Range

In RACE mode (if equipped) the consump-tion indication index is not active and asports gear shift indicator is displayed.

Instrument Cluster Display

Instrument Cluster DisplayTrip A And B

For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural,and Advanced Efficiency) and with the igni-tion device ON, the “Trip computer” can beused to display the measurements regard-ing the operating state of the vehicle. Thisfunction is characterized by two separaterecords, called “Trip A” and “Trip B” (thelatter can be deactivated by Informationand Entertainment System), where thecomplete journeys are recorded in a recip-rocally independent manner.

1 — Time2 — Temperature3 — Distance To Empty4 — Speed


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

72

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to displaythe values relating to:

• Distance traveled

• Average fuel consumption

• Average speed

• Active trip

• Fuel consumption indicator

Instrument Cluster DisplayTo reset the values, press and hold downthe button on the windshield wiper stalk.

MENU Selection/Reset ButtonPerformance

The displayed parameters differ accordingto the active mode. The modes which canbe selected using the Alfa DNA system are:

Natural

Efficiency Consumption Graph

The screen graphically reproduces someparameters closely linked to the efficiencyof the driving style, with a view to limitingconsumption.

Advanced Efficiency

Dynamic Driving Style

The three central icons, on the screen, in-dicate the effectiveness of the driving stylelinked to the parameters of: acceleration,deceleration and gear shift with a view toreducing fuel consumption.

The graphic bar below the icons shows cur-rent consumption and the green line rep-resents the optimal area. The globe lights upgradually according to lower consumption.

1 — Acceleration2 — Deceleration3 — Gear Shifts


73

Alternative Performance

The displayed parameters vary dependingon the active mode. The modes can be se-lected through the “Alfa DNA™” systemand are as follows:

Normal and Advanced Efficiency

The display graphically shows the values of:

○ instantaneous consumption○ average fuel consumption (based

on “Trip A”)Below a certain speed value, when the ac-celerator pedal is not pressed or in theevent of failure, dashes are displayed inplace of the consumption value ("– –. –").

Normal and Advanced Efficiency

Dynamic


○ accelerator pedal position (expressedin percentage)

○ brake pedal position (expressed inpercentage)

○ engine coolant temperature (H =hot C = cold)

DynamicRace (If Equipped)


○ engine torque○ turbocharger pressure○ engine oil pressure (L = low pres-

sure/H= high pressure)

NOTE:The engine torque and turbocharger pressurevalues vary according to the engine type.

RaceDynamic

Acceleration GaugeThe displayed parameters are related tovehicle stability, the graphs illustrate thetrend of the longitudinal/lateral accelera-tions (G-meter information), consideringgravity acceleration as a reference unit.

Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

74

11. Driving Mode Display (Alfa DNA System)

12. Distance Traveled (miles/km) display

13. Fuel Consumption

14. Warning Indications Display (e.g. danger ofice, open doors, ABS operation, etc.)

15. Range

Customer Programmable Settings

Multiple settings can be programmed by theuser using the radio. This section describesonly the basic settings: Units & Language

Clock & Date

Cluster

To access the settings list in the radio, proceedas follows: Press the Home button to access the main

menu.

Select Settings from the main menu usingthe Rotary Knob or by pressing Settings onthe touchscreen.

Rotary Knob

Units & LanguageThe following settings can be modified underthe “Units & Language” menu: Units: select US, Metric, or Custom. The

custom option allows for individual selec-tion of the unit measures

Language: change the language of thesystem

Restore Unit & Language Settings: restoresthe factory settings

To access and change the setting, turn andpush the Rotary Pad or press the desiredsetting on the touchscreen.

Clock & DateThe following settings can be modified underthe “Clock & Date” menu: Sync With GPS Time: activates or deacti-

vates the clock synchronization through theGPS. If the function is deactivated, theoptions Set Time and Set Date are enabled

Set Time: set the time manually

Time Format: set the time format to either a12-hour or a 24-hour clock

Set Date: set the date manually

Restore Clock & Date Settings: restores thefactory settings


1 — ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob2 — OPTION Button3 — Rotary Pad4 — MENU Button


75

ClusterThe following settings can be modified whenthis mode is selected: Warning Buzzer Volume: allows you to set

the volume of the warning buzzer on sevenlevels.

Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip function.

Show Phone Info: allows you to activate/deactivate repetition of the phone functionscreens also on the instrument paneldisplay.

Show Audio Info: allows you to activate/deactivate repetition of the audio functionscreens (Radio and Media) also on theinstrument panel display.

Show Nav Info: allows you to activate/deac-tivate repetition of the navigator functionscreens also on the instrument paneldisplay.

Digital speed on all screens: this allows youto activate/deactivating of digital speed onthe instrument panel display screens otherthan the main screen.

Consumption Bar: allows you to activate/deactivate the consumption baron thedisplay screens of the instrument panelwhere it is available.

Performance pages: allows you to choose,for each driving mode, one of the two alter-native contents displayed in the screen.

Custom areas: allows you to select whichcontent to display in each of the threecustomizable areas on the display of theinstrument panel: time, date, outsidetemperature, radio information, compass.

Restore Cluster Settings: deletes thecurrent settings and restores the factorysettings.


WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANELThe following pages consist of warning lightsand messages.

NOTE:

The warning light turns on together with adedicated message and/or chime whenapplicable. These indications are precau-tionary and as such must not be consideredas exhaustive and/or alternative to theinformation contained in the Owner’sManual, which you are advised to read care-fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-tion in this section in the event of a failureindication.

The failure indicators appearing on thedisplay are divided into two categories: veryserious and less serious faults. Seriousfaults are indicated by a repeated andprolonged warning "cycle.” Less seriousfaults are indicated by a warning "cycle" witha shorter duration. You can stop thewarning cycle in both cases by pushing thebutton located on the windshield wiperstalk. The instrument panel warning lightwill stay on until the cause of the failure iseliminated.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

76

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To DoINSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ONThis light monitors various brake functions, includingbrake fluid level and parking brake application. If thebrake light turns on it may indicate that the parkingbrake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, orthat there is a problem with the anti-lock brake systemreservoir.If the light remains on when the parking brake hasbeen disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full markon the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates apossible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that aproblem with the Brake Booster has been detected bythe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remainon until the condition has been corrected. If theproblem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABSpump will run when applying the brake, and a brakepedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checkedby turning the ignition switch from the OFF position tothe ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate forapproximately four seconds. The light should then turnoff unless the parking brake is applied or a brake faultis detected. If the light does not illuminate, have thelight inspected by an authorized dealer.The light also will turn on when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUNposition.This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.It does not show the degree of brake application.For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer tohave the system checked as soon as possible.Release the electric park brake, then check that thewarning light has turned off.If the warning light stays on, contact an authorizeddealer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)FAILUREThe simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicateseither a failure of the EBD system or that the system isnot available. In this case, the rear wheels maysuddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve whenbraking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer tohave the system inspected immediately.


77

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHTThis light will turn on for four to eight seconds as abulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition. If the light is either not on during startup,stays on, or turns on while driving, have the systeminspected at an authorized dealer as soon aspossible. This light will illuminate with a single chimewhen a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has beendetected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If thelight comes on intermittently or remains on whiledriving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicleimmediately.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHTWhen the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position,if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will soundand the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver orfront passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the SeatBelt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuouslyand a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant RestraintSystems” in “Safety” for further information.

Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.

OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHTThis telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicateany faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on thedisplay), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accidentor, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checkedimmediately.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

78

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To DoANTI-LOCK BRAKE System (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHTThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Thelight will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition and may stay on for as long as four seconds.If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is notfunctioning and service is required. However, theconventional brake system will continue to operatenormally if the brake indicator light is not on.If the ABS light is on, the brake system should beserviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits ofAnti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn onwhen the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer assoon as possible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING System (TPMS) INDICATORLIGHTThe warning light switches on and a message isdisplayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower thanthe recommended value and/or that slow pressure lossis occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration andfuel consumption may not be guaranteed.Should one or more tires be in the condition mentionedabove, the display will show the indicationscorresponding to each tire in sequence.

Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed nohigher then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorizeddealer to have the tire repaired.


79

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the propertire inflation pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, whenthe low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver’s responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, includingthe installation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always checkthe TPMS malfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, toensure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressuresand warning have been established for thetire size equipped on your vehicle.Undesirable system operation or sensordamage may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size, type,and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Using aftermarket tiresealants may cause the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) sensor to becomeinoperable. After using an aftermarket tiresealant it is recommended that you take yourvehicle to an authorized dealership to haveyour sensor function checked.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

80

Warning Light What It Means What To DoTire Pressure LowThe indicator light will illuminate to indicate that thetire pressure is lower than the recommended valueand/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In thesecases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumptionmay not be guaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is“See Manual”, it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “AuxiliaryDriving Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying withthe indications that you find there.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATORLIGHTWhen the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator lightilluminates, but should turn off as soon as the engineis started.ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the systemis indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: itindicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and gripconditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turnoff, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failurewas found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of theindicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist systemfailure.


81

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATORLIGHTWhen the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator lightilluminates, but should turn off as soon as the engineis started.The indicator light illuminates to indicate that someactive safety systems have been partially or totallydeactivated.For further details about the active safety systems,refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When theactive safety systems are reactivated, the indicatorlight turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHTThe indicator illuminates when the rear fog light isactivated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL)In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled toON, the indicator light illuminates, but it should turnoff as soon as the engine is started.The operation of the indicator light may be checked bythe traffic police using specific devices. Comply withthe laws and regulations of the country where you aredriving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continuetraveling at moderate speed but without demandingexcessive effort from the engine or high speed.Prolonged use of the vehicle with the indicator light onconstantly may cause damage. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

CAUTION!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when traveling (on some versions togetherwith the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

82

Warning Light What It Means What To DoFORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW)This indicator light informs the driver that the frontalcollision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer assoon as possible.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGEThe indicator light (or the symbol in the display)illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel isleft in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGEThe indicator light (or the symbol in the display)illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel isleft in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

WARNING!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.


83

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To DoPARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHTThis indicator will illuminate when the park lights orheadlights are turned on.Headlight Off DelayThis function allows the headlights to remain on for30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed inthe OFF position.

LEFT TURN SIGNALThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flashindependently for the left turn signal as selected, aswell as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear)as selected when the multifunction lever is moveddown (left). This directional arrow will flash inconjunction with the right directional arrow when thehazard warning light button is pushed.

RIGHT TURN SIGNALThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flashindependently for the right turn signal as selected, aswell as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear)as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up(right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunctionwith the left directional arrow when the hazardwarning light button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPEDThis indicator light will illuminate when the automatichigh beam headlights are activated.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

84

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Red Symbols

Indicator Light What It Means What To DoHIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTSThis indicator shows that the high beam headlightsare on. Push the multifunction control lever away fromyou to switch the headlights to high beam. Push thelever a second time to switch the headlights back tolow beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporaryhigh beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Symbol What It Means What To DoLOW ENGINE OIL PRESSUREThis telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If thetelltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle andshut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime willsound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate thevehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale doesnot indicate how much oil is in the engine.

NOTE: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has beensolved. The turning on of the telltale does not indicatethe amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can bechecked on the display upon entering the vehicle andalso by activating the “Oil level" function on the Infor-mation and Entertainment System.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.


85

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGHThe telltale lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off theengine and check that the coolant level in thereservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, waitfor the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefullyopen the cap, fill with coolant and check that the levelis between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoiritself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. Contactan authorized dealer if the telltale comes on when theengine is started again.If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions(e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, ifthe warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for 2or 3 minutes with the engine running and slightlyaccelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation,then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant levelis correct as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILUREIf the telltale remains on, you may not have steeringassistance and the effort required to operate thesteering wheel may increased; steering is, however,possible.

NOTE:After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheelmust be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light onthe instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. Tocarry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheelall the way from one end to the other, and then turn itback to the central position.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

86

DOOR OPENThe telltale turns on when one or more doors are notcompletely shut. An acoustic signal is activated withthe doors open and the car moving.

Close the doors properly.

HOOD CAP NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe telltale turns on when the hood cap is not properlyclosed, along with the icon, an image of the vehiclewith an open hood cap appears on the display.A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and thevehicle is moving.

Close the hood properly.

TRUNK LID NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properlyclosed, along with the icon, an image of the vehiclewith an open trunk lid appears on the display.A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and thevehicle is moving.

Close the trunk lid properly.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILUREThe telltale turns on, together with a buzzer warning,to indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.


CAUTION: Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severelydamage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil mayalso overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaustcomponents at high temperature could cause fires.



87

Symbol What It Means What To DoELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNINGLIGHTSThis warning light, along with the related message,signals a failure in the Electronic Throttle Controlsystem (ETC).


If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on whilethe engine is running.

Place the gear selector in the P (Park) position and theignition in the off position: the warning light shouldswitch off. If the warning light stays on with enginerunning, the vehicle can still be driven.Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

If the warning light flashes with the engine running,immediate intervention is required. A loss ofperformance, irregular/high idling speed or enginestopping might take place and the vehicle may needto be towed.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVELThe telltale turns on, along with the related messageon the display, to indicate low engine oil level.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the systemchecked.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILUREThe switching on of the telltale signals a failure in theautomatic steering correction system.


ALTERNATOR FAILUREThe switching on of the telltale with engine oncorresponds to an alternator failure.


DAA SYSTEM ACTIVATIONThe symbol appears, together with a message on thedisplay, in case of activation of the Drive AttentionAssist (DAA) system.

Stop to pause while driving, pulling the car over in safeconditions.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

88

Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To DoENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPTEngine Immobilizer System FailureThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of theEngine Immobilizer system.


Break-In AttemptThe telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycledto ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attemptdetected by the alarm system.Electronic Key Not RecognizedThe telltale will illuminate when the engine is startedand the electronic key is not recognized by the system.Alarm System FailureThe telltale will illuminate to report an alarm systemfailure.

FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHTThe telltale will illuminate after an accident hasoccurred and the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to“Enhanced Accident Response System” in “OccupantRestraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.If it is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contactan authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate when the system has failedor is not available.



89

ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

NOTE: After the first indication, each time the engine isstarted the symbol will continue to illuminate asdescribed above until the oil is changed.

If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there isa fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it isnow necessary to change the oil as a result of regularuse of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil isaccelerated by using the vehicle for short drives,preventing the engine from reaching operatingtemperature.



CAUTION!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) afterit first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

90

Symbol What It Means What To DoENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oilpressure sensor failure.


ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oillevel sensor failure.


FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEMFAILURE — IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theForward Collision Warning system.


STOP/START SYSTEM FAILUREThis telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Startsystem failure.


RAIN SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theautomatic windshield wiper.


DUSK SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of theautomatic low beam alignment.


BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE — IFEQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind SpotMonitoring system failure.


FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel levelsensor failure.



91

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on thefollowing lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parkinglights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailerlights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators /rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / licenseplate lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blownprotection fuse, or an interruption of the electricalconnection.Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact anauthorized dealer.

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of keylesssystem failure.


FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-offsystem failure.


LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE —IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in theLane Departure Warning system.


AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IFEQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of theautomatic high beam headlights.




GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

92

Symbol What It Means What To DoAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATINGThe telltale will illuminate in the case of transmissionoverheating, after a particularly demanding use. In thiscase an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off oridling.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to report a failure of theaudio system.


SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILUREWhile driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal aSpeed Limiter system failure.


LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAPLights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properlyclosed.

Tighten the cap properly.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate and a message will displayto signal a failure in the electric park brake system.This failure may partially or completely block the vehiclebecause the park brake could remain activated even ifautomatically or manually disengaged using the relevantcontrols. In these circumstances, you can disengage thepark brake following the emergency disengagementprocedure described in “Manual Park Release” in “InCase Of Emergency.”

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake isnot engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealerand remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, that the electric park brake is notoperational.

WARNING!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.


93

Symbol What It Means What To DoLOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPEDThis telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehiclecoolant level is low.

Top up, as described in “Servicing And Maintenance.”

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThis light will illuminate when the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) is not operating and needs service.


WEAR ON BRAKE PADSThis light will illuminate when the brake pads havereached their wear limit.


NOTE: Always use genuine parts or similar because the IntegratedBrake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies.

Symbol What It Means What To DoDYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in thedynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURESignals a windshield wiper failure. Contact an authorized dealer.

GENERIC INDICATIONSignals information and failures.The accompanying messages describe the failure.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE FAILUREThis telltale will illuminate along with an accompanyingmessage when the AWD dynamic control system istemporarily deactivated to prevent damage. The tractionsystem will work in RWD mode in this instance.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

94

TEMPORARY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE — IF EQUIPPEDThis telltale will illuminate to indicate that the AWDdynamic control system is temporarily deactivated toprevent damage. The traction system will work in RWDmode in this instance.

In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce theload to allow the system to cool down. The AWDsystem will resume normal operation when the symboldisappears from the display.

ABS ACTIVATIONThis telltale will illuminate to indicate that the ABSsystem has activated.

ADAPTIVE FRONT-LIGHTING SYSTEM FAILUREThe telltale will illuminate to indicate the automaticdirectional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the systemchecked.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IFEQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate when the most comfortablesuspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC)While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals afailure in the suspension system.


WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVELThe telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of thewindshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in“Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid withthe features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants”section in “Technical Specifications.”



95

Green Symbols

WEAR ON Carbon Ceramic Material (CCM) BRAKEDISCS — IF EQUIPPEDThis light will illuminate when the carbon ceramicmaterial brake discs have reached their wear limit.


WARNING: It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads toensure the original performance of the braking system.

DAA SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol comes on in the event of a Driver AttentionAssist (DAA) system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible to have the failure eliminated.

HAS SYSTEM / TJA SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol lights up in case of Highway Assist (HAS)or Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible to have the failure eliminated.

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSThe symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.



GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

96

Blue Symbols

STOP/START OPERATIONThe telltale will illuminate in the case of Stop/Start system intervention (stopping the engine).When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off. (For further information on engine restarting modes, referto “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATEDThe telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Symbol What It Means

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPEDThe telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTSThe telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.


97

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEMOperationThe Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD) carriesout a continuous diagnosis of the componentsof the vehicle related to emissions.It also alerts the driver of when these compo-nents are no longer in peak condition byswitching on the warning light on the instru-ment panel see “Warning Lights AndMessages” paragraph in this chapter.The aim of the OBD system (Onboard Diag-nostic) is to: Monitor the efficiency of the system

Indicate an increase in emissions

Indicate the need to replace damagedcomponents

The vehicle also has a connector, which caninterface with appropriate tools, that makes itpossible to read the error codes stored in theelectronic control units together with a seriesof specific parameters for engine operationand diagnosis. This check can be carried outby your authorized dealer.

NOTE:After eliminating a fault, to check the systemcompletely, an authorized dealer is obliged torun tests and, if necessary certain road tests.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an OnboardDiagnostic system (OBD II) and a connectionport to allow access to information related tothe performance of your emissions controls.Authorized service technicians may need toaccess this information to assist with the diag-nosis and service of your vehicle and emis-sions system.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal require-ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle'semissions control system. Failure to passcould prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspectionand Maintenance (I/M), this checkverifies the “Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that theOBD II system is ready for testing.Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. TheOBD II system may not be ready if your vehiclewas recently serviced, recently had a depletedbattery or a battery replacement. If the OBD IIsystem should be determined not ready for theI/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

WARNING!

ONLY an authorized service technicianshould connect equipment to the OBD IIconnection port in order to read the VIN,diagnose, or service your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connected tothe OBD II connection port, such as adriver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems,including safety related systems, couldbe impaired or a loss of vehicle controlcould occur that may result in an acci-dent involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, infor-mation stored in your vehicle systems,including personal information.


GE

TT

ING

TO

KN

OW

YO

UR

INS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AN

EL

98

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuatedtest, which you can use prior to going to thetest station. To check if your vehicle's OBD IIsystem is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:If you crank or start the engine, you will have tostart this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch tothe ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come onas part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one oftwo things will happen:

The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds andthen return to being fully illuminated untilyou turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.This means that your vehicle's OBD IIsystem is not ready and you should notproceed to the I/M station.

The MIL will not flash at all and will remainfully illuminated until you place the ignitionin the off position or start the engine. Thismeans that your vehicle's OBD II system isready and you can proceed to the I/Mstation.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you shouldsee an authorized dealer or repair facility. Ifyour vehicle was recently serviced or had abattery failure or replacement, you may needto do nothing more than drive your vehicle asyou normally would in order for your OBD IIsystem to update. A recheck with the abovetest routine may then indicate that the systemis now ready.Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD IIsystem is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminatedduring normal vehicle operation you shouldhave your vehicle serviced before going to theI/M station. The I/M station can fail yourvehicle because the MIL is on with the enginerunning.


99

(Continued)

SA

FE

TY This very important section describes the

safety systems that your vehicle may beequipped with, and provides instructions onhow to use them correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMSThe vehicle may be equipped with thefollowing active safety devices: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

Drive Train Control (DTC)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

Panic Brake Assist (PBA)

Traction Control System (TCS)

For the operation of the systems, see thefollowing pages.

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)

An integral part of the braking system, theAnti-Lock Braking System (ABS) prevents oneor more wheels from locking and slipping in allroad surface conditions, regardless of theintensity of the braking action. The systemensures that the vehicle can be controlledeven during emergency braking, allowing thedriver to optimize stopping distances.

The system intervenes during braking whenthe wheels are about to lock, typically in emer-gency braking or low-grip conditions wherelocking may be more frequent.The system also improves control and stabilityof the vehicle when braking on a surfacewhere the grip of the left and right wheelsvaries, such as in a corner.The Electronic Braking Force Distribution(EBD) system works with the ABS, allowing thebrake force to be distributed between the frontand rear wheels.System InterventionThe ABS equipped on this vehicle is providedwith the "Brake-by-wire" (Integrated BrakeSystem — IBS) function. With this system, thecommand given by pressing the brake pedal isnot transmitted hydraulically, but electrically.Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on thepedal with the traditional system is no longernoticeable.

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) — If Equipped

The dynamic drive control is used to optimizeand balance the drive torque between thewheels of the same axles. The Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) system improves the grip inturns, sending more drive torque to theexternal wheel.

WARNING!

The ABS contains sophisticated electronicequipment that may be susceptible to inter-ference caused by improperly installed orhigh output radio transmitting equipment.This interference can cause possible loss ofanti-lock braking capability. Installation ofsuch equipment should be performed byqualified professionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes willdiminish their effectiveness and may leadto a collision. Pumping makes the stop-ping distance longer. Just press firmly onyour brake pedal when you need to slowdown or stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural lawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, norcan it increase braking or steering effi-ciency beyond that afforded by the condi-tion of the vehicle brakes and tires or thetraction afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, following another vehicletoo closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equippedvehicle must never be exploited in a reck-less or dangerous manner that could jeop-ardize the user’s safety or the safety ofothers.



SA

FE

TY

100

Given that, in a turn, the external wheels of thecar travel more than the internal ones andtherefore turn faster, sending a higher thrustto the external rear wheel allows for the car tobe more stable and to not suffer an "under-steer" condition. Understeer occurs when thevehicle is turning less than appropriate for thesteering wheel position.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) uses the inte-gration of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system with the electric power steering toincrease the safety level of the whole vehicle.In critical situations (braking on surfaces withdifferent grip conditions), the ESC systemcontrols the steering through the DST functionto implement an additional torque contribu-tion on the steering wheel in order to suggestthe most correct maneuver to the driver.The coordinated action of the brakes andsteering increases the sensation of safety andcontrol of the vehicle.

NOTE:The DST feature is only meant to help the driverrealize the correct course of action through smalltorques on the steering wheel, which means theeffectiveness of the DST feature is highly depen-dent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reac-tion to the applied torque. It is very important torealize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,meaning the driver is still responsible forsteering the vehicle.

Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If Equipped

Some models of this vehicle are equipped withan All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, which offersan optimal drive for countless driving condi-tions and road surfaces. The system reducesthe slipping of the tires to a minimum, auto-matically redistributing the torque to the frontand rear wheels as needed.To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle withAWD automatically passes to Rear-WheelDrive (RWD) when the road and environmentalconditions are such that they wouldn't causethe tires to slip. When the road and environ-mental conditions require better traction, thevehicle automatically goes to AWD mode.

NOTE:If the system failure symbol switches on, afterstarting the engine or while driving, it meansthat the AWD system is not working properly. Ifthe warning message activates frequently, it isrecommended to carry out the maintenanceoperations.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemimproves the directional control and stabilityof the vehicle in various driving conditions.The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s under-steer and oversteer, distributing the brakeforce on the appropriate wheels. The torquesupplied by the engine can also be reduced inorder to maintain control of the vehicle.The ESC system uses sensors installed on thevehicle to determine the path that the driverintends to follow and compares it with thevehicle’s effective path. When the real pathdeviates from the desired path, the ESCsystem intervenes to counter the vehicle’soversteer or understeer. Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is

turning more than it should according to theangle of the steering wheel.

Understeer occurs when the vehicle isturning less than it should according to theangle of the steering wheel.

System InterventionThe intervention of the system is indicated bythe flashing of the ESC warning light on theinstrument panel, to inform the driver that thevehicle stability and grip are critical.


101

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

This is an integral part of the ESC system andfacilitates starting on slopes, activating auto-matically in the following cases: Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a

gradient higher than 5%, engine running,brake pressed and transmission in NEUTRAL(N) or gear other than REVERSE (R) engaged.

Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with agradient higher than 5%, engine running,brake pressed and reverse gear engaged.

When starting to move forward from acomplete stop, the ESC system control unitmaintains the braking pressure on the wheelsuntil the engine torque necessary for startingis reached, or in any case for a maximum oftwo seconds, allowing your right foot to bemoved easily from the brake pedal to theaccelerator.The system will automatically deactivate aftertwo seconds without starting, graduallyreleasing the braking pressure. During thisrelease stage, it is possible to hear a typicalmechanical brake release noise, indicatingthe imminent movement of the vehicle.

Panic Brake Assist (PBA)

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) system isdesigned to improve the vehicle’s brakingcapacity during emergency braking.The system detects emergency braking bymonitoring the speed and force with which thebrake pedal is pressed, and consequentlyapplies the optimal brake pressure. This canreduce the braking distance: the PBA systemtherefore complements the ABS.

WARNING!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thetraction afforded by prevailing road condi-tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannotprevent accidents resulting from loss ofvehicle control due to inappropriate driverinput for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-dents. The capabilities of an ESC equippedvehicle must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopar-dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-erly maintain your vehicle, may changethe handling characteristics of yourvehicle, and may negatively affect theperformance of the ESC system. Changesto the steering system, suspension,braking system, tire type and size or wheelsize may adversely affect ESC perfor-mance. Improperly inflated and unevenlyworn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-mance. Any vehicle modification or poorvehicle maintenance that reduces theeffectiveness of the ESC system canincrease the risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill StartAssist (HSA) will not activate and slightrolling may occur, such as on minor hills orwith a loaded vehicle, or while pulling atrailer. HSA is not a substitute for activedriving involvement. It is always the driver’sresponsibility to be attentive to distance toother vehicles, people, and objects, andmost importantly brake operation to ensuresafe operation of the vehicle under all roadconditions. Your complete attention isalways required while driving to maintainsafe control of your vehicle. Failure to followthese warnings can result in a collision orserious personal injury.


SA

FE

TY

102

Maximum assistance from the PBA system isobtained by pressing the brake pedal veryquickly. In addition, the brake pedal should bepressed continuously during braking, avoidingintermittent presses, to get the most out of thesystem. Do not reduce pressure on the brakepedal until braking is no longer necessary.The PBA system is deactivated when the brakepedal is released.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) automati-cally operates in the event of slipping, loss ofgrip on wet roads (hydroplaning), and acceler-ation on one or both drive wheels on roadsthat are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending onthe slipping conditions, two different controlsystems are activated: If the slipping involves both drive wheels,

the system intervenes, reducing the powertransmitted by the engine.

If the slipping only involves one of the drivewheels, the Brake Limited Differential (BLD)function is activated, automatically brakingthe wheel which is slipping (the behavior ofa self-locking differential is simulated). Thiswill increase the engine torque transferredto the wheel which isn't slipping.

System InterventionThe intervention of the system is indicated bythe flashing of the ESC warning light on theinstrument panel, to inform the driver that thevehicle stability and grip are critical.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMSThe following auxiliary driving systems areavailable in this vehicle: Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driver Attention Assist (DAA)

The vehicle may also be fitted with thefollowing driving assistance systems: Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

Highway Assist System (HAS)

Traffic Jam Assist (TJA)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Intelligent Speed Control (ISC)

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

For the operation of the DAA, LDW, LKA, HAS,TJA, ACC, ISC, or TSR systems, refer to the“Starting And Operating” chapter.

NOTE:When driving on two-way roads where there isno lane dividing center line (e.g. on unpavedroads), the use of the ABSA, HAS, TJA, LKAsystems is strongly discouraged as the systemcould detect the entire road as single-lanedividing lines.

WARNING!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannotprevent the natural laws of physics fromacting on the vehicle, nor can it increasethe traction afforded by prevailing roadconditions. PBA cannot prevent collisions,including those resulting from excessivespeed in turns, driving on very slipperysurfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilitiesof a PBA-equipped vehicle must never beexploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner, which could jeopardize the user'ssafety or the safety of others.


103

NOTE:The driving assistance systems are designedto aid in driving the car. The driver must alwaysmaintain a sufficient level of attention to thetraffic and road conditions and control thetrajectory of the car.

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System — If Equipped

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system usestwo radar sensors, located in the rear bumper(one on each side), to detect the presence ofother vehicles in the rear side blind spots ofyour vehicle.

Rear Sensor LocationThe system warns the driver about the pres-ence of other vehicles in the detection area byilluminating the warning light located withinthe door mirror on the side in which the othervehicle was detected. If equipped, an audiblechime will also be heard to alert the driver (ifoption is selected within the radio system).

BSM Indicator LightWhen the engine is started, the warning lightilluminates briefly to signal the driver that thesystem is active.SensorsThe sensors are activated when any forwardgear is engaged at a speed higher thanapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or whenREVERSE is engaged.The sensors are temporarily deactivated whenthe vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is inPARK.The detection area of the system coversapproximately one lane on both sides of thevehicle.This area begins from the door mirror andextends for approximately 19 ft (6 m) towardsthe rear part of the vehicle.

When the sensors are active, the system moni-tors the detection areas on both sides of thevehicle and warns the driver about thepossible presence of vehicles in these areas.While driving, the system monitors the detec-tion zone to check whether it is necessary tosend a signal to the driver on both sides. Thesystem monitors this detection zone in threedifferent situations: When you are being overtaken by a vehicle.

When you are overtaking a vehicle.

When a vehicle approaches from the side.

NOTE:

The system does not alert the driver of thepresence of fixed objects (e.g. safety barriers,poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circum-stances, the system may activate in the pres-ence of these objects. This is normal and doesnot indicate a system malfunction.

The system does not alert the driver aboutthe presence of vehicles coming from theopposite direction, in the adjacent lanes.

If a trailer is hitched to the car, the systemautomatically deactivates.


SA

FE

TY

104

Rear ViewThe system detects vehicles coming from therear part of your vehicle on both sides andentering the rear detection area with a differ-ence in speed of less than 25 mph (40 km/h)in relation to your vehicle.Overtaking VehiclesIf another vehicle is overtaken slowly, with adifference in speed of less than 15 mph(25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in the blindspot for approximately 1.5 seconds, thewarning light on the door mirror of the corre-sponding side illuminates.If the difference in speed between the twovehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h),the warning light does not illuminate.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) SystemThe Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) systemassists the driver during reverse maneuvers inthe case of reduced visibility.The RCP system monitors the rear detectionareas on both sides of the vehicle to detectobjects moving toward the sides of the vehicle,with a minimum speed between 1 mph (1 km/h)and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at amaximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in areassuch as parking lots.The system activation is signaled to the driverby an audible warning.

NOTE:

If the sensors are covered by objects orvehicles, the system may not work asintended.

For the system to operate correctly, the rearbumper area where the radar sensors arelocated must stay free from snow, ice anddirt gathered from the road surface.

Do not cover the rear bumper area wherethe radar sensors are located with anyobject (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).

Operating ModeThe system may be activated/deactivated viathe radio system. To access the function,select the following items on the main menu insequence:

1. “Settings”

2. “Safety”

3. “Blind Spot Alert”

“Blind Spot Alert”, “Visual” ModeWhen the system is enabled, the warning lightwithin the door mirror on the side of thedetected object illuminates.The visual warning on the mirror will blink if thedriver activates the turn signals, indicating alane change.The warning light will be constant if the driverstays in the same lane.

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only anaid to help detect objects in the blind spotzones. The BSM system is not designed todetect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSMsystem, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and use your turnsignal before changing lanes. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not aback up aid system. It is intended to beused to help a driver detect an oncomingvehicle in a parking lot situation. Driversmust be careful when backing up, evenwhen using RCP. Always check carefullybehind your vehicle, look behind you, andbe sure to check for pedestrians, animals,other vehicles, obstructions, and blindspots before backing up. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.


105

“Blind Spot Alert” Function DeactivationWhen the system is deactivated (“Blind SpotAlert” mode off), the BSM or RCP systems willnot emit an audible or a visual warning.The BSM system will store the operating modethat was active when the engine was stopped.Each time the engine is started, the operatingmode stored previously will be recalled andused.

General Information










RF Exposure RequirementsTo comply with FCC RF exposure compliancerequirements, the device must be installedand operated to provide a separation distanceof at least 20 cm from all persons.This equipment complies with Canada radia-tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment. This equipment shouldbe installed and operated with minimumdistance 20 cm between the radiator and yourbody.


Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corpsREMARQUE: Des changements ou des modifications n’ayantpas été expressément approuvés par la partieresponsable de la conformité pourraient révo-quer l’autorisation d’utilisation de l’équipement.

Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) System — If Equipped

The Active Blind Spot Assist (ABSA) Systemfunction is to help avoid/limit lateral collisionswith cars located in the blind spot zones, evenchanging the vehicle’s trajectory in order tokeep it in the detected lane.The system warns the driver about the pres-ence of other vehicles in the detection area byilluminating the warning light in the doormirror on the side in which the other vehiclewas detected. It will alert you with an acousticsignal, vibration on the steering wheel, and/orcounter-steering torque on the steering wheel(if the respective item on the “Driver Assis-tance” menu is set up and “Safety” is selectedon the radio system).


SA

FE

TY

106

(Continued)

When the engine is started, the warning lightilluminates briefly to signal the driver that thesystem is active (the warning light comes oneven if the system is activated through theradio system menu).

ABSA Indicator Light

SensorsThe system uses two radar sensors, located inthe rear bumper (one for each side) to detect thepresence of vehicles (cars, trucks, motorbikes,etc.) in the rear side blind spots of the car.The sensors are activated when any forwardgear is engaged at a speed higher than about6 mph (10 km/h), or when REVERSE (R) isengaged.The sensors are temporarily deactivated whenthe car is stationary and in PARK (P).The detection area of the system covers abouta lane on both sides of the car around 10 ft(3 meters).This area begins from the door mirror andextends for about 20 ft (6 meters) towards therear part of the car.When the sensors are active the system moni-tors the detection areas on both sides of thecar and warns the driver about the possiblepresence of cars in these areas.

WARNING!

The accident risk persists despite theapplication of torque to the steering wheelby the ABSA system.

Applying a torque that corrects the steeringwheel alignment does not always prevent anaccident. It is always the driver's responsi-bility to steer, brake or accelerate, especiallyafter the ABSA system warning or after thesteering wheel torque intervention. Thedriver is responsible for ensuring that thereare no pedestrians, other vehicles or objec-tives along the direction of the vehicle.Failure to comply with these precautionsmay cause serious accidents and injuries.The driver is fully responsible for holding asafe distance from the vehicle aheadrespecting the highway code in force in therespective country.

In some cases, the system could apply animproper torque to the steering wheel.This application can be interrupted at anytime by turning the steering wheel in theopposite direction.



107

Rear Sensor LocationWhile driving, the system monitors the detec-tion zone in three different situations: When you are being overtaken by a vehicle;

When you are overtaking a vehicle;

When a vehicle approaches from the side;

to check if it is necessary to intervene in orderto keep the vehicle inside the lane on bothsides.

NOTE:The system does not signal the presence offixed object (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls,etc.). However, in some circumstances, thesystem may activate in the presence of theseobjects.This is normal and does not indicate asystem malfunction.

The system does not warn the driver about thepresence of cars coming from the oppositedirection in the adjacent lanes.

Activation /deactivationThe system can be activated/deactivatedusing the “Driver Assistance” menu in theradio system. Select signal type, strengthlevels and sensitivity.

NOTE:Vehicles with an active system will display thefollowing screen, on the radio system.

System interventionThe system intervenes in the following condi-tions: The direction indicators have been turned on;

There is a vehicle in the adjacent lane onthe same side of the direction indicator(blind spot area);

Lane lines are not correctly detected;

The driver tries to change lane intentionally.

If the system detects the presence of a vehiclein the rear side blind spots of the car, it appliesa torque on the steering wheel (if it has beenset through the “Settings” menu of the radiosystem), in order to warn the driver of the needto keep the car inside the lane and thus avoidcollisions with other vehicles.However, the application of torque and vibra-tion is only available with car speed between37 mph (60 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).The application of torque, as well as of thevibration, is suppressed/inhibited if: The torque given by the driver of the

steering wheel is high

Lateral acceleration is high

The trailer is connected to the correctcontrol module

At least one hand is not detected on thesteering wheel for longer than a specific time

The turn signal is turned off

NOTE:The steering wheel torque is not applied if thesystem is unable to detect a lane and if thedirection indicator for the appropriate side hasnot been switched on.

The steering wheel detects the presence of thedriver’s hands by a capacitive sensor installed inthe steering wheel and by the applied torquemeasured on the steering column.


SA

FE

TY

108

System availabilityAggressive driving of the car, or driving on themedian lines, will prevent the correct opera-tion of the system.In case of intervention of the stability andbraking systems (FCW, ESC, ABS) they willprevent the system from operating.Lane change will disable the system for acertain period of time.The road must also comply with some specificcharacteristics, such as: Maximum/minimum lane width.

Clearly identified and defined double yellowlines and, for a limited period of time, a lanewith a single demarcation line.

NOTE:In some cases, for a limited period of time, thesystem may be activate by a lane with a singlemedian line.

In cases of good road surface conditions, thesystem could correctly recognize other typesof valid lane markings (e.g. road edges, side-walks, etc.).

Hands Presence On The Steering WheelDetectionThe system is able to detect the presence ofthe driver’s hands on the steering wheel.When the system does not detect the presence ofhands on the steering wheel for 0 to 6 seconds, thefollowing screen will be displayed on the instrumentcluster display. No acoustic warning will be emittedin this case.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel NotDetected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)

When the system does not detect the presence ofhands on the steering wheel from 6 to 15 seconds,the following screen will be displayed on the instru-ment cluster display. A short acoustic signal willsound if hands are not detected on the steeringwheel for 6 to 12 seconds. A continuous signal willsound if hands are not detected on the steeringwheel for 12 to 15 seconds.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel NotDetected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)

After 15 seconds with the hands removedfrom the steering wheel, the LKA system willbe deactivated and a dedicated message willbe shown on the instrument cluster display. Ashort acoustic signal will sound in this case.In any of the situations above where the handsare removed from the steering wheel for morethan 6 seconds, it is necessary to repositionthe hands on the steering wheel.Changing The System SensitivityThe system's sensitivity can be set through theradio system in the “Driver Assistance” menuand then selecting “Comfort”. Sensitivity“High” or “Low” can be selected.


109

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) SystemThe Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) systemassists the driver during reverse maneuvers inthe case of reduced visibility.When the ABSA system is active, the RCPsystem monitors the rear detection areas onboth sides of the vehicle to detect objectsmoving towards the sides of the vehicle at aminimum speed between 0.6 mph and 2 mph(1 km/h and 3km/h) from objects moving at amaximum speed of 22 mph (35 km/h).These are generally occurrences that happenin parking areas.The system activation is signaled to the driverby means of a visual and audible warning.

NOTE:If the sensors are covered by objects or vehi-cles, the system may not work as intended.

Changing the system sensitivityTo change the sensitivity and the strength ofthe torque intervention on the steering wheel,refer to “Settings” of the radio system.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System

This is a driving assistance system composedof a radar located behind the front bumperand a camera located in the center of thewindshield.

Front Bumper Radar Location

Windshield Camera LocationIn the event of an imminent collision, thesystem intervenes by automatically applyingthe vehicle’s brakes to prevent a the collisionor reduce its effects.The system provides the driver with audibleand visual signals through specific messageson the instrument cluster display.

The system may lightly brake to warn the driver ifa potential front end collision is detected (limitedbraking). Signals and limited braking areintended to allow the driver time to intervene.In situations with the risk of collision, if thesystem detects no intervention by the driver, itprovides automatic braking to help slow thevehicle and mitigate the potential front end colli-sion (automatic braking). If intervention by thedriver on the brake pedal is detected, but notdeemed sufficient, the system may intervene inorder to improve the reaction of the brakingsystem by reducing vehicle speed further (addi-tional assistance in braking stage).


SA

FE

TY

110

The system will intervene automatically incase of imminent collision or impact against apedestrian crossing the road (speed under31 mph (50 km/h)).

NOTE:For safety reasons, when the vehicle hasstopped, the brake calipers may remainblocked for about two seconds. Make sure topress the brake pedal if the vehicle movesslightly forward.

Engagement/DisengagementThe system may be disengaged (and engagedagain) in the “Driver Assistance” menu of theInformation and Entertainment system.The system can be deactivated even with theignition device in the ON position.

NOTE:The system status can be changed with car ata standstill only.

Select from among three operating modes: Warning And Braking: the system (if active), in

addition to the visual and audible warnings,provides limited braking, automatic braking,and additional assistance in braking stagewhere the driver does not brake sufficiently inthe event of a potential front end collision.

Only Warning: the system (if active), doesnot provide limited braking, but guaranteesautomatic braking or additional assistancein braking stage where the driver does notbrake at all or not sufficiently enough in theevent of a potential front end collision.

Disabled: the system does not provide visualand audible warnings, limited braking, auto-matic braking, or additional assistance inbraking stage. The system will thereforeprovide no indication of a possible collision.

Activation/DeactivationThe Forward Collision Warning system is acti-vated whenever the engine is started regard-less of what is shown on the radio system.Following a deactivation, the system will notwarn the driver about the possible collisionwith the preceding vehicle, regardless of thesetting selected with the radio system.

NOTE:Each time the engine is started, the system isactivated regardless of what setting wasselected when the engine was turned off.

The system is active: Each time the engine is started

In the radio system

When the ignition is in the ON position

The vehicle speed is between 2 mph (4 km/h)and 124 mph (200 km/h)

When the front seat belts are fastened

NOTE:If the safety belts of the front seats are notcorrectly fastened, the system will not inter-vene on the braking system (only audible andvisual signals will be provided).

Changing The System SensitivityThe sensitivity of the system can be changedthrough the radio system menu, choosing fromone of the following three options: "Near","Medium" or "Far". Refer to the description inthe radio system supplement for how tochange the settings.The default setting is "Medium". With thissetting, the system warns the driver of apossible collision with the vehicle in frontwhen that vehicle is at a standard distance,between that of the other two settings.With the system sensitivity set to "Far", thesystem will warn the driver of a possible colli-sion with the vehicle in front when that vehicleis at a greater distance, thus providing thepossibility of acting on the brakes more lightly

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is notintended to avoid a collision on its own, norcan FCW detect every type of potentialcollision. The driver has the responsibility toavoid a collision by controlling the vehicle viabraking and steering. Failure to follow thiswarning could lead to serious injury or death.


111

and gradually. This setting provides the driverswith the maximum possible reaction time toprevent a potential collision.With the option set to "Near", the system willalert the driver of a possible collision with thevehicle in front when that vehicle is close. Thissetting offers the driver a lower reaction timecompared to the "Medium" and "Far" settings,in the event of a potential collision, butpermits more dynamic driving of the vehicle.The system sensitivity setting is kept in thememory when the engine is turned off.System Limited Operation WarningIf a dedicated message is displayed, a condi-tion limiting the system operation may haveoccurred. The possible reasons of this limita-tion are if something is blocking the cameraview, or a fault is present.If an obstruction is signaled, clean the area ofthe windshield.Although the vehicle can still be driven innormal conditions, the system may be notcompletely available.When the conditions limiting the system func-tions end, this will go back to normal andcomplete operation. Should the fault persist,contact an authorized dealer.System Failure SignalingIf the system turns off and a dedicatedmessage is shown on the display, it meansthat there is a fault with the system.

In this case, it is still possible to drive thevehicle, but you are advised to contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.Radar Indication Not AvailableIf conditions are such that the radar cannotdetect obstacles correctly, the system is deac-tivated and a dedicated message appears onthe display. This generally occurs in the eventof poor visibility, such as when it is snowing orraining heavily.The function of this system can also be tempo-rarily reduced due to obstructions such asmud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In such cases,a dedicated message will be shown on thedisplay and the system will be deactivated.This message can sometimes appear in condi-tions of high reflectivity (e.g. tunnels withreflective tiles or ice or snow). When the condi-tions limiting the system functions end, it willgo back to normal and complete operation.In certain cases, this dedicated messagecould be displayed when the radar is notdetecting any vehicles or objects within itsview range.If atmospheric conditions are not the reasonbehind this message, check if the sensor isdirty. It could be necessary to clean or removeany obstructions in the area.If the message appears frequently, even in theabsence of atmospheric conditions such assnow, rain, mud or other obstructions, contact anauthorized dealer for a sensor alignment check.

In the absence of visible obstructions, manu-ally removing the decorative cover trim andcleaning the radar surface could be required.Have this operation performed at an autho-rized dealer.

NOTE:It is recommended that you do not installdevices, accessories, or aerodynamic attach-ments in front of the sensor or darken it in anyway, as this can compromise the correct func-tioning of the system.

Frontal Collision Alarm With Active BrakingIf this function is selected, the brakes areoperated to reduce the speed of the vehicle inthe event of potential collision.This function applies an additional brakingpressure if the braking pressure applied by thedriver does not suffice to prevent potentialcollision.The function is active with speed above 2 mph(4 km/h).

NOTE:When using an automatic car wash it is recom-mended to deactivate the system through thesettings of the radio system. The system maydetect the presence of a car, a wall or anotherobstacle and activate.


SA

FE

TY

112

Driving In Special ConditionsIn certain driving conditions, system interven-tion might be unexpected or delayed. Thedriver must therefore be very careful, keepingcontrol of the vehicle. Driving close to a bend.

The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout.

Vehicles with small dimensions and/or notaligned in the driving lane.

Lane change by other vehicles.

Vehicles traveling at right angles to thevehicle.

NOTE:

In particularly complex traffic conditions,the driver can deactivate the system manu-ally through the radio system.

If the driver depresses the brake pedal fullyor makes an excessive steering maneuverduring system operation, the automaticbraking function may deactivate (e.g. toallow a possible maneuverer to avoid theobstacle).

The FCW system is automatically deacti-vated when operating in race mode and awarning message will be displayed on theinstrument cluster.

Driving Close To A BendWhen entering or leaving a wide bend, thesystem may detect a vehicle in front you, butnot in the same driving lane. In cases such asthese, the system may intervene.

Driving Around Wide Curves

The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A RoundaboutOn a roundabout, the system could interveneif it detects a vehicle ahead which is leavingthe roundabout.

Driving In Roundabouts


113

Vehicles With Small Dimensions And/Or NotAligned In The Driving LaneThe system cannot detect vehicles in front of youbut outside the range of the radar sensor andmay therefore not react in the presence of smallvehicles, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Driving Near Small Vehicles

Lane Change By Other VehiclesVehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter thesame lane as your vehicle within the operatingrange of the radar sensor, may cause thesystem to intervene.

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To TheVehicleThe system may temporarily react to a vehiclethat is passing through the radar sensor’soperating range at right angles.

Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range


SA

FE

TY

114

IFETEL: RCPBOMR 14-0766La operación de este equipo está sujeta a lassiguientes dos condiciones:



Changes or modifications made to this equip-ment not expressly approved by RobertBOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorizationto operate this equipment.This equipment has been tested and found tocomply with the limits for a Class A digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Theselimits are designed to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference when theequipment is operated in a commercial environ-ment. This equipment generates, uses, and canradiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-ence to radio communications. Operation of thisequipment in a residential area is likely to causeharmful interference in which case the user willbe required to correct the interference at his ownexpense.Toutes modifications apportées à cet équipe-ment qui ne sont pas expressément homo-loguées par Robert BOSCH GmbH peuventannuler l'autorisation de la FCC de fairefonctionner cet équipement.

Cet appareil a été vérifié et s'est révélé conformeaux normes applicables aux appareilsnumériques de catégorie A, en vertu de lasection 15 des règlements de la FCC. Cesnormes sont définies pour fournir une protectionraisonnable contre les interférences nuisibleslorsque l'équipement est utilisé dans les installa-tions résidentielles. Cet appareil génère, utiliseet peut émettre des ondes radioélectriques et,s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aumanuel d’instruction, peut causer un brouillageradioélectrique nuisible aux communicationsradio. Le fonctionnement de cet équipementdans une zone résidentielle est susceptible decauser des interférences nuisibles; dans ce cas,l'usager doit corriger les interférences à sespropres frais.Radio Frequency Exposure InformationThis equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for an uncontrolledenvironment. This equipment should beinstalled and operated with minimum distanceof 20 cm between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-located oroperating in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter.

WARNING!

The system has not been designed toprevent impacts and cannot detect possibleconditions leading to an accident inadvance. Failure to take into account thiswarning may lead to serious or fatal injuries.

The system may activate, assessing thetrajectory of the vehicle, for the presenceof reflecting metal objects different fromother vehicles, such as safety barriers,road signs, barriers before parking lots,tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways,objects near road constructions sites orhigher than the vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). Inthe same way, the system may interveneinside multi-story parking lots or tunnels,or due to a glare on the road surface.These possible activations are a conse-quence of the real driving scenariocoverage by the system and must not beregarded as faults.

The system has been designed for road useonly. If the vehicle is driven on a track, thesystem must be deactivated to avoid unnec-essary warnings. Automatic deactivation issignaled by the dedicated warning light/symbol switching on in the instrument panel(refer to the instructions in the "WarningLights And Messages On The InstrumentPanel" in "Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel" for further information).


115

Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd'exposition aux rayonnements IC établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corps.Ce transmetteur ne doit pas etre place aumeme endroit ou utilise simultanement avecun autre transmetteur ou antenne.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies toall Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped inthis vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rulesand with Innovation, Science and Economic Devel-opment Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions:












Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that sends theinflation pressure information of each tire tothe control unit, and will signal the driver in theevent of insufficient tire pressure.The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheelrim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tirepressure levels. Sensors, mounted to eachwheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tirepressure readings to the receiver module.Tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). Thismeans that when the outside temperaturedecreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tirepressure should always be set based on cold infla-tion tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pres-sure after the vehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire


SA

FE

TY

116

(Continued)

inflation pressure must not exceed the maximuminflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” forinformation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’stires. The tire pressure will also increase as thevehicle is driven. This is normal, and there shouldbe no adjustment for this increased pressure.The TPMS will signal the driver if pressure fallsbelow the warning limit for any reason,including the effects of low temperature andnormal loss of pressure from the tire.The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient tirepressure when pressure is equal to or greaterthan the prescribed cold inflation level. There-fore, if insufficient tire pressure is indicated bythe ( ) warning light displaying in the instru-ment cluster, increase the inflation pressureup to the prescribed cold inflation value.The system will automatically update, and theTire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light willturn off once the system receives the updatedtire pressures. The vehicle may need to bedriven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

NOTE:The TPMS cannot indicate sudden tire pres-sure drops (e.g. if a tire bursts). In this case,proceed with caution and avoid abruptsteering.

Operating ExampleFor example, your vehicle may have a recom-mended cold (parked for more than three hours)placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambienttemperature is 68°F (20°C), and the measured tirepressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure toapproximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressureis low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Moni-toring Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may causethe tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure MonitoringWarning Light will still be on. In this situation, theTire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will turn offonly after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’srecommended cold placard pressure value.

Insufficient Tire Pressure IndicationIf an insufficient pressure value is detected onone or more tires, the warning light in theinstrument cluster will display alongside thededicated messages, the system will highlightthe tire or tires with insufficient pressuregraphically, and an acoustic signal will beemitted.In this case, stop the vehicle, check the infla-tion pressure of each tire, and inflate thenecessary tire or tires to the correct cold infla-tion pressure value, shown on the display or inthe dedicated TPMS menu.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMSpressures and warning have been estab-lished for the tire size equipped on yourvehicle. Undesirable system operation orsensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of thesame size, type, and/or style. The TPMsensor is not designed for use on after-market wheels and may contribute to apoor overall system performance orsensor damage. Customers are encour-aged to use OEM wheels to assure properTPM feature operation.

Using aftermarket tire sealants may causethe Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.After using an aftermarket tire sealant it isrecommended that you take your vehicleto an authorized dealer to have yoursensor function checked.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt fromentering the valve stem, which coulddamage the TPMS sensor.



117

TPMS Temporarily Disabled:TPMS Check MessageWhen a system fault is detected, the Tire Pres-sure Monitoring Warning Light will flash onand off for 75 seconds, and then remain onsolid. The system fault will also sound a chime.If the ignition is cycled, this sequence willrepeat, provided that the system fault stillexists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring WarningLight will turn off when the fault condition nolonger exists. A system fault can occur due toany of the following: Jamming due to electronic devices or

driving next to facilities emitting the sameradio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

Installing some form of aftermarket windowtinting that affects radio wave signals.

Packed snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMsensors.

After the punctured tire has been repairedwith the original tire sealant contained in theTire Kit, the previous condition must berestored so that the warning light is offduring normal driving.

TPMS DeactivationThe TPMS can be deactivated by replacing allfour wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)with wheel and tire assemblies that do nothave TPMS sensors, such as when installingwinter wheel and tire assemblies on yourvehicle.To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all fourwheel and tire assemblies (road tires) withtires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-toring (TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehiclefor 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). TheTPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light willflash on and off for 75 seconds and thenremain on. The instrument cluster will displaythe “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message andthen display dashes (--) in place of the pres-sure values.Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle,the TPMS will no longer chime or display the“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in theinstrument cluster. Instead, dashes (--) willremain in place of the pressure values.To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheeland tire assemblies (road tires) with tiresequipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive thevehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMWarning Light will flash on and off for 75 secondsand then turn off. The instrument cluster will

display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” messageand then display pressure values in place of thedashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longerbe displayed, as long as no system fault exists.

NOTE:

The TPMS is not intended to replace normaltire care and maintenance, or to providewarning of a tire failure or condition.

The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tirewill cause the tire to overheat, and can leadto tire failure. Underinflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure usingan accurate tire pressure gauge, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the Tire PressureMonitoring Warning Light.

Seasonal temperature changes will affecttire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor theactual tire pressure in the tire.


SA

FE

TY

118

General Information













OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features inyour vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

Seat Belt Systems

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in thissection may be standard equipment on somemodels, or may be optional equipment on others.If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the informationin this section. It tells you how to use yourrestraint system properly, to keep you andyour passengers as safe as possible.Here are some simple steps you can take to mini-mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under shouldalways ride buckled up in the rear seat ofa vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear thevehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “ChildRestraints” in this section for further infor-mation) must be secured in the appro-priate child restraint or belt-positioningbooster seat in a rear seating position.


119

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in arear-facing child restraint) must ride in thefront passenger seat, move the seat as farback as possible and use the proper childrestraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in thissection for further information.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulderbelt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions providedwith your child restraint to make sure thatyou are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lapand shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seatsshould be moved back as far as practicalto allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. Ifyour vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-ment occurs, the side air bags will inflateforcefully into the space between occu-pants and the door and occupants couldbe injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to bemodified to accommodate a disabled person,refer to the “Customer Assistance” section forcustomer service contact information.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellentdriver, even on short trips. Someone on theroad may be a poor driver and could cause acollision that includes you. This can happen faraway from home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat belts save lives,and they can reduce the seriousness of inju-ries in a collision. Some of the worst injurieshappen when people are thrown from thevehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility ofejection and the risk of injury caused bystriking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in amotor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remindthe driver and outboard front seat passenger(if equipped with outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. TheBeltAlert feature is active whenever the igni-tion switch is in the ON/RUN position.Initial IndicationIf the driver is unbuckled when the ignitionswitch is first in the ON/RUN position, a chimewill signal for a few seconds. If the driver oroutboard front seat passenger (if equippedwith outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first inthe ON/RUN position the Seat Belt ReminderLight will turn on and remain on until bothoutboard front seat belts are buckled. Theoutboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is notactive when an outboard front passenger seatis unoccupied.

WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in frontof an air bag. A deploying passenger front airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child12 years or younger, including a child in arear-facing child restraint.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint inthe front seat of a vehicle. Only use arear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, donot transport a rear-facing child restraintin that vehicle.


SA

FE

TY

120

(Continued)

BeltAlert Warning SequenceThe BeltAlert warning sequence is activatedwhen the vehicle is moving above a specifiedvehicle speed range and the driver or outboardfront seat passenger is unbuckled (if equippedwith outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert isnot active when the outboard front passengerseat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warningsequence starts by blinking the Seat BeltReminder Light and sounding an intermittentchime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequencehas completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Lightwill remain on until the seat belts are buckled.The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeatbased on vehicle speed until the driver andoccupied outboard front seat passenger seatbelts are buckled. The driver should instruct alloccupants to buckle their seat belts.Change of StatusIf the driver or outboard front seat passenger(if equipped with outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt whilethe vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warningsequence will begin until the seat belts arebuckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert isnot active when the outboard front passengerseat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggeredwhen an animal or other items are placed onthe outboard front passenger seat or when theseat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-mended that pets be restrained in the rearseat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or petcarriers that are secured by seat belts, andcargo is properly stowed.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle areequipped with lap/shoulder belts.The seat belt webbing retractor will lock onlyduring very sudden stops or collisions. Thisfeature allows the shoulder part of the seatbelt to move freely with you under normalconditions. However, in a collision the seatbelt will lock and reduce your risk of strikingthe inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ofthe vehicle.

WARNING!

Relying on the air bags alone could lead tomore severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear yourseat belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengerscan suffer much greater injuries if you arenot properly buckled up. You can strikethe interior of your vehicle or otherpassengers, or you can be thrown out ofthe vehicle. Always be sure you and othersin your vehicle are buckled up properly.

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly. Occu-pants, including the driver, should alwayswear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating posi-tion to minimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash.


121

(Continued)

(Continued)

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly couldmake your injuries in a collision muchworse. You might suffer internal injuries,or you could even slide out of the seatbelt. Follow these instructions to wearyour seat belt safely and to keep yourpassengers safe, too.

Two people should never be belted into asingle seat belt. People belted together cancrash into one another in a collision, hurtingone another badly. Never use a lap/shoulderbelt or a lap belt for more than one person,no matter what their size.

WARNING!

A lap belt worn too high can increase therisk of injury in a collision. The seat beltforces won’t be at the strong hip andpelvic bones, but across your abdomen.Always wear the lap part of your seat beltas low as possible and keep it snug.

A twisted seat belt may not protect youproperly. In a collision, it could even cutinto you. Be sure the seat belt is flatagainst your body, without twists. If youcan’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,take it to an authorized dealer immedi-ately and have it fixed.


A seat belt that is buckled into the wrongbuckle will not protect you properly. Thelap portion could ride too high on yourbody, possibly causing internal injuries.Always buckle your seat belt into thebuckle nearest you.

A seat belt that is too loose will not protectyou properly. In a sudden stop, you couldmove too far forward, increasing thepossibility of injury. Wear your seat beltsnugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your arm isdangerous. Your body could strike theinside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-sion, increasing head and neck injury. Aseat belt worn under the arm can causeinternal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong asshoulder bones. Wear the seat belt overyour shoulder so that your strongestbones will take the force in a collision.


A shoulder belt placed behind you will notprotect you from injury during a collision.You are more likely to hit your head in acollision if you do not wear your shoulderbelt. The lap and shoulder belt are meantto be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in acollision and leave you with no protection.Inspect the seat belt system periodically,checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seatbelt system. Seat belt assemblies must bereplaced after a collision.



SA

FE

TY

122

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sitback and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the backof the front seat, and next to your arm inthe rear seat (for vehicles equipped with arear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pullout the seat belt. Slide the latch plate upthe webbing as far as necessary to allowthe seat belt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,insert the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a “click.”

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat Belt Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug andlies low across your hips, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lap beltportion, pull up on the shoulder belt. Toloosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt thelatch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snugseat belt reduces the risk of sliding underthe seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across theshoulder and chest with minimal, if anyslack so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor willwithdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the redbutton on the buckle. The seat belt willautomatically retract to its stowed posi-tion. If necessary, slide the latch platedown the webbing to allow the seat belt toretract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist atwisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close aspossible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)above the latch plate, grasp and twist theseat belt webbing 180 degrees to create afold that begins immediately above thelatch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over thefolded webbing. The folded webbing mustenter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until itclears the folded webbing and the seatbelt is no longer twisted.


123

Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions

Second Row Seat Belts

The second row center seat belt features aseat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle,which allows the seat belt to detach from thelower anchor when the seat is folded. Themini-latch plate and regular latch plate canthen be stored out of the way in the parcel trayfor added convenience to open up utilizationof the storage areas behind the front seatswhen the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regularlatch plate from its stowed position in theright rear side trim panel.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull theseat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of theright head restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,insert the mini-latch plate into themini-buckle until you hear a “click.”

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latchplate up the webbing as far as necessaryto allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,insert the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lieslow across your hips, below your abdomen.To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pullup on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap

belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. Asnug seat belt reduces the risk of slidingunder the seat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest sothat it is comfortable and not resting onyour neck. The retractor will withdraw anyslack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the redbutton on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from themini-buckle for storage, insert the regularlatch plate into the black button on the topof the mini-buckle. The seat belt will auto-matically retract to its stowed position. Ifnecessary, slide the latch plate down thewebbing to allow the seat belt to retractfully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regularlatch plate into its stowed position.

Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue

1 — Seat Belt Buckle2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate3 — Mini Latch Plate4 — Mini Seat Belt Buckle5 — Mini Buckle Release


SA

FE

TY

124

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenSeat belts must be worn by all occupantsincluding pregnant women: the risk of injury inthe event of an accident is reduced for themother and the unborn child if they arewearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below theabdomen and across the strong bones of thehips. Place the shoulder belt across the chestand away from the neck. Never place theshoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system isequipped with pretensioning devices that aredesigned to remove slack from the seat belt inthe event of a collision. These devices mayimprove the performance of the seat belt byremoving slack from the seat belt early in acollision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-pants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:These devices are not a substitute for properseat belt placement by the occupant. The seatbelt still must be worn snugly and positionedproperly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. Adeployed pretensioner or a deployed air bagmust be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system isequipped with an Energy Management featurethat may help further reduce the risk of injuryin the event of a collision. The seat belt systemhas a retractor assembly that is designed torelease webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positionsare equipped with a Switchable AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) which is used to securea child restraint system. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints UsingThe Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “ChildRestraints” section of this manual. The figurebelow illustrates the locking feature for eachseating position.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

If the passenger seating position is equippedwith an ALR and is being used for normal usage,only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’smid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If theALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound asthe seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing toretract completely in this case and then carefullypull out only the amount of webbing necessary tocomfortably wrap around the occupant’smid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a "click."

WARNING!

If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle arenot properly connected when the seat beltis used by an occupant, the seat belt willnot be able to provide proper restraint andwill increase the risk of injury in a collision.

When reattaching the mini-latch plate andmini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbingis not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,follow the preceding procedure to detachthe mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,untwist the webbing, and reattach themini-latch plate and mini-buckle.


125

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder beltis automatically pre-locked. The seat belt willstill retract to remove any slack in the shoulderbelt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytimea child restraint is installed in a seating posi-tion that has a seat belt with this feature. Chil-dren 12 years old and under should always beproperly restrained in the rear seat of a vehiclewith a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seatbelt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.This indicates the seat belt is now in theAutomatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic LockingModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder beltand allow it to retract completely to disengagethe Automatic Locking Mode and activate thevehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in thissection may be standard equipment on somemodels, or may be optional equipment onothers. If you are not sure, ask an authorizeddealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protectyou in a collision. The Occupant RestraintController (ORC) monitors the internal circuitsand interconnecting wiring associated with theelectrical Air Bag System Components. Yourvehicle may be equipped with the following AirBag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in frontof an air bag. A deploying passenger front airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child12 years or younger, including a child in arear-facing child restraint.


WARNING!

The seat belt assembly must be replacedif the switchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) feature or any other seatbelt function is not working properly whenchecked according to the procedures inthe Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat belt assemblycould increase the risk of injury in colli-sions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode torestrain occupants who are wearing the seatbelt or children who are using booster seats.The locked mode is only used to installrear-facing or forward-facing child restraintsthat have a harness for restraining the child.


SA

FE

TY

126


The Occupant Restraint Controller(ORC) monitors the readiness of theelectronic parts of the air bag systemwhenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position or in the ACC posi-tion, the air bag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.The ORC contains a backup power supplysystem that may deploy the air bag systemeven if the battery loses power or it becomesdisconnected prior to deployment.The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light inthe instrument panel for approximately four toeight seconds for a self-check when the igni-tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Lightwill turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunctionin any part of the system, it turns on the AirBag Warning Light, either momentarily orcontinuously. A single chime will sound to alertyou if the light comes on again after initialstartup.The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-minate the instrument panel Air Bag WarningLight if a malfunction is detected that couldaffect the air bag system. The diagnostics alsorecord the nature of the malfunction. Whilethe air bag system is designed to be mainte-

nance free, if any of the following occurs, havean authorized dealer service the air bagsystem immediately. The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on

during the four to eight seconds when the igni-tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.

The Air Bag Warning Light remains on afterthe four to eight-second interval.

The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-mittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:If the speedometer, tachometer, or any enginerelated gauges are not working, the OccupantRestraint Controller (ORC) may also bedisabled. In this condition the air bags may notbe ready to inflate for your protection. Have anauthorized dealer service the air bag systemimmediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag WarningLight is detected, which could affectthe Supplemental Restraint System(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light will illuminate on the instrumentpanel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Lightwill stay on until the fault is cleared. In addi-tion, a single chime will sound to alert you thatthe Redundant Air Bag Warning Light hascome on and a fault has been detected. If theRedundant Air Bag Warning Light comes onintermittently or remains on while driving havean authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-diately.For additional information regarding theRedundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”section of this manual.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in yourinstrument panel could mean you won’t havethe air bag system to protect you in a collision.If the light does not come on as a bulb checkwhen the ignition is first turned on, stays onafter you start the vehicle, or if it comes on asyou drive, have an authorized dealer servicethe air bag system immediately.


127

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulderbelts for both the driver and front passenger. Thefront air bags are a supplement to the seat beltrestraint systems. The driver front air bag ismounted in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger front air bag is mounted in the instru-ment panel, above the glove compartment. Thewords “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossedon the air bag covers.

Driver Air Bag

Passenger Air Bag

Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags

WARNING!

Being too close to the steering wheel orinstrument panel during front air bagdeployment could cause serious injury,including death. Air bags need room toinflate. Sit back, comfortably extendingyour arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint infront of an air bag. A deploying passengerfront air bag can cause death or seriousinjury to a child 12 years or younger,including a child in a rear-facing childrestraint.



SA

FE

TY

128

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-stage driver and front passenger air bags. Thissystem provides output appropriate to theseverity and type of collision as determined bythe Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), whichmay receive information from the front impactsensors (if equipped) or other system compo-nents.The first stage inflator is triggered immediatelyduring an impact that requires air bag deploy-ment. A low energy output is used in lesssevere collisions. A higher energy output isused for more severe collisions.This vehicle may be equipped with a driverand/or front passenger seat belt buckleswitch that detects whether the driver or frontpassenger seat belt is buckled. The seat beltbuckle switch may adjust the inflation rate ofthe Advanced Front Air Bags.This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensorsthat may adjust the inflation rate of theAdvanced Front Air Bags based upon seatposition.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additionalprotection by supplementing the seat belts. Frontair bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injuryin rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bagswill not deploy in all frontal collisions, includingsome that may produce substantial vehicle damage— for example, some pole collisions, truck under-rides, and angle offset collisions.On the other hand, depending on the type andlocation of impact, front air bags may deploy incrashes with little vehicle front-end damagebut that produce a severe initial deceleration.Because air bag sensors measure vehicledeceleration over time, vehicle speed anddamage by themselves are not good indicatorsof whether or not an air bag should havedeployed.Seat belts are necessary for your protection inall collisions, and also are needed to help keepyou in position, away from an inflating air bag.When the ORC detects a collision requiring thefront air bags, it signals the inflator units. Alarge quantity of non-toxic gas is generated toinflate the front air bags.The steering wheel hub trim cover and theupper passenger side of the instrument panelseparate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The front air bagsfully inflate in less time than it takes to blinkyour eyes. The front air bags then quicklydeflate while helping to restrain the driver andfront passenger.

WARNING!

No objects should be placed over or near theair bag on the instrument panel or steeringwheel because any such objects couldcause harm if the vehicle is in a collisionsevere enough to cause the air bag toinflate.

Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open themmanually. You may damage the air bagsand you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. Theprotective covers for the air bag cushionsare designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could lead tomore severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrainyou properly. In some collisions, air bagswon’t deploy at all. Always wear your seatbelts even though you have air bags.


129


The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect theknees of the driver and front passenger, andposition the front occupants for improvedinteraction with the front air bags.

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a SupplementalDriver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrumentpanel below the steering column and a Supple-mental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in theinstrument panel below the glove compartment.The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provideenhanced protection during a frontal impact byworking together with the seat belts, preten-sioners, and front air bags.

Driver Knee Air Bag

Front Passenger Knee Air Bag


Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SABs)This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSeat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags(SABs) are located in the outboard side of thefront seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRSAIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seattrim on the outboard side of the seats.The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-tion to the injury reduction potential providedby the seat belts and body structure.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

WARNING!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the kneeimpact bolsters in any way.

Do not mount any accessories to the kneeimpact bolsters such as alarm lights,stereos, citizen band radios, etc.


SA

FE

TY

130

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on theoutboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. Theinflating SAB deploys through the seat seam intothe space between the occupant and the door.The SAB moves at a very high speed and withsuch a high force that it could injure occupants ifthey are not seated properly, or if items are posi-tioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Chil-dren are at an even greater risk of injury from adeploying air bag.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains(SABICs)This vehicle is equipped with SupplementalSide Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains(SABICs) are located above the side windows.The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRSAIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head andother injuries to front and rear seat outboardoccupants in certain side impacts, in additionto the injury reduction potential provided bythe seat belts and body structure.The SABIC deploys downward, covering theside windows. An inflating SABIC pushes theoutside edge of the headliner out of the wayand covers the window. The SABICs inflatewith enough force to injure occupants if theyare not belted and seated properly, or if itemsare positioned in the area where the SABICsinflate. Children are at an even greater risk ofinjury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partialor complete ejection of vehicle occupantsthrough side windows in certain side impactevents.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or placeobjects between you and the Side Air Bags;the performance could be adversely affectedand/or objects could be pushed into you,causing serious injury.

WARNING!

Do not mount equipment, or stackluggage or other cargo up high enough toblock the deployment of the SABICs. Thetrim covering above the side windowswhere the SABIC and its deployment pathare located should remain free from anyobstructions.

In order for the SABICs to work asintended, do not install any accessoryitems in your vehicle which could alter theroof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof toyour vehicle. Do not add roof racks thatrequire permanent attachments (bolts orscrews) for installation on the vehicle roof.Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle forany reason.


131

(Continued)

Side ImpactsThe Side Air Bags are designed to activate incertain side impacts. The Occupant RestraintController (ORC) determines whether thedeployment of the Side Air Bags in a particularimpact event is appropriate, based on theseverity and type of collision. The side impactsensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-priate response to impact events. The systemis calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on theimpact side of the vehicle during impacts thatrequire Side Air Bag occupant protection. Inside impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-pendently; a left side impact deploys the leftSide Air Bags only and a right-side impactdeploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicledamage by itself is not a good indicator ofwhether or not Side Air Bags should havedeployed.The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all sidecollisions, including some collisions at certainangles, or some side collisions that do notimpact the area of the passenger compart-ment. The Side Air Bags may deploy duringangled or offset frontal collisions where thefront air bags deploy.Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat beltrestraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in lesstime than it takes to blink your eyes.

NOTE:Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-rior trim, but they will open during air bagdeployment.

Rollover EventsSide Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners aredesigned to activate in certain rollover events. TheOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determineswhether deployment in a particular rollover event isappropriate, based on the severity and type of colli-sion. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi-cator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat beltpretensioners should have deployed.The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensionerswill not deploy in all rollover events. The roll-over sensing system determines if a rolloverevent may be in progress and whether deploy-ment is appropriate. In the event the vehicleexperiences a rollover or near rollover event,and deployment is appropriate, the rolloversensing system will deploy the side air bagsand seat belt pretensioners on both sides ofthe vehicle.

WARNING!

Occupants, including children, who are upagainst or very close to Side Air Bags canbe seriously injured or killed. Occupants,including children, should never lean on orsleep against the door, side windows, orarea where the side air bags inflate, evenif they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-priate) are necessary for your protection inall collisions. They also help keep you inposition, away from an inflating Side Air Bag.To get the best protection from the Side AirBags, occupants must wear their seat beltsproperly and sit upright with their backsagainst the seats. Children must be properlyrestrained in a child restraint or booster seatthat is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do notlean against the door or window. Situpright in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bags duringdeployment could cause you to be severelyinjured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone couldlead to more severe injuries in a collision.The Side Air Bags work with your seat beltto restrain you properly. In some colli-sions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.Always wear your seat belt even thoughyou have Side Air Bags.



SA

FE

TY

132

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partialor complete ejection of vehicle occupantsthrough side windows in certain rollover orside impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-tors the internal circuits and interconnectingwiring associated with electrical Air BagSystem Components listed below:

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)


Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel


Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch


Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflateimmediately after deployment.

NOTE:Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in allcollisions. This does not mean something iswrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur: The air bag material may sometimes cause

abrasions and/or skin reddening to theoccupants as the air bags deploy andunfold. The abrasions are similar to frictionrope burns or those you might get slidingalong a carpet or gymnasium floor. They arenot caused by contact with chemicals. Theyare not permanent and normally healquickly. However, if you haven’t healedsignificantly within a few days, or if you haveany blistering, see your doctor immediately.

As the air bags deflate, you may see somesmoke-like particles. The particles are anormal by-product of the process thatgenerates the non-toxic gas used for air baginflation. These airborne particles may irri-tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If youhave skin or eye irritation, rinse the areawith cool water. For nose or throat irritation,move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,see your doctor. If these particles settle onyour clothing, follow the garment manufac-turer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bagshave deployed. If you are involved in anothercollision, the air bags will not be in place toprotect you.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in theinterior trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.

After any collision, the vehicle should betaken to an authorized dealer immediately.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensionerscannot protect you in another collision. Have theair bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seatbelt retractor assemblies replaced by anauthorized dealer immediately. Also, have theOccupant Restraint Controller System servicedas well.


133

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communica-tion network remains intact, and the powerremains intact, depending on the nature of theevent, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)will determine whether to have the EnhancedAccident Response System perform thefollowing functions: Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)

Cut off battery power to the electric motor (ifequipped)

Flash hazard lights as long as the batteryhas power

Turn on the interior lights, which remain onas long as the battery has power or for15 minutes from the intervention of theEnhanced Accident Response System

Unlock the power door locks

Your vehicle may also be designed to performany of these other functions in response to theEnhanced Accident Response System: Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the

HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-tion Door

Cut off battery power to the:

• Engine

• Electric Motor (if equipped)

• Electric power steering

• Brake booster

• Electric park brake

• Automatic transmission gear selector

• Horn

• Front wiper

• Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:After an accident, remember to cycle the ignitionto the OFF position and remove the key from theignition switch to avoid draining the battery.Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in theengine compartment and on the ground near theengine compartment and fuel tank before reset-ting the system and starting the engine. If thereare no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,reset the system by following the proceduredescribed below. If you have any doubt, contactan authorized dealer.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system isactive, a message regarding fuel cutoff isdisplayed. Turn the ignition switch from igni-tion ACC or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefullycheck the vehicle for fuel leaks in the enginecompartment and on the ground near theengine compartment and fuel tank beforeresetting the system and starting the engine.Depending on the nature of the event the leftand right turn signal lights, located in theinstrument panel, may both be blinking andwill continue to blink. In order to move yourvehicle to the side of the road, you must followthe system reset procedure.


SA

FE

TY

134

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to besuccessful.

Customer ActionCustomer Will See

NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).

2. Turn ignition ACC/ON/RUN. Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.Left turn light BLINKS.

4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light BLINKS.

5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is ON SOLID.

6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light BLINKS.Left turn light is OFF.

7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.Left turn light BLINKS.

8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light BLINKS.

9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Right turn light is ON SOLID.Left turn light is ON SOLID.

10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).

Right turn light is OFF.Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition OFF.

12. Turn ignition ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). System is now reset and the engine may be started.

Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).


135

Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed to record suchdata as: How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

WARNING!

Modifications to any part of the air bag systemcould cause it to fail when you need it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system is notthere to protect you. Do not modify the compo-nents or wiring, including adding any kind ofbadges or stickers to the steering wheel hubtrim cover or the upper passenger side of theinstrument panel. Do not modify the frontbumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-market side steps or running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part ofthe air bag system yourself. Be sure to tellanyone who works on your vehicle that ithas an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-tally or may not function properly if modifica-tions are made. Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer for any air bag systemservice. If your seat, including your trimcover and cushion, needs to be serviced inany way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), takethe vehicle to an authorized dealer. Onlymanufacturer approved seat accessoriesmay be used. If it is necessary to modify theair bag system for persons with disabilities,contact an authorized dealer.


SA

FE

TY

136

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckledup at all times, including babies and children.Every state in the United States, and everyCanadian province, requires that small chil-dren ride in proper restraint systems. This isthe law, and you can be prosecuted forignoring it.Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.According to crash statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseats rather than in the front. There are different sizes and types of

restraints for children from newborn size tothe child almost large enough for an adultsafety belt. Always check the child seatOwner’s Manual to make sure you have thecorrect seat for your child. Carefully read andfollow all the instructions and warnings in thechild restraint Owner’s Manual and on all thelabels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make surethat it has a label certifying that it meets allapplicable Safety Standards. You should alsomake sure that you can install it in the vehiclewhere you will use it.

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers orcall: 1–888–327–4236

Canadian residents should refer to Trans-port Canada’s website for additional infor-mation: https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child canbecome a projectile inside the vehicle. Theforce required to hold even an infant onyour lap could become so great that youcould not hold the child, no matter howstrong you are. The child and others couldbe badly injured or killed. Any child riding inyour vehicle should be in a proper restraintfor the child’s size.


https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html

https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html

http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers

http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers

137

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and ToddlersChildren who are two years old or youngerand who have not reached the height orweight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a ConvertibleChild Restraint, facing rearward in a rearseat of the vehicle

Small ChildrenChildren who are at least two years old orwho have outgrown the height or weight limitof their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with afive-point Harness, facing forward in a rearseat of the vehicle

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown theirforward-facing child restraint, but are toosmall to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and thevehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of thevehicle

Children Too Large for Child RestraintsChildren 12 years old or younger, who haveoutgrown the height or weight limit of theirbooster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat ofthe vehicle


SA

FE

TY

138

(Continued)

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children riderear-facing in the vehicle until they are twoyears old or until they reach either the heightor weight limit of their rear-facing childrestraint. Two types of child restraints can beused rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-ible child seats.The infant carrier is only used rear-facing inthe vehicle. It is recommended for childrenfrom birth until they reach the weight or heightlimit of the infant carrier. Convertible childseats can be used either rear-facing orforward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible childseats often have a higher weight limit in therear-facing direction than infant carriers do, sothey can be used rear-facing by children whohave outgrown their infant carrier but are stillless than at least two years old. Childrenshould remain rear-facing until they reach thehighest weight or height allowed by theirconvertible child seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who haveoutgrown their rear-facing convertible childseat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.Forward-facing child seats and convertiblechild seats used in the forward-facing direc-tion are for children who are over two years oldor who have outgrown the rear-facing weight

or height limit of their rear-facing convertiblechild seat. Children should remain in aforward-facing child seat with a harness for aslong as possible, up to the highest weight orheight allowed by the child seat.All children whose weight or height is abovethe forward-facing limit for the child seatshould use a belt-positioning booster seatuntil the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If thechild cannot sit with knees bent over thevehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back isagainst the seatback, they should use abelt-positioning booster seat. The child andbelt-positioning booster seat are held in thevehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint infront of an air bag. A deploying passengerfront air bag can cause death or seriousinjury to a child 12 years or younger,including a child in a rear-facing childrestraint.


WARNING!

Improper installation can lead to failure ofan infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could be badlyinjured or killed. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions exactly wheninstalling an infant or child restraint.


139

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear theshoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs arelong enough to bend over the front of the seatwhen their back is against the seatback,should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use thissimple 5-step test to decide whether the childcan use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back againstthe back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortablyover the front of the vehicle seat – whilethe child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’sshoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’s thighs andnot the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for thewhole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was“no,” then the child still needs to use a boosterseat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodicallyand make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.A child’s squirming or slouching can move thebelt out of position. If the shoulder beltcontacts the face or neck, move the childcloser to the center of the vehicle, or use abooster seat to position the seat belt on thechild correctly.

After a child restraint is installed in thevehicle, do not move the vehicle seatforward or rearward because it can loosenthe child restraint attachments. Removethe child restraint before adjusting thevehicle seat position. When the vehicleseat has been adjusted, reinstall the childrestraint.

When your child restraint is not in use,secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orLATCH anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it loose in thevehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, itcould strike the occupants or seatbacksand cause serious personal injury.


WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder beltunder an arm or behind their back. In acrash, the shoulder belt will not protect achild properly, which may result in seriousinjury or death. A child must always wearboth the lap and shoulder portions of theseat belt correctly.


SA

FE

TY

140

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint TypeCombined Weight

of the Child + Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower Anchors Only Seat Belt Only

LATCH – Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing Child Restraint

More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X

Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X


141

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System

LATCH LabelYour vehicle is equipped with the child restraintanchorage system called LATCH, which standsfor Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. TheLATCH system has three vehicle anchor pointsfor installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There

are two lower anchorages located at the backof the seat cushion where it meets the seat-back and one top tether anchorage locatedbehind the seating position. These anchor-ages are used to install LATCH-equipped childseats without using the vehicle’s seat belts.Some seating positions may have a top tetheranchorage but no lower anchorages. In theseseating positions, the seat belt must be usedwith the top tether anchorage to install thechild restraint. Please see the following tablefor more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages

Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol


SA

FE

TY

142

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weightof the child restraint) for using the LATCHanchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of thechild and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt andtether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weightis more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat beltbe used together to attach a rear-facing orforward-facing child restraint?

No

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage systemto attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowedby the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’smanual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the centerposition using the inner LATCH lower anchoragesfrom the outboard seating positions?

No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in thecenter seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using acommon lower LATCH anchorage? No

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. Ifthe center position does not have dedicated LATCH loweranchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the centerposition next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in anoutboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch theback of the front passenger seat? Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if thechild restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your childrestraint owner’s manual for more information.

Can the rear head restraints be removed? YesThe head restraints can be removed in every seating position if theyinterfere with the installation of the child restraint. Refer to “HeadRestraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.


143

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are roundbars that are found at the rear of theseat cushion where it meets theseatback. Each anchorage is under a

cover with the anchorage symbol on it. Lift thecover to access the lower anchorage.

LATCH Anchorage Locations

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchoragesbehind each rear seating positionlocated in the panel between therear seatback and the rear window.

They are found under a plastic cover with thetether anchorage symbol on it.

Upper Tether Anchorage LocationLATCH-compatible child restraint systems willbe equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strapon each side. Each will have a hook orconnector to attach to the lower anchorageand a way to tighten the connection to theanchorage. Forward-facing child restraintsand some rear-facing child restraints will alsobe equipped with a tether strap. The tetherstrap will have a hook at the end to attach tothe top tether anchorage and a way to tightenthe strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Always follow the directions of the childrestraint manufacturer when installing yourchild restraint. Not all child restraint systemswill be installed as described here.

1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations

WARNING!

Do not install a child restraint in the centerposition using the LATCH system. This posi-tion is not approved for installing child seatsusing the LATCH attachments. You must usethe seat belt and tether anchor to install achild seat in the center seating position.

Never use the same lower anchorage toattach more than one child restraint. Pleaserefer to “Installing The LATCH-CompatibleChild Restraint System” for typical installa-tion instructions.


SA

FE

TY

144

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switch-able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seatbelt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-tions below. See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” tocheck what type of seat belt each seating posi-tion has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower strapsand on the tether strap of the child seat sothat you can more easily attach the hooksor connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the loweranchorages for that seating position. If thesecond row seat can be reclined, you mayrecline the seat and/or raise the headrestraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. Ifthe rear seat can be moved forward andrearward in the vehicle, you may wish tomove it to its rear-most position to makeroom for the child seat. You may also movethe front seat forward to allow more roomfor the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors ofthe child restraint to the lower anchoragesin the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,connect it to the top tether anchorage. Seethe section “Installing Child RestraintsUsing the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push thechild restraint rearward and downwardinto the seat. Remove slack in the strapsaccording to the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installedtightly by pulling back and forth on thechild seat at the belt path. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in anydirection.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system toinstall a child restraint, stow all ALR seat beltsthat are not being used by other occupants orbeing used to secure child restraints. Anunused belt could injure a child if they playwith it and accidentally lock the seat beltretractor. Before installing a child restraintusing the LATCH system, buckle the seat beltbehind the child restraint and out of the child’sreach. If the buckled seat belt interferes withthe child restraint installation, instead of buck-ling it behind the child restraint, route the seatbelt through the child restraint belt path andthen buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.Remind all children in the vehicle that the seatbelts are not toys and that they should not playwith them.


145

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lapbelt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designedto keep the lap portion of the seat belt tightaround the child restraint so that it is notnecessary to use a locking clip. The ALRretractor can be “switched” into a lockedmode by pulling all of the webbing out of theretractor and then letting the webbing retractback into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALRwill make a clicking noise while the webbing ispulled back into the retractor.

Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”description in “Switchable Automatic LockingRetractors (ALR)” under “Occupant RestraintSystems” for additional information on ALR.Please see the table below and the followingsections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint tothe LATCH anchorages can lead to failureof the restraint. The child could be badlyinjured or killed. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions exactly wheninstalling an infant or child restraint.

Child restraint anchorages are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used for adultseat belts, harnesses, or for attaching otheritems or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Improper installation or failure to properlysecure a child restraint can lead to failureof the restraint. The child could be badlyinjured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing aninfant or child restraint.

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol


SA

FE

TY

146

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat BeltsWhat is the weight limit (child’s weight + weightof the child restraint) for using the TetherAnchor with the seat belt to attach a forwardfacing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child RestraintAlways use the tether anchor when using the seat beltto install a forward facing child restraint, up to therecommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch theback of the front passenger seat? Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and thechild restraint is allowed, if the child restraintmanufacturer also allows contact.

Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes

The head restraints can be removed in everyseating position if they interfere with theinstallation of the child restraint. Refer to “HeadRestraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” forfurther information.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten theseat belt against the belt path of the childrestraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating positionwith an ALR retractor.


147

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lapbelt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

1. Place the child seat in the center of theseating position. If the second row seatcan be reclined, you may recline the seatand/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat canbe moved forward and rearward in thevehicle, you may wish to move it to itsrear-most position to make room for thechild seat. You may also move the frontseat forward to allow more room for thechild seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing fromthe retractor to pass it through the beltpath of the child restraint. Do not twist thebelt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle untilyou hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lapportion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on theshoulder part of the belt until you havepulled all the seat belt webbing out of theretractor. Then, allow the webbing toretract back into the retractor. As thewebbing retracts, you will hear a clickingsound. This means the seat belt is now inthe Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.If it is locked, you should not be able to pullout any webbing. If the retractor is notlocked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing totighten the lap portion around the childrestraint while you push the child restraint rear-ward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strapand the seating position has a top tetheranchorage, connect the tether strap to theanchorage and tighten the tether strap.See the section “Installing Child RestraintsUsing the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-tions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installedtightly by pulling back and forth on thechild seat at the belt path. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in anydirection.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, socheck the belt occasionally, and pull it tight ifnecessary.

WARNING!

Improper installation or failure to properlysecure a child restraint can lead to failureof the restraint. The child could be badlyinjured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections exactly when installing aninfant or child restraint.


SA

FE

TY

148

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:

1. Look behind the seating position where youplan to install the child restraint to find thetether anchorage. You may need to move theseat forward to provide better access to thetether anchorage. If there is no top tetheranchorage for that seating position, movethe child restraint to another position in thevehicle if one is available.

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access theanchor directly behind the seat where youare placing the child restraint.

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

3. Route the tether strap to provide the mostdirect path for the strap between the anchorand the child seat. If your vehicle is equippedwith adjustable rear head restraints, raisethe head restraint, and where possible, routethe tether strap under the head restraint andbetween the two posts. If not possible, lowerthe head restraint and pass the tether straparound the outboard side of the headrestraint.

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the childrestraint to the top tether anchorage asshown in the diagram.

5. Remove slack in the tether strap accordingto the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harmyour pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrownabout and possibly injured, or injure apassenger during panic braking or in a colli-sion.Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (ifequipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers thatare secured by seat belts.

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for arear-facing car seat to any location in frontof the car seat, including the seat frame ora tether anchorage. Only attach the tetherstrap of a rear-facing car seat to the tetheranchorage that is approved for that seatingposition, located behind the top of thevehicle seat. See the section “LowerAnchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)Restraint System” for the location ofapproved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1 — Tether Strap Hook2 — Cover3 — Tether Anchor

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap couldlead to increased head motion andpossible injury to the child. Use only theanchorage position directly behind thechild seat to secure a child restraint toptether strap.

If your vehicle is equipped with a split rearseat, make sure the tether strap does notslip into the opening between the seat-backs as you remove slack in the strap.


149

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THECARGO AREA.

Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle body is a properly main-tained engine exhaust system.Whenever a change is noticed in the sound ofthe exhaust system, when exhaust fumes canbe detected inside the vehicle, or when theunderside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,have a competent mechanic inspect thecomplete exhaust system and adjacent bodyareas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, ormispositioned parts. Open seams or looseconnections could permit exhaust fumes toseep into the passenger compartment. Inaddition, inspect the exhaust system eachtime the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oilchange. Replace as required.

WARNING!

Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interiorheat build-up may cause serious injury ordeath.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area ofyour vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you. To avoid breathing (CO), followthese safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garageor in confined areas any longer thanneeded to move your vehicle in or out ofthe area.

If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-gate/rear doors open, make sure that allwindows are closed and the climate controlBLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOTuse the recirculation mode.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehiclewith the engine running, adjust yourheating or cooling controls to forceoutside air into the vehicle. Set the blowerat high speed.


SA

FE

TY

150

(Continued)

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.Do not disassemble or modify the system.Front seat belt assemblies must be replacedafter a collision. Rear seat belt assembliesmust be replaced after a collision if they havebeen damaged (i.e., bent retractor, tornwebbing, etc.). If there is any questionregarding seat belt or retractor condition,replace the seat belt.


The Air Bag warning light will turn on forfour to eight seconds as a bulb check when theignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If thelight is either not on during starting, stays on,or turns on while driving, have the systeminspected at an authorized dealer as soon aspossible. After the bulb check, this light willilluminate with a single chime when a faultwith the Air Bag System has been detected. Itwill stay on until the fault is removed. If thelight comes on intermittently or remains onwhile driving, have an authorized dealerservice the vehicle immediately.Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in thissection for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost modeand place the blower control on high speed. Youshould be able to feel the air directed against thewindshield. See an authorized dealer for serviceif your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit yourvehicle. Only use a floor mat that does notinterfere with the operation of the accelerator,brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor matthat is securely attached using the floor matfasteners so it cannot slip out of position andinterfere with the accelerator, brake or clutchpedals or impair safe operation of your vehiclein other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, orstacked floor mat, or damaged floor matfasteners may cause your floor mat tointerfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutchpedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. Toprevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floor matusing the floor mat fasteners. DO NOTinstall your floor mat upside down or turnyour floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirmmat is secured using the floor matfasteners on a regular basis.

ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOORMAT FROM THE VEHICLE beforeinstalling any other floor mat. NEVERinstall or stack an additional floor mat ontop of an existing floor mat.


151

(Continued)

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear anduneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,glass, or other objects lodged in the tread orsidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check thetires (including spare) for proper cold inflationpressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brakelights and exterior lights while you work thecontrols. Check turn signal and high beamindicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnightparking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluidleaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or iffuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, thecause should be located and corrected imme-diately.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fit yourvehicle. NEVER install a floor mat thatcannot be properly attached and securedto your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to bereplaced, only use a FCA approved floormat for the specific make, model, andyear of your vehicle.

ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on thedriver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-ence, with the vehicle properly parked withthe engine off, fully depress the accelerator,the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present)to check for interference. If your floor matinterferes with the operation of any pedal, oris not secure to the floor, remove the floormat from the vehicle and place the floor matin your trunk.

ONLY use the passenger’s side floor maton the passenger’s side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall orslide into the driver’s side floor area whenthe vehicle is moving. Objects can becometrapped under accelerator, brake, orclutch pedals and could cause a loss ofvehicle control.


NEVER place any objects under the floormat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). Theseobjects could change the position of thefloor mat and may cause interference withthe accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removed andre-installed, always properly attach carpet tothe floor and check the floor mat fastenersare secure to the vehicle carpet. Fullydepress each pedal to check for interfer-ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutchpedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soapand water to clean your floor mats. Aftercleaning, always check your floor mat hasbeen properly installed and is secured toyour vehicle using the floor mat fastenersby lightly pulling mat.



152

(Continued)

ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, be sure to adjust theseat, the interior rear view mirror, and the doormirrors, and fasten the seat belt correctly.Never press the accelerator pedal beforestarting the engine.If necessary, messages indicating the startingprocedure will be shown in the display.

Starting Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake and set thegear selector to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

2. Fully depress the brake pedal withouttouching the accelerator.

3. Briefly push the ignition button.

4. If the engine doesn't start within a fewseconds, you need to repeat the procedure.

If the problem persists, contact an authorizeddealer.

Remote Starting System

This system uses the key fob to start theengine conveniently from outside the vehiclewhile still maintaining security. The systemhas a range of at least 300 feet (91 meters).The remote starting system also activates theclimate control, the heated seats (if equipped),and the heated steering wheel (if equipped),depending on temperatures outside and insideof the vehicle.

NOTE:Obstructions between the vehicle and key fobmay reduce this range.

WARNING!

When leaving the vehicle, always removethe key fob from the vehicle and lock yourvehicle.


Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seriouslyor fatally injured. Children should be warnednot to touch the parking brake, brake pedalor the transmission gear selector.


Do not leave children or animals insideparked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquidinto the throttle body air inlet opening in anattempt to start the vehicle. This could resultin flash fire causing serious personal injury.

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle toget it started. Vehicles equipped with anautomatic transmission cannot be startedthis way. Unburned fuel could enter the cata-lytic converter and once the engine hasstarted, ignite and damage the converterand vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start canbe dangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”for further information.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do notcontinuously crank the engine for more than25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds beforetrying again.



153

How to use Remote StartAll of the following conditions must be metbefore the engine will remote start: Gear selector in PARK (P).

Doors closed.

Hood closed.

Trunk closed.

Hazard switch off.

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal notpressed).

Battery at an acceptable charge level.

PANIC button not pushed.

System not disabled from previous remotestart event.

Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing.

Ignition in the OFF mode.

Fuel level meets minimum requirement.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If EquippedWhen Remote Start is activated, the heatedsteering wheel and driver heated seat featureswill automatically turn on in cold weather.These features will stay on through the dura-tion of remote start also until the ignition isplaced in the ON/RUN mode.

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Acti-vation — If EquippedWhen remote start is active and the outsideambient temperature is less than 39°F (4°C), theWindshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exitingremote start will resume previous operation, exceptif the Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active.The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and oper-ation will continue.

Cold Weather Operation

To prevent possible engine damage whilestarting at low temperatures, this vehicle willinhibit engine cranking when the ambienttemperature is less than –22°F (–30°C) andthe oil temperature sensor reading indicatesan engine block heater has not been used. Anexternally-powered electric engine blockheater is available as optional equipment orfrom an authorized dealer.The message “plug in engine heater” will bedisplayed in the instrument cluster when theambient temperature is below 5°F (–15°C) atthe time the engine is shut off as a reminder toavoid possible crank delays at the next cold start.

Extended Park Starting

If the vehicle has not been started or driven forat least 30 days, it is advisable to follow theindications below.To start the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Briefly push the ignition button

2. If the engine does not start, wait five secondsand let the starter cool down and then repeatthe starting procedure

3. If the engine does not start after eightattempts, let the starter cool down for atleast 10 seconds, and then repeat thestarting procedure

If the problem persists, contact an authorizeddealer.

NOTE:After prolonged vehicle inactivity, very difficultstarting, that can be noticed through rapidfatigue of the starter, might also be due to adischarged battery. In this case, see the “JumpStarting” section in the “In Case Of Emer-gency” chapter.

CAUTION!

Use of the recommended oil and adhering tothe prescribed oil change intervals isimportant to prevent engine damage andensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

154

(Continued)

If Engine Fails To Start

Starting the Engine with Key Fob Battery RunDown or DrainedIf the ignition does not respond when thebutton is pushed, the key fob battery might berun down or drained. Therefore, the systemdoes not detect the presence of the key fob inthe vehicle, and will display a dedicatedmessage.In this case, follow the instructions outlined in“Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery”in the “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” chapter,and start the engine normally.

After Starting — Warming Up The Engine

Proceed as follows: Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a

reduced RPM, without accelerating suddenly.

It is recommended to wait until the digitalengine coolant temperature indicator startsto rise for maximum performance.

Stopping The Engine

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that is notdangerous for oncoming traffic.

2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.

3. With engine idling, push the ENGINESTART/STOP button on the steering wheelto STOP the engine.

NOTE:Do not leave the ignition in ACC mode whenthe engine is off.

To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greaterthan 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold theignition or push the ENGINE START/STOP buttonthree times consecutively within a few seconds. Theengine will shut down, and the ignition will beplaced in the ACC modeWith the keyless ignition system, it is possibleto go away from the vehicle taking the key fobwith you, without the engine switching off. Thevehicle will inform about the absence of thekey on board, only if the doors are closed.Stopping the engine (cycling from the ACC tothe OFF position) the accessories are stillpowered for about three minutes, or until adoor is opened.When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the windowswitches remain active for three minutes.Opening a front door will cancel this function.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquidinto the throttle body air inlet opening in anattempt to start the vehicle. This could resultin flash fire causing serious personal injury.

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicleto get it started. Vehicles equipped with anautomatic transmission cannot be startedthis way. Unburned fuel could enter thecatalytic converter and once the enginehas started, ignite and damage theconverter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery,booster cables may be used to obtain astart from a booster battery or the batteryin another vehicle. This type of start canbe dangerous if done improperly. Refer to“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”for further information.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do notcontinuously crank the engine for more than25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds beforetrying again.



155

After severe driving, idle the engine to allowthe temperature inside the engine compart-ment to cool before shutting off the engine.

Turbocharger Cool Down

It is recommended before switching thevehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a fewminutes so that the turbocharger can be suit-ably lubricated. This procedure is particularlyrecommended after severe driving.After a full load operation, keep the engineidling for three to five minutes beforeswitching it off.This time allows the lubricating oil and theengine coolant to eliminate the excessive heatfrom combustion chamber, bearings, innercomponents and turbocharger.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engineand permits quicker starts in cold weather.Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC elec-trical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten-sion cord.For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),the engine block heater is recommended. Forambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),the engine block heater is required.

Follow the steps below to properly use theengine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (accessdoor on the passenger side wiper cowl).

2. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle andplug it into a grounded, three-wire exten-sion cord.

3. After the vehicle is running, properly stowaway behind access door on the passengerside wiper cowl.

NOTE:

The engine block heater cord is a factoryinstalled option. If your vehicle is notequipped, heater cords are available froman authorized dealer.

The engine block heater will require 110 VoltsAC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heaterelement.

The engine block heater must be plugged inat least one hour to have a warming effecton the engine and at least four hours tohave a warming effect when ambienttemperatures are below -20°F (-29°C).

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

Engine Break-In

For both engines, use the following enginebreak-in recommendations:Despite modern technology and World ClassManufacturing methods, the moving parts ofthe engine must still wear in with each other.This wearing in occurs mainly during the first500 miles (805 km) and continues throughthe first oil change interval.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during itsfirst few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-tion. This should be considered a normal partof the break-in period and not interpreted asan indication of a problem. Please monitoryour oil level during the break-in period andadd oil as required.

It is recommended for the operator to observethe following driving behaviors during the newvehicle break-in period:0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km): Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for

an extended period of time.

Press the accelerator pedal slowly and notmore than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.

Avoid aggressive braking.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine blockheater cord before driving. Damage to the110-115 Volt electrical cord could causeelectrocution.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

156

Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.

Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km): Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not

more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-tion in lower gears (FIRST to THIRD gears).

Avoid aggressive braking.

Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.


300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km): Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting

manually (paddles or gear shift) at higherRPM when possible.

Do not perform sustained operation withthe accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.


For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km): Do not participate in track events, sport

driving schools, or similar activities duringthe first 1,500 miles (2,414 km).

NOTE:Monitor engine oil with every refueling and addif necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may behigher through the first oil change interval.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKEThe vehicle is equipped with electric parkbrake to guarantee better use and optimalperformance compared to a manually oper-ated park brake.The electric parking brake features a switchlocated on the center console, a caliper withmotor for each rear wheel, and an electroniccontrol module.

Electric Park Brake SwitchThe electric parking brake can be engaged intwo ways: Manually, by pulling the switch on the

center console.

Automatically, in “Safe Hold” or “Auto ParkBrake” conditions.

NOTE:Normally, the electric parking brake is engagedautomatically when the engine is stopped. Thisfunction can be deactivated/activated on theInformation and Entertainment system byselecting the following items in sequence on themain menu: “Settings”, “Driver Assistance” and“Automatic Parking Brake”.

In addition to engaging the electric park brake,along with steering and positioning chocks infront of the wheels (when on a steep slope), youmust always place the vehicle in the PARK (P)mode before leaving.

Should the vehicle battery be faulty, thebattery must be replaced in order to unlock theelectric park brake.

Engaging The Park Brake ManuallyBriefly pull the switch located on the centerconsole to manually engage the electric parkbrake when the vehicle is stationary.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle when engaging the electric parkingbrake.A slight movement of the brake pedal may bedetected when engaging the electric parkingbrake with the brake pedal pressed.With the electric parking brake engaged, theBRAKE warning light on the instrument paneland the switch will illuminate.


157

(Continued)

If, under exceptional circumstances, the use ofthe brake is required with the vehicle in motion,keep the switch on the center console pulled aslong as the brake action is necessary.The BRAKE warning light may turn on with thehydraulic system temporarily unavailable, inthis case braking is controlled by the motors.The brake lights will also automatically turn onin the same way as for normal braking with theuse of the brake pedal.Release the switch on the center console tostop the braking action with the vehicle inmotion.If, through this procedure, the vehicle isbraked until a speed below 1.9 mph (3 km/h)is reached and the switch is kept pulled, thepark brake will definitively engage.

NOTE:Driving the vehicle with the electric parkingbrake engaged, or using it several times toslow down the vehicle, may cause severedamage to the braking system.

Disengaging The Electric Park Brake ManuallyIn order to manually release the park brake,the ignition should be in the ACC mode. Pressthe brake pedal, and then push the switch onthe center console briefly.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle, and a slight movement of the brakepedal may be detected during disengagement.After disengaging the electric parking brake,the BRAKE warning light on the instrumentpanel and the light on the switch will turn off.If the BRAKE warning light on the instrumentpanel remains on with the electric parkingbrake disengaged, this indicates a fault: in thiscase, contact an authorized dealer.

Electric Park Brake Operating Modes

The electric park brake may operate asfollows: “Dynamic Operating Mode”: this mode is

activated by pulling the switch repeatedlywhile driving.

“Static Engagement and Release Mode”:with the vehicle stationary, the electric parkbrake can be activated by pulling the switchon the center console once. On the otherhand, push the switch and the brake pedalat the same time to disengage the brake.

CAUTION!

With the Electronic Parking Brake failurewarning light on, some functions of theelectric parking brake are deactivated. Inthis case the driver is responsible for brakeactivation and vehicle parking in completesafety conditions.

WARNING!


Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the park brake, brakepedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle or in a location accessible to chil-dren. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fully disengagedbefore driving; failure to do so can lead tobrake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake whenleaving your vehicle, or it may roll andcause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

Never use gear position PARK (P) instead ofthe electric parking brake. Always engage theelectric parking brake when parking thevehicle to prevent injury or damage caused bythe unexpected movement of the vehicle.



ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

158(Continued)

“Drive Away Release”: the electric parkbrake will automatically disengage with thedriver side seat belt fastened and the detec-tion of an action performed by the driver tomove the vehicle (forward gear or reversegear). This feature can be turned on or off inthe Information and Entertainment System.

NOTE:If the car is equipped with carbon-ceramicbrake discs it is necessary to fasten the seatbelts or turn off the electric park brake beforestarting to avoid damages to the ceramicbrake discs.

“Safe Hold”: if the vehicle speed is lower than1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear selector is not inPARK (P) position and the driver's intention ofleaving the vehicle is detected, the electricpark brake will automatically engage to holdthe vehicle in safety conditions.

“Auto Park Brake”: if the vehicle speed isbelow 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric parkbrake will automatically engage when thegear selector is in PARK (P) position. Thelight on the switch located on the centerconsole switches on together with theBRAKE warning light on the instrumentpanel when the park brake is engaged andapplied to the wheels. Each automatic parkbrake engagement can be canceled bypressing the switch on the center consoleand at the same time moving the gearselector for the transmission to positionPARK (P).

Safe Hold

Safe Hold is a safety function that automati-cally engages the electric park brake in theevent of a dangerous condition for the vehicle.The electric park brake engages automaticallyto prevent vehicle movement if: The vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h).

A transmission operating mode differentfrom PARK (P) is activated.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

The driver side door is open.

No attempts to apply pressure on the brakepedal have been detected.

The vehicle is parked on roads with a slopeof more than 4%.

The “Safe Hold” function can be temporarilydisabled by pressing the switch located on thecenter console and the brake pedal at thesame time, with the vehicle stationary and thedriver side door open.Once disabled, the function will activate againwhen the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to OFF andthen to ACC.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe vehicle is equipped with an electronicallycontrolled 8-speed automatic transmissionwhere gear shifting automatically takes place,depending on the vehicle usage instanta-neous parameters (vehicle speed, grade, andaccelerator pedal position).Manual gear shifting can still occur thanks tothe “sequential mode” position for the gearselector.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehiclecould accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of thevehicle and hit someone or something.Only shift into gear when the engine isidling normally and your foot is firmlypressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition OFF. When the igni-tion is in the OFF mode, the transmissionis locked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.


159

Display

The following information is shown on thededicated area of the display: In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P, R,

N, D) and with "D" the current gear number.

In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): themode (M), the current gear and the doubleor single gear shift request, both up anddown (single or double arrow).

Gear Display

Gear Selector

The gear functioning is controlled by the gearselector, which can assume the following positions: P = PARK

R = REVERSE

N = NEUTRAL

D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed)

AutoStick: + manually shift to higher gear; –manually shift to lower gear

The positions diagram is illustrated on the topof the gear selector.

Gear Selector Center Console

The letter corresponding to the mode selectedon the gear selector lights up and appears onthe instrument cluster display.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildren to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A childor others could be seriously or fatallyinjured. Children should be warned not totouch the parking brake, brake pedal or thetransmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition in theON/RUN or ACC mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only afterthe vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine isabove idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure yourfoot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.


1 — Gear Selector2 — PARK (P) Button


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

160

(Continued)

To select a mode, move the gear selectorforward or backwards, together with pressingthe brake pedal and button to engageREVERSE (R).

Gear Selector

The gear selector is a joystick style shiftingmechanism which returns to the center posi-tion automatically. It can be pushed forwardtwice and rearward twice, based on thestarting condition.The PARK (P) mode can be enabled/disabledby pushing the PARK (P) button.To transition the vehicle into REVERSE (R)mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into DRIVE (D)mode from REVERSE (R) mode, it is necessaryto move the gear selector by pushing the gearselector button.

When using AutoStick, activate it by movingthe gear selector from DRIVE (D) to the left andthen forward toward the - symbol or backwardtoward the + symbol and the gear is changed.To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from posi-tion NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE (D) orREVERSE (R), the vehicle must be moving at alow speed or stopped, and the brake pedalmust also be pressed.

NOTE:

DO NOT accelerate while shifting from posi-tion PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to anotherposition.

After selecting a gear, wait a few secondsbefore accelerating. This precaution isparticularly important with engine cold.

Transmission Operating Modes

PARK (P)The transmission is locked in this mode. Theengine can be started in this mode.

NOTE:Never try to engage PARK (P) mode when thevehicle is moving. Before leaving the vehicle,make sure this mode is engaged (letter Pshown on the display and gear selector) andthat the park brake is engaged.

When parking on a flat surface, first engagethe PARK (P) mode and then engage the elec-tric park brake.

When parking uphill, before activating thePARK (P) mode, engage the electric parkbrake. Otherwise, it could be difficult toengage the (P) mode.To check that the PARK (P) mode is actuallyengaged, make sure (P) is illuminated on thedisplay and on the gear selector.

3 — Gear Selector Button

WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-tute for the park brake. Always apply thepark brake fully when parked to guardagainst vehicle movement and possibleinjury or damage.

Your vehicle could move and injure youand others if it is not in PARK. Check bytrying to move the gear selector out ofPARK with the brake pedal released.Make sure the transmission is in PARKbefore leaving the vehicle.

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK orNEUTRAL if the engine speed is higherthan idle speed. If your foot is not firmlypressing the brake pedal, the vehiclecould accelerate quickly forward or inreverse. You could lose control of thevehicle and hit someone or something.Only shift into gear when the engine isidling normally and your foot is firmlypressing the brake pedal.


161

REVERSE (R)Select this mode only with the vehicle at astandstill.NEUTRAL (N)Use this range when the vehicle is standing forprolonged periods with the engine running. Theengine may be started in this range. Apply theelectric park brake and shift the transmissioninto PARK (P) if you must leave the vehicle.

DRIVE (D)Use this mode in normal driving conditions.Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) orREVERSE (R) modes must take place only afterreleasing the accelerator pedal, with vehicle ata standstill and brake pedal pressed.This mode ensures automatic engagement of themost suitable gears for driving needs and maximumfuel economy in terms of consumption.In this position, the transmission shifts thegears automatically, selecting the most suit-able for forward driving among those availableas you go. In this way the vehicle's optimaldriving characteristics are provided for allconditions.AutoStickIn the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for sportdriving, when the vehicle is driven with a heavyload or on slopes), it is recommended to usethe Autostick (sequential shifting) mode toselect and keep a lower fixed ratio.In these conditions, the use of a lower gearimproves vehicle performance, preventingoverheating.It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) mode tosequential mode regardless of vehicle speed.

Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When theignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, thetransmission is locked in PARK, securingthe vehicle against unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-tended is dangerous for a number ofreasons. A child or others could be seri-ously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the park brake, brakepedal or the transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ONmode. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

Before moving the transmission gearselector out of PARK, you must push theignition button to cycle from STOP/OFFmode to the ON mode, and also press thebrake pedal. Otherwise, damage to thegear selector could result.

DO NOT race the engine when shiftingfrom PARK or NEUTRAL into another gearrange, as this can damage the drivetrain.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn offthe ignition to coast down a hill. These areunsafe practices that limit your response tochanging traffic or road conditions. Youmight lose control of the vehicle and have acollision.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

162

ActivationStarting from DRIVE (D), move the selector tothe left (– and + indication of the trim) to acti-vate the sequential drive mode. The gearengaged will be shown on the display.Shifting is made by moving the gear selectorforwards, towards symbol – or backwards,towards symbol +.Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — If EquippedThe gear can also be manually shifted by usingthe paddles behind the steering wheel. Pullthe right paddle (+) toward the steering wheeland release it to engage a higher gear, andperform the same operation with the leftpaddle (-) to engage a lower gear.

Steering Wheel Shift Paddles

NOTE:If only one manual shift is necessary, the letter(D) will remain on the display with the engagedgear next to it.

DeactivationTo deactivate the sequential driving mode,bring the gear selector back in position DRIVE(D) (“automatic” driving mode).

NOTE:

To select the correct gear for maximumdeceleration (engine brake), just keep thegear paddle pulled (–): the transmissiongoes to an operating mode in which thevehicle can slow down easily.

The vehicle will keep the gear selected bythe driver until the safety conditions allow it.

This means, for example, that the systemwill try to prevent the engine from switchingoff, automatically downshifting if the enginespeed is too low.

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electroni-cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition isdetected that could result in transmissiondamage, Transmission Limp Home Mode isactivated.

In this condition, the transmission stays infourth gear, regardless of the selected gear.Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) andNEUTRAL (N) still work.

The symbol might light up in the instrumentcluster.Temporary failureIn the event of a momentary problem, thetransmission can be reset to regain all forwardgears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), ifpossible. If not, shift the transmission toNEUTRAL (N).

3. Push and hold the ignition until the engineturns OFF.

4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then restartthe engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range. If theproblem is no longer detected, the trans-mission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:Even if the transmission can be reset, werecommend that you visit an authorized dealerat your earliest possible convenience. Anauthorized dealer has diagnostic equipment todetermine if the problem could reoccur. If thetransmission cannot be reset, service isrequired at an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine brakingon a slippery surface. The drive wheels couldlose their grip and the vehicle could skid,causing a collision or personal injury.


163(Continued)

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-mission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system thatholds the gear selector in PARK (P) unless thebrakes are applied.This system prevents you from moving thegear selector from position PARK (P) unlessthe brakes are applied.To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), theignition must be cycled to the ON/RUN mode(engine running or not) and the brake pedalmust be pressed.Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock DisablingOnly if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing thevehicle, conveyor vehicle washing systems)inhibit the automatic activation of PARK (P)mode when stopping the engine, or proceedas described below:

1. Vehicle at a standstill.

2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated.

3. Push the ignition button for at least threeseconds.

The automatic park brake engagement func-tion when the engine is stopped can also bedeactivated on the Information and Entertain-ment system by selecting the following func-tions on the main menu: “Settings”, “DriverAssistance” and “Automatic Parking Brake”.

Important Notes

Failure to comply with what is reported belowmay damage the transmission: Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the

vehicle at a standstill.

Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass fromREVERSE to another mode only with thevehicle at a standstill and engine idling.

Do not change between PARK (P), REVERSE (R),NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) modes with enginerunning at a speed above idling.

Before activating any transmission oper-ating mode, fully depress the brake pedal.

NOTE:The unexpected movement of the vehicle caninjure the occupants or people nearby. Do notleave the vehicle with engine running: beforegetting out of the passenger compartmentalways engage the electric park brake, selectthe PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRALif the engine speed is higher than idle speed. Ifyour foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward orin reverse. You could lose control of the vehicleand hit someone or something. Only shift intogear when the engine is idling normally andyour foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Unintended movement of a vehicle couldinjure those in or near the vehicle. As withall vehicles, you should never exit avehicle while the engine is running. Beforeexiting a vehicle, always apply the parkbrake, shift the transmission into PARK,and turn the ignition OFF. When the igni-tion is in the OFF mode, the transmissionis locked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always makesure the ignition is in the OFF mode,remove the key fob from the vehicle, andlock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildren to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A childor others could be seriously or fatallyinjured. Children should be warned not totouch the parking brake, brake pedal or thetransmission gear selector.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

164

ALFA DNA / PRO SELECTOR

Alfa DNA System

This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA systemselector (located on the center console). Thereare four modes of operation to be selectedaccording to driving style and road conditions:

Alfa DNA System Selector d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).

n = Normal (mode for driving in normalconditions).

a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving modefor maximum fuel savings).

RACE = track race driving mode (if equipped).

= Adjusts the calibration of the activesuspension (Quadrifoglio only).

When the engine is stopped, the selectorreturns to “n” (Normal) mode.The symbol of the active mode lights up in redon the selector.On the instrument panel display, the differentmodes are characterized by different colors: Normal - Blue

Dynamic - Red

Advanced Efficiency - Green

Mode DisplayEach driving mode is graphically different oncolor line and contents of each individual“performance” screen.

Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-dren), and do not leave the ignition in theON/RUN or ACC mode. A child couldoperate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Only engage the gear with engine at idlingwhile fully depressing the brake pedal. If thetransmission temperature exceeds thenormal operating limits, the transmissioncontrol unit may change the gear engage-ment order and reduce the drive torque. Ifthe transmission overheats, it could operateincorrectly until it cools down.

When using the vehicle with extremely lowexternal temperatures, the transmissionoperation may change depending on theengine and transmission temperature, aswell as vehicle speed. Activation of thetorque converter clutch and of the eighthgear is inhibited until the transmission oilis correctly warmed up. Complete opera-tion of the transmission will be enabled assoon as the fluid temperature reaches thepredefined value.



165

Driving Modes

“Dynamic” ModeActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector to theletter “d”, the displays light up in red.

Dynamic ModeESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholdsthat ensure more enjoyable, sportier drivingwhile guaranteeing the stability of the vehicle.“Electronic Q2” system: the system is cali-brated to increase traction while acceleratingon turns, improving the agility of the vehicle.Engine and transmission: adoption of sportsmapping.

Dynamic Mode Performance DisplayThe “Performance” screen displays parame-ters related to vehicle stability, the graphsillustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateralaccelerations (G-meter information), consid-ering gravity acceleration as a reference unit.Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed onthe right.“Normal” Mode“Normal” Mode is the Default mode when thevehicle is started up.ActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector to theletter “n”, the displays light up in blue.

Natural ModeEngine and transmission: standard response.The “Performance” screen graphically repro-duces some parameters closely linked to theefficiency of the driving style, with a view tolimiting consumption.

Natural Mode Performance Display

WARNING!

In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the acceleratorpedal increases considerably. Consequently,driving is less fluid and comfortable.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

166

“Advanced Efficiency” ModeActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector to theletter “a”, the displays light up in green.

Advanced Efficiency ModeESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholdsaimed at ensuring maximum safety in low-gripdriving conditions. It is advisable to select“Advanced Efficiency” mode in the presenceof low-grip road surfaces.“Electronic Q2” system: the system is deactivated.There will be reduced engine performance.“Advanced Efficiency” Mode is characterized byreduced engine performance and ECO shiftingstrategy for the automatic transmission.The “Performance” screen graphically displayssome parameters closely related to thevehicle: acceleration, deceleration, and gearselector.

Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display

NOTE:The vehicle will always start up in NORMALmode as a default.

“RACE” Mode (Quadrifoglio Only)ActivationIt is activated by rotating the selector to posi-tion “RACE”, the displays light up in yellow.

RACE ModeEngine and transmission: adoption of sportsmapping.

The “Performance” screen displays parame-ters related to vehicle stability, the graphsillustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateralaccelerations (G-meter information), consid-ering gravity acceleration as a reference unit.

1 — Acceleration2 — Deceleration3 — Gear Selector

WARNING!

It is recommended to activate this modeat the track.

In "RACE", the sensitivity of the acceleratorpedal increases considerably. Conse-quently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.


167

The screen displays the lateral and longitu-dinal acceleration peaks.

RACE Mode Performance Display

NOTE:If the brake system overheats, this is commu-nicated by the Information and Entertainmentsystem. In this case, allow the system to coolfor a few minutes by driving the vehiclenormally without operating the brakes.

DeactivationTo deactivate the RACE mode, rotate theselector to the RACE position again and thesystem will be set to “d” Dynamic mode.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPEDThe vehicle's electronic suspension manage-ment system is the result of a sophisticatedelaboration of the various sensors, aimed atoptimizing the vehicle's performance.The system continuously monitors thedamping of the suspension through the actu-ator installed on each shock absorber. Thecalibration of the shock absorbers can beadjusted to the conditions of the road surfaceand to the dynamic conditions of the vehicle,improving its comfort and road handling.The driver can choose, while driving, (only in“d” or “RACE” mode), between two types ofsuspension calibration: a more sporty or amore comfortable one.By pressing the button, the system preparesthe shock absorber calibration in order tofavor driving comfort.

“Alfa DNA” System Selector

In case of a system failure, the symbol anda dedicated message will be shown on theinstrument cluster display.

STOP/START SYSTEM

Stop/Start System

The Stop/Start system automatically shuts offthe engine during a vehicle stop if the requiredconditions are met. Releasing the brake pedalor accelerator pedal will automatically restartthe engine.The function was developed to increasevehicle efficiency by reducing fuel consump-tion, gas emissions, and sound pollution.

Operating Mode

Stopping the EngineWith vehicle at a standstill and brake pedalpressed, the engine switches off if the gearselector is in a position other than REVERSE (R).The system does not operate when the gearselector is in REVERSE (R), in order to makingparking maneuvers easier.In the event of stops uphill, engine switchingoff is disabled to make the “Hill Start Assist”function available (works only with runningengine).


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

168

NOTE:The engine can only be automatically stoppedafter having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). Afteran automatic restart, the vehicle only needs toexceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stopthe engine.

Engine stopping is signaled by the symbollighting up on the instrument cluster display.Restarting the EngineTo restart the engine, release the brake pedal orturn the steering wheel slightly (if equipped).With the brake pressed and the transmissionin automatic mode DRIVE (D), the engine willrestart by shifting to REVERSE (R), to PARK (P)or to “AutoStick”.With brake pressed if the gear selector is in“AutoStick” mode, the engine will restart byshifting to PARK (P) or by moving the selectorto + or -.

System Manual Activation/Deactivation

To manually activate/deactivate the system,push the button located in the control panel onthe left of the steering wheel.

Stop/Start ButtonSystem ActivationThe activation of the system is indicated by the

symbol lighting up on the display. In thiscondition, the light on the button is off.System DeactivationA message will appear on the display when thesystem is deactivated. In this condition, thelight on the button is on.

NOTE:Each time the engine is started, the system isactivated regardless of where it was when itwas previously switched off.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

For higher comfort and increased safety, andto reduce emissions, there are certain condi-tions where the engine will not autostopdespite the system being active, such as: Engine still cold.

Especially cold outside temperature.

Battery not sufficiently charged.

Driver's door not shut.

Driver's seat belt not fastened.

Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parkingmaneuvers).

With the automatic climate control active,an adequate cabin heating or coolingcomfort has not been reached or withMAX-DEF function active.

During the first period of use, to initialize thesystem.

Steering angle beyond threshold.


169

Engine Restarting Conditions

Due to comfort, emission control and safetyreasons, the engine can restart automaticallywithout any action by the driver, under specialconditions, such as: Battery not sufficiently charged.

Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if thebrake pedal is pressed repeatedly).

Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on roadswith a grade).

Engine stopping by the Stop/Start systemfor more than approx. three minutes.

With the automatic climate control active,an adjustment in cabin heating or cooling ismade or with MAX-DEF function active.

Safety Functions

When the engine is stopped through the Stop/Start system, if the driver releases their seat belt,opens the driver's or passenger's door, or opensthe hood from inside the vehicle, the engine canbe restarted only by using the ignition.This condition is indicated to the driver boththrough a buzzer and a message on the instru-ment cluster display.

Irregular Operation

In the event of malfunction, the Stop/Startsystem is deactivated.For failure indications, refer to “Warning Lightsand Messages” in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

Vehicle Inactivity

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if thebattery is replaced), special attention must bepaid to the disconnection of the battery powersupply.Proceed as follows:Remove connector from socket to disconnectsensor (battery status monitoring) installed onthe negative pole of the battery. This sensorshould never be disconnected from the poleexcept if the battery is replaced.

Battery Power Supply

NOTE:After setting the ignition to OFF and havingclosed the driver side door, wait at least oneminute before disconnecting the electricalsupply from the battery. When reconnectingthe electrical supply to the battery, make surethat the ignition is in the OFF mode and thedriver side door is closed.

1 — Socket2 — Sensor3 — Connector


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

170

SPEED LIMITER

Description

This feature allows the driver to program themaximum speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:The maximum set speed can be exceeded bycontinuing to press the accelerator pedal.

The maximum speed can be set with thevehicle stationary or in motion. The minimumspeed that can be set is 18 mph (20 km/h).When this feature is active, the vehicle speeddepends on the pressing of the acceleratorpedal until the programmed speed limit isreached. Refer to “Speed Limit Programming”in this section for further information.

Activation

The feature can be activated/deactivatedthrough the radio system.Activating The DeviceTo access this feature, select the “Driver Assis-tance” widget in the radio system, then selectthe following items in sequence:

1. “Speed Limiter”

2. “ON”

The activation of this feature is signaled by theillumination of the green Speed Limiter icon,along with the last speed set, in the instrumentcluster display. The Speed Limiter feature can

remain active concurrently with the SpeedControl system. If a speed limit below the oneindicated in the Speed Control is selected, theSpeed Control speed will be lowered to that ofthe Speed Limiter. This function remains avail-able in RACE mode.

Speed Limiter Display

Speed Limit Programming

The speed limit can be programmed throughthe radio system.To access the function on the main menu,select the following items in sequence:

1. “Settings”

2. “Safety”

3. “Speed Limiter Set Speed”

By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed increasesby 5 mph (8 km/h), from a minimum of18 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph(180 km/h).

Exceeding The Programmed Speed

By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, theprogrammed speed can be exceeded even withthe device active (e.g. in the event of overtaking).The device is disabled until the speed dropsbelow the set limit, after which it reactivatesautomatically.

Programmed Speed Icon Flashing

The programmed speed will flash in thefollowing scenarios: When the accelerator pedal has been fully

pressed and the vehicle has exceeded theprogrammed speed.

Activating the system after setting a limitbelow the effective speed of the vehicle.

In the event of overtake acceleration.

Deactivation

The feature can be activated/deactivatedthrough the radio system.Deactivating The DeviceTo access this feature, select the “Driver Assis-tance” widget in the radio system, then selectthe following items in sequence:

1. “Comfort”

2. “Speed Limiter”

3. “OFF”


171

Automatic Deactivation Of The DeviceThe device deactivates automatically in theevent of fault in the system. In this case,contact an authorized dealer.Temporary Signal LossWhen the device loses the signal, the whitesymbol without the speed indication illumi-nates on the display.System FailureIf there is a system failure, the amber symbolilluminates on the display.

SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL)

Speed Control Description

This is an electronically controlled drivingassistance feature that allows the desiredvehicle speed to be maintained, withouthaving to press the accelerator pedal. Thisfeature can be used at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h) on long stretches of dry, straightroads with few variations (highways).The speed control buttons are located on theleft side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:

To ensure correct operation, the speedcontrol is designed to deactivate if morethan one function is operated simultane-ously. In this case, the system can be reac-tivated by pushing the on/off button andsetting the desired speed.

It is not recommended to use this feature incity traffic.

While driving downhill, the system could brakethe vehicle to keep the set speed the same.

Activating

To activate the Speed Control System, pushthe on/off button location on the left side ofthe steering wheel.

Speed Control On/Off Switch

Speed Control Indicator LightThe activation of the system is signaled by theillumination of the white warning light on theinstrument cluster.The Speed Control function can remain activeat the same time as the Speed Limiter System.If the set speed is higher than the speed setwith the Speed Limiter, the set speed will belowered to that of the Speed Limiter.For Quadrifoglio vehicles, this function remainsavailable in RACE mode.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where thesystem cannot maintain a constant speed.Your vehicle could go too fast for theconditions, and you could lose control andhave an accident. Do not use Speed Controlin heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,icy, snow-covered or slippery.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

172

NOTE:The system cannot be engaged in FIRST orREVERSE gear. It is advisable to engage it in THIRDgear or higher if using the AutoStick feature.

Setting The Desired Speed

To set a desired speed, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the Speed Control on.

2. When the vehicle has reached the desiredspeed, push the SET switch up or downand release to activate. When the acceler-ator is released, the vehicle will maintainthe selected speed automatically.

SET Switch Location

If needed (when overtaking for instance), youcan accelerate beyond the set speed bypressing the accelerator. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-ously set speed.When traveling downhill with the systemactive, the vehicle speed may slightly exceedthe set one.

NOTE:Before pushing the SET switch, the vehiclemust be traveling at a constant speed on a flatsurface.

Increasing/Decreasing Speed

Increasing SpeedOnce the Speed Control has been activated,the speed can be increased by pushing theSET switch upward.By keeping the switch pushed, the set speedwill increase until the switch is released. Thenew speed will then be set.At every movement of the SET switch, the setspeed can be adjusted.Decreasing SpeedWhen the system is active, to reduce thespeed, push the SET switch downward.By keeping the switch pushed, the set speedwill decrease until the switch is released. Thenew speed will then be set.At every movement of the SET switch, the setspeed can be adjusted.

NOTE:Moving the SET switch allows for adjusting ofthe speed according to the selected unit ofmeasurement set on the radio system (seededicated supplement).

Accelerating When OvertakingPress the accelerator as you would normally.When the pedal is released, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.Use Of The Feature On Hilly RoutesThe system can automatically downshift tokeep the set speed when driving on hillyroutes.On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed maybe considerable and it is advisable to deacti-vate the Speed Control.

NOTE:The system keeps the speed set even uphilland downhill. A slight variation in the speed onslight rises is completely normal.

Recalling The Speed

Once the system has been deactivated, butnot canceled, the previously set speed can berecalled by pushing the RES button andremoving your foot from the accelerator. Thesystem will be set to the last stored speed.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on whennot in use is dangerous. You couldaccidentally set the system or cause it to gofaster than you want. You could lose controland have an accident. Always leave thesystem OFF when you are not using it.


173

NOTE:Before resuming the previously set speed, youmust accelerate to a speed close to that speed.

Resume Button LocationIn AutoStick (sequential) mode, before resumingthe previously set speed, you should accelerateuntil you are close to that speed. Then, push andrelease the RES button.

Deactivating

Lightly pressing the brake pedal deactivatesthe Speed Control without deleting the setspeed.The Speed Control may also be deactivated byapplying the electric park brake or when thebraking system is operated (e.g. operation ofthe Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system).

The set speed is deleted in the followingcases: Pushing the on/off button a second time.

The ignition is placed in the OFF position.

If there is a malfunction with the SpeedControl.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED

System Description

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driverassist system that combines the speed controlfunctions with controlling the distance fromthe vehicle ahead.The system sets and holds the vehicle at thedesired speed without needing to press theaccelerator. It also sets and holds a distancefrom the vehicle ahead (these settings are setby the driver).The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a radarsensor located behind the front bumper and acamera located in the center/upper part of thewindshield, to detect the presence of a vehicleclose ahead.

Front Bumper Radar Location

Windshield Camera LocationThis system enhances driving comfort while onthe highway or out of town with light traffic.If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead,the system will maintain a fixed set speed.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

174

(Continued)

If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, thesystem automatically intervenes by braking (oraccelerating) slightly in order not to exceed theoriginal set speed, so that the vehicle keepsthe preset distance, seeking to adapt to thespeed of the vehicle ahead.

NOTE:Adaptive Cruise Control performance is notguaranteed under the following circum-stances, and it is recommended to turn thesystem off when:

Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.

Driving in heavy traffic or constructionzones.

Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, roadswith steep inclines, or roads with numerousturns and bends.

Entering a turn lane.

When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.

WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-nience system. It is not a substitute foractive driver involvement. It is always thedriver’s responsibility to be attentive ofroad, traffic, and weather conditions,vehicle speed, distance to the vehicleahead; and, most importantly, brake oper-ation to ensure safe operation of thevehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always requiredwhile driving to maintain safe control ofyour vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-ings can result in a collision and death orserious personal injury.

The ACC system:

• May react to pedestrians, oncomingvehicles, and stationary objects (e.g.,a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or adisabled vehicle) at speeds between2 mph and 35 mph (4 km/h and60 km/h).

• Cannot take street, traffic, andweather conditions into account, andmay be limited upon adverse sightdistance conditions.

• Does not always fully recognizecomplex driving conditions, which canresult in wrong or missing distancewarnings.

• Will bring the vehicle to a completestop while following a target vehicleand hold the vehicle for approximatelytwo minutes in the stop position. If thetarget vehicle does not start movingwithin two minutes, the parking brakewill be activated and the ACC systemwill be canceled.

You should switch off the ACC system:

When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situ-ations (i.e., in highway construction zones).

When entering a turn lane or highway offramp; when driving on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, orhave steep uphill or downhill slopes.

When circumstances do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.



175

Activation/Deactivation

The system has four operating states: Enabled (speed not set)

Activated (speed set)

Paused

Deactivated

Enabling/ActivatingTo enable the system, push and release theon/off button located on the left side on thesteering wheel.

On/Off ButtonWhen the system is enabled and ready tooperate, the display shows the white ACC iconabove dashes in place of the speed.

Enabled IconsSetting a speed activates the system. The displayshows the icon in green with the set speed.

Pausing/DeactivatingWith the feature enabled (speed not set), pushthe on/off button to disable.With the feature active (speed set), push theon/off button to pause. The display will showthe icon in white with the speed in brackets. Todeactivate the feature, push the on/off buttona second time.

Setting The Desired Speed

The speed can be set from a minimum of19 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 110 mph(180 km/h).When the vehicle reaches the desired speed,push the RES/SET switch downward andrelease it to activate the system. When theaccelerator is released, the vehicle will main-tain the set speed automatically.

SET SwitchWhile the accelerator pedal is pressed, thesystem will not be able to control the distancebetween the vehicle and the one ahead. In thiscase, the speed will be determined only by theposition of the accelerator pedal.The system will return to normal operation assoon as the accelerator pedal is released.

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)system on when not in use is dangerous.You could accidentally set the system orcause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision.Always leave the system off when you arenot using it.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

176

The system cannot be activated: When pressing the brake pedal.

When the brakes are overheated.

When the electric park brake has beenoperated.

When either PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL isengaged.

When the engine RPM is above a maximumthreshold.

When the vehicle speed is not within theoperational speed range.

When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)(or Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) or otherstability control systems) are operating orhave just operated.

When the ESC system is off.

When the Forward Collision Warning system(if equipped) is braking automatically.

In the event of system failure.

When the engine is off.

In case of obstruction of the radar sensor (inthis case the bumper area where it islocated must be cleaned).

If the system is set, the conditions describedabove also cause a cancellation or deactiva-tion of the system. These situations may varyaccording to the conditions.

NOTE:The system will not be deactivated whenspeeds higher than those set are reached bypressing the accelerator pedal above110 mph (180 km/h). In these situations, thesystem may not work correctly and it is recom-mended to deactivate it.

To Vary The Speed Setting

Increasing SpeedOnce the system has been activated, you canincrease the speed by pushing the RES/SETswitch upward. Each time the switch ispushed, the speed increases by 1 mph.By pushing and holding the switch upward, theset speed will increase in increments of 5 mphuntil the switch is released. Then, the newspeed will be set.Decreasing SpeedOnce the system has been activated, you candecrease the speed by pushing the RES/SETswitch downward. Each time the switch ispushed, the speed decreases by 1 mph.By pushing and holding the switch downward,the set speed will decrease in increments of5 mph until the switch is released. Then, thenew speed will be set.

NOTE:

Moving the RES/SET switch downwardallows you to adjust the speed according tothe selected unit of measurement ("U.S." or"Metric") set on the radio system (see dedi-cated supplement).

When the unit of measurement is set toMetric, pushing and holding the RES/SETswitch will adjust the speed in 10 km/hincrements.

By keeping the accelerator pedal pressed,the vehicle can continue to acceleratebeyond the set speed. In this case, use theRES/SET switch to set the speed to thevehicle’s current speed.

When you push the RES/SET button toreduce the speed, the braking system inter-venes automatically if the engine brakedoes not slow the vehicle down sufficientlyto reach the set speed. The device holds theset speed uphill and downhill; however aslight variation is entirely normal, particu-larly on slight inclines.

The transmission could shift to a lower gearwhen driving downhill, or when acceler-ating. This is normal and necessary to main-tain the set speed.

The system will disable while driving if thebrakes overheat.


177

Accelerating When Overtaking

When driving with ACC activated and followinga vehicle at a speed greater than 45 mph(70 km/h), the system will provide an addi-tional acceleration up to the ACC set speed toassist in passing the vehicle. This additionalacceleration is triggered when the driverutilizes the left turn signal and will only beactive when passing on the left-hand side.The system detects the direction of traffic auto-matically when the vehicle passes from left handtraffic to right hand traffic. In this case, the over-taking assist function is only active when thereference vehicle is overtaken on the right. Theadditional acceleration is deactivated when thedriver uses the right direction indicator andreturns to the original lane.

Resuming The Speed

Once the system has been canceled but notdeactivated, to resume a previously set speed,simply push the RES/SET switch upward andremove your foot from the accelerator to recall it.The system will be set to the last stored speed.

Setting The Distance Between Vehicles

The distance between your vehicle and thevehicle ahead may be set to one bar (short),two bars (medium), three bars (long), or fourbars (maximum).

Distance IconsThe distances from the vehicle ahead areproportional to speed.

The interval of time with relation to the vehicleahead remains constant and varies from onesecond (for the short distance one-bar setting)to two seconds (for the maximum distancefour-bar setting).The set distance is shown on the display by adedicated icon.The setting is four (maximum) the first time thesystem is used. After the distance has beenmodified by the driver, the new distance will bestored also after the system is deactivatedand reactivated.To Decrease The DistancePush and release the distance button todecrease the distance setting. The distancesetting decreases by one bar (shorter) everytime the button is pushed.

Distance ButtonThe set speed is held if there are no vehiclesahead. Once the shortest distance has beenselected, the next push of the button will setthe maximum distance.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used iftraffic and road conditions permit. Resuminga set speed that is too high or too low forprevailing traffic and road conditions couldcause the vehicle to accelerate or deceleratetoo sharply for safe operation. Failure to followthese warnings can result in a collision anddeath or serious personal injury.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

178

(Continued)

If a slower vehicle is detected in the samelane, the vehicle icon on the display illumi-nates from grey to white. The system automat-ically adjusts the vehicle’s speed to keep theset distance, independently of the set speed.The vehicle holds the set distance until: The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed

higher than the set speed.

The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or thedetection field of the Adaptive CruiseControl system sensor.

The distance setting is changed.

The Adaptive Cruise Control system is deac-tivated/paused.

“Stop And Go” Function

The “Stop and Go” operating strategy allowsyou to maintain a safe distance from thevehicle ahead until the vehicle has completelystopped. It will also restart the vehicle auto-matically if the vehicle ahead drives awaywithin two seconds, otherwise it is necessaryto press the accelerator pedal or move theRES/SET switch upward to restart.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated and the set speed iscanceled if: The on/off button is pushed (when the

system is on or paused).

The ignition is placed in the OFF position

RACE mode is activated (Quadrifoglio models)

The system is canceled (the set speed anddistance are stored): When the system is paused (Refer to the

“Activation / Deactivation” section)

When the conditions shown in the “SettingThe Desired Speed” section occur

Limited Operation Warning

If the dedicated message is shown on thedisplay, a condition limiting the AdaptiveCruise Control operation may have occurred.This could be due to an obstruction of thevehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also be dueto a fault in the system. If an obstruction isdetected, clean the area of the windshield oppo-site the interior rear view mirror, where thecamera is located, as well as the area of the frontbumper where the sensor is located. Then checkthat the message has disappeared.When the conditions limiting the system func-tions end, normal operation will resume.Should the fault persist, contact an authorizeddealer.

WARNING!

The maximum breaking applied by thesystem is limited. The driver may apply thebrakes in all cases if needed.

If the system predicts that the brakinglevel is insufficient to hold the setdistance, either “BRAKE!” or a dedicatedmessage is displayed to warn the driver ofapproaching the vehicle ahead. Anacoustic signal is also emitted. In thiscase, it is advised to brake immediately asnecessary to hold a safe distance from thevehicle ahead.

The driver is responsible for ensuring thatthere are no pedestrians, other vehicles orobjectives along the direction of thevehicle. Failure to comply with theseprecautions may cause serious accidentsand injuries.

The driver is fully responsible for holding asafe distance from the vehicle aheadrespecting the highway code in force inthe respective country.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, thedriver must ensure that there are nopedestrians, vehicles or objects in the pathof the vehicle. Failure to follow thesewarnings can result in a collision and deathor serious personal injury.



179

Precautions While Driving

The system may not work correctly in somedriving conditions (see below). The driver mustcontrol the vehicle at all times.Vehicle Not AlignedThe system may not detect a vehicle travelingin the same lane, in the same direction, but isnot aligned. It also may not detect a vehiclewhich is cutting in from a side lane. Sufficientdistance from the vehicles ahead may not beguaranteed in these cases.The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and outof the driving lane causing the vehicle to brakeor accelerate unexpectedly.Steering And CurvesDriving on curves with the system set couldlimit speed and acceleration to guaranteevehicle stability, even if no vehicles aredetected ahead.When leaving the curve, the system resets thepreviously set speed.

Steering And Curves

NOTE:

In cases of narrow curves, the performanceof the system could be limited. In this case,it is advisable to deactivate the system.

The system only limits the speed DURING abend and not BEFORE it.

Using The System On SlopesWhen driving on roads with a variable incline,the system may not detect the presence of avehicle in the lane. System performance couldbe limited according to speed, load, trafficconditions and steep slopes.

Lane ChangeThe system may not detect the presence of avehicle until it is fully in your lane.

Lane ChangeIn this case, sufficient distance from thevehicle which is changing lanes may not beguaranteed. It is advisable to pay the utmostattention at all times and be always ready toapply the brakes if needed.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

180

Small VehiclesSome narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles andmotorcycles) traveling near the outer edges ofthe lane or which enter the lane from curb sideare not detected until they are fully in the lane.

Small VehiclesSufficient distance from the vehicles aheadmay not be guaranteed in these cases.Stationary Objects And VehiclesThe system can detect stationary vehicles whenthe vehicle is traveling at speeds between 2 mphand 35 mph (4 km/h and 60 km/h). The drivershould always pay attention and be ready topress the brakes if needed.Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite OrCrosswise DirectionThe system cannot detect the presence ofobjects or vehicles traveling in opposite orcrosswise directions and consequently will notactivate.

Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction

IFETEL: RCPBOMR 14-0766La operación de este equipo está sujeta a lassiguientes dos condiciones:



Changes or modifications made to this equip-ment not expressly approved by RobertBOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorizationto operate this equipment.This equipment has been tested and found tocomply with the limits for a Class A digitaldevice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reason-able protection against harmful interferencewhen the equipment is operated in a commer-cial environment. This equipment generates,

uses, and can radiate radio frequency energyand, if not installed and used in accordancewith the instruction manual, may causeharmful interference to radio communica-tions. Operation of this equipment in a resi-dential area is likely to cause harmfulinterference in which case the user will berequired to correct the interference at his ownexpense.Toutes modifications apportées à cet équipe-ment qui ne sont pas expressément homo-loguées par Robert BOSCH GmbH peuventannuler l'autorisation de la FCC de fairefonctionner cet équipement.Cet appareil a été vérifié et s'est révélé conformeaux normes applicables aux appareilsnumériques de catégorie A, en vertu de lasection 15 des règlements de la FCC. Cesnormes sont définies pour fournir une protectionraisonnable contre les interférences nuisibleslorsque l'équipement est utilisé dans les installa-tions résidentielles. Cet appareil génère, utiliseet peut émettre des ondes radioélectriques et,s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aumanuel d’instruction, peut causer un brouillageradioélectrique nuisible aux communicationsradio. Le fonctionnement de cet équipementdans une zone résidentielle est susceptible decauser des interférences nuisibles; dans ce cas,l'usager doit corriger les interférences à sespropres frais.


181

Radio Frequency Exposure InformationThis equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-ronment. This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 20 cmbetween the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-located oroperating in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter.Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd'exposition aux rayonnements IC établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corps.Ce transmetteur ne doit pas etre place aumeme endroit ou utilise simultanement avecun autre transmetteur ou antenne.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies toall Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped inthis vehicle:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and with Innovation, Science andEconomic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:











Déclaration d’exposition aux radiationsCet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établiespour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équi-pement doit être installé et utilisé avec unminimum de 20 cm de distance entre lasource de rayonnement et votre corpsREMARQUE: Des changements ou des modificationsn’ayant pas été expressément approuvés parla partie responsable de la conformité pour-raient révoquer l’autorisation d’utilisation del’équipement.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

182

HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM (HAS) — IF EQUIPPEDThe Highway Assist System (HAS) is a drivingassistance operation that is only availablewhen driving on highways. The system oper-ates up to speeds of 90 mph (145 km/h)when horizontal signs are detected.The system uses information from the frontcamera and radar to help keep the vehicle inthe center of the lane and at a constant speed.The HAS system combines Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) functions with lane centeringlogic to control the trajectory of the vehicle.The HAS system requires the driver’s hands toremain on the steering wheel.Once HAS is activated, a dedicated screen willappear on the instrument cluster display.


ActivationTo activate the HAS system, push the buttonlocated on the left side of the steering wheel.

Highway Assist ButtonSuspension ConditionsThe following operations will suspend the HASsystem: Start steering manually

Press the brake pedal

Disable the ACC device

Activate the turn signals

Push the ACC activation setting button fortwo seconds to activate Speed Control

Place the gear selector in PARK, REVERSE,or NEUTRAL

Reactivating the ACC system will reactivateHAS. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control” in thischapter.

Automatic DeactivationThe system can be deactivated in any of thefollowing situations: If there are narrow bends

When hands are removed from the steeringwheel

If the left or right turn signal is activated

If the driver intentionally changes laneswithout using the turn signal

If the driver’s seat belt is released

If the gear selector is placed in DRIVE

If the “Active Braking” function is activated(refer to “Forward Collision Warning” in“Safety for further information)

If the vehicle exits the highway

If the lane markings are not detected by thecamera

If the ACC device is deactivated

If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph(145 km/h)

NOTE:

When the HAS system is turned off, the symbolon the display turns red and then grey.

Hands on the steering wheel are detectedby a capacitive sensor installed in it.


183

When the automatic suspension conditions areover, HAS will be automatically reactivated.

Operation

The HAS system only operates when thedriver’s hands are on the steering wheel.If the system detects that the driver’s handshave been removed from the steering wheel,the system will alert the driver to place theirhands back on the steering wheel. Refer to“System Status” in this section for furtherinformation.If the vehicle crosses the lane boundary, thesteering wheel will vibrate and the dedicatedscreen will appear in the instrument clusterdisplay.

NOTE:The HAS system may take up to five secondsto turn on once all conditions are met. Duringthis time, a grey indicator light will appear onthe instrument cluster display and the systemwill automatically activate as soon as all of theconditions are met with no intervention fromthe driver.

The following conditions must be met beforethe HAS system turns on: The HAS system must be enabled by

pushing the button on the steering wheel

The vehicle must be on a highway

ACC must be activated

The right and left lane boundaries must bevisible

The vehicle speed must be between 0 and90 mph (0 and 145 km/h)

The camera, radar, and radio system mustbe functioning properly

The road lane width must be between 8.5 ftand 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)

The turn signals must not be activated

The HAS system must be functioning properly

Other operating limits: If the speed of ACC can be set to a higher

value (top speed 110 mph (180 km/h), HASis only available as long as the vehiclespeed is equal to or less than 90 mph(145 km/h).

When the ACC speed is reduced and thevehicle speed is less than 90 mph(145 km/h), the system will automaticallyreactivate.

If the ACC speed is set to 90 mph (145 km/h),traveling downhill may increase the vehiclespeed. The HAS system will deactivate untilthe speed returns to 90 mph (145 km/h).

Indications On The Display

The HAS system status can always be viewedin the instrument cluster display.The system status is indicated by the color ofthe symbol on the display.The HAS system uses sensors in the steeringwheel to detect if the driver’s hands are on it.If the driver’s hands are not on the steeringwheel, a series of warnings will appear in theinstrument cluster display to alert the driver toreposition their hands on the steering wheel.An acoustic signal will also sound. After aperiod of time, the HAS system will disable ifthe driver’s hands do not return to the steeringwheel.After a period of time, the HAS system willdisable if the driver has not repositioned theirhands on the steering wheel.When the system does not detect hands onthe steering wheel, it will warn the driver bydisplaying a dedicated screen on the instru-ment cluster display.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

184

System Status

Active SystemWhen the system is active, the screen belowwill appear in the “Driver Assistance” menu onthe instrument cluster display.

HAS ActiveIf on a different menu screen, a symbol willappear on the instrument cluster display indi-cating that the system is active.When the driver’s hands are removed from thesteering wheel, the system disables after a fewseconds. A screen will appear in the instru-ment cluster display warning the driver toreturn their hands to the steering wheel.

Active System (Hands Removed From TheSteering Wheel For A Short Time)As soon as the driver removes their handsfrom the steering wheel, the screen below willappear in the instrument cluster display. Thesystem will remain active at this time.

Hands Removed Initial WarningIf the driver does not return their hands to thesteering wheel within a few seconds, thescreen below will appear in the instrumentcluster display.

Hands Removed Secondary Warning

Active System (Hands Removed From TheSteering Wheel For A Long Time)If the driver still has not returned their handsto the steering wheel after the screen above isdisplayed, the below screen will now appear inthe instrument cluster display, and anacoustic signal will sound until the driverregains control of the vehicle.

Hands Removed Final WarningIf the driver’s hands are not returned to thesteering wheel after an extended period oftime, a deactivation message will appear onthe instrument cluster display. The steeringwheel control will be deactivated.This display will remain active even when thedriver’s hands are removed from the steeringwheel. The symbol on the display will turn grey.The ACC system and Lane Departure Warningsystems will also be disabled.When HAS is active, the Lane Keeping Assist(LKA)/ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) systems(if equipped), if previously activated, will remainactivated.


185

Limited System Availability/Operation

System AvailabilityExternal factors and conditions may affect theproper operation of the HAS system, such as: Narrow, winding, curvy streets

Poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog,etc.)

Front lights of oncoming vehicles or directsunlight or shade

Damage or obstructions caused by mud,ice, snow, etc.

Bumper damaged or not aligned

Interference with other equipment thatcauses electromagnetic waves

Presence of roadwork/road constructionsites

If the indications given by the navigationsystem (if any) of the radio system are notyet ready and/or if the navigation system isrecalculating the route

System Limited OperationThe HAS system may have limited or reducedfunctionality when one of the following condi-tions occur: Lane markings are not clear or in conditions

of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow,fog, etc.)

Either the camera or radar are damaged,covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice,snow, etc.)

When driving on hills or roads with narrowbends

Near highway toll booths

When the highway entrance or exit is widerthan 20 ft (6 m)

If the camera is exposed to glare caused byreflections or direct sunlight

If the navigation system information isunavailable or being recalculated

NOTE:

If the vehicle approaches a bend that is toonarrow with respect to the current speed,the HAS system will disable.

If damage to the windshield occurs, havethe windshield replaced by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury or death:

Always remain alert and be ready to takecontrol of the vehicle in the event that theHAS system disables.

Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel when the HAS system is activated.

Maintain a safe distance from other vehiclesand pay attention to traffic conditions.

Do not place any objects on the steering wheel(e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-fere with the hand detection sensor.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

186

TRAFFIC JAM ASSIST (TJA) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) system can be acti-vated on all road types. The system uses acamera to detect lane markings and keep thevehicle in the center of the lane.When the system is unable to detect lanemarkings, it will still operate using surroundingtraffic. This can occur in congested trafficscenarios, when the vehicles ahead orsurrounding obstruct the visibility of the lanemarkings. When the speed is below 12 mph(20 km/h), the system can use a lock-onstrategy that allows the vehicle to automati-cally follow the vehicle ahead.The TJA system combines Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) functions with Lane DepartureWarning functions to maintain vehicle speedand steering wheel behavior.

NOTE:Do not use the TJA system while driving inurban areas.


ActivationTo activate the system, push the button on theleft side of the steering wheel.To deactivate the system, push the buttonagain.

Traffic Jam Assist ButtonSuspension ConditionsThe following operations will suspend the TJAsystem: Pressing the brake pedal

Opening the driver’s door

Disabling ACC

If the vehicle speed exceeds 37 mph(60 km/h)

Releasing the driver’s seat belt

Placing the gear selector in PARK,REVERSE, or NEUTRAL

If the Forward Collision Warning system or“Active Braking” intervenes

Automatic DeactivationSystem operation will be temporarily disabledunder the following conditions: When traveling around narrow bends

If the lane boundaries are not detected

One of the two lines is interrupted

The sun is low and reflects on the radarcamera

If the turn signals are activated

If the driver intentionally changes laneswithout using the turn signal

If manual steering begins

If the driver’s hands are removed from thesteering wheel

When there is no surrounding traffic andthere are no horizontal lane boundaries

If the system is not functioning properly

If lateral acceleration is high

NOTE:

When TJA is turned off, the symbol in theinstrument cluster display will turn red, andthen grey.

A sensor in the steering wheel detectswhether the driver’s hands are placed onthe steering wheel.


187

When the automatic suspension conditionsare over, the TJA system will be automaticallyreactivated.

Operation

The TJA system can only operate when thedriver’s hands are on the steering wheel.If the system detects that the driver’s handshave been removed from the steering wheel, amessage will appear in the instrument clusterdisplay to alert the driver to place their handsback on the wheel.

NOTE:

If the vehicle begins to cross the laneboundary, the steering wheel will vibrateand a dedicated screen will appear in theinstrument cluster display.

The TJA system may take up to five seconds tobecome active once all conditions are met.

The following conditions must be met in orderto activate the system: The TJA system must be enabled

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) systemmust be turned on

The right and left lane boundaries must berecognized by the system

The vehicle must be traveling at a speedbetween 0 and 37 mph (0 and 60 km/h)

The camera, radar, and radio system mustbe functioning properly

The road lane width must be between 8.5 ftand 13.7 ft (2.6 m and 4.2 m)

The turn signals must be turned off

The TJA system must be functioning properly

If the ACC speed is set to 37 mph (60 km/h)or less, traveling downhill may increase thevehicle speed. The system will remain inac-tive until the speed returns to 37 mph(60 km/h) or less.


The TJA system status is indicated by the colorof the symbol in the instrument cluster display.The system uses sensors in the steering wheelto detect if the driver’s hands are present. Ifthe driver’s hands are removed, a series ofwarnings will appear in the instrument clusterdisplay to alert the driver to reposition theirhands on the steering wheel. Acoustic signalswill also be emitted.If the driver’s hands are not returned to thesteering wheel after a period of time, thesystem will be disabled.

System Status

Active SystemAn active system is indicated by the followingscreen in the “Driver Assistance” menu on theinstrument cluster display.

TJA System ActiveActive System (Hands Removed From TheSteering Wheel For A Short Time)The following screen will appear in the instrumentcluster display immediately after the driver’s handsare removed from the steering wheel. The systemstill remains active at this time.

Hands Removed Initial Warning


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

188

If the driver does not return their hands to thesteering wheel within a few seconds, thefollowing screen will appear in the instrumentcluster display.

Hands Removed Secondary WarningActive System (Hands Removed From TheSteering Wheel For A Long Time)If the driver’s hands have still not beenreturned to the steering wheel, the followingscreen will appear in the instrument clusterdisplay.

Hands Removed Final Warning

An acoustic signal will sound until the driverregains control of the vehicle (hands onsteering wheel). The system is still active atthis time.If the driver’s hands are not returned to thesteering wheel after a period of time, a deacti-vation message will appear on the instrumentcluster display and the steering wheel controlwill be deactivated.Once the indicator light on the display turnsgrey, the system is no longer active and thedriver must take control of the vehicle. At thistime, the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) systemand Lane Departure Warning system will alsobe disabled.When the TJA system is active, the Lane KeepingAssist (LKA)/Lane Departure Warning (LDW)systems (if equipped) will be temporarilydisabled. When TJA is not active, the LKA/LDWsystems will remain active. Refer to “LaneKeeping Assist” and “Land Departure Warning”in this chapter for further information.

Limited System Availability/Operation

System AvailabilityPerformance of the TJA system may beaffected by the following factors: Narrow, winding, curvy streets

Lane boundaries that are not clear or inconditions of poor visibility (e.g. heavy rain,snow, fog, etc.)

If the camera is exposed to glare from directsunlight or headlights of an oncomingvehicle

If the camera or sensor is damaged,covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice,snow, etc.)

The bumper is damaged or misaligned

Interference with other equipment causeselectromagnetic waves

Construction sites

If the indications given by the navigationsystem of the radio system are not yet readyor if the system is recalculating


189

System Limited OperationThe TJA system may have limited or reducedfunctionality when one of the following condi-tions occurs: Lane boundaries are not clear or in condi-

tions of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain,snow, fog, etc.)

Either the camera or radar are damaged,covered, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice,snow, etc.)

When driving on hills or narrow bends

Near highway toll booths

When the highway entrance or exit is morethan 20 ft (6 m) wide

If the camera is exposed to glare fromreflections or direct sunlight

NOTE:

If damage to the windshield occurs, havethe windshield replaced by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

If the vehicle approaches a bend that is toonarrow with respect to the current speed,the TJA system will deactivate.

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) systemuses a camera mounted on the windshield todetect recognizable road signs such as: Speed limits

Signs indicating the end of the situationsindicated above

If the camera does not detect valid speedlimits, the radio system navigation system maysuggest unregulated speed limits.The system always checks the traffic signsindicating the current speed limit. The systemis able to recognize and display up to twodifferent road signs in the instrument clusterdisplay.Depending on the unit of measurement (km ormph) set through the “Unit of Measurement”menu in the radio system, the TSR system willautomatically show the indication of the roadsign in the unit of measurements selected inthe instrument cluster display.

WARNING!


Always remain alert and be ready to takecontrol of the car in the event that the TJAsystem disables.

Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel when the TJA system is activated.


The TJA system should only be used as adriving aid. The drive must always payattention to their surroundings when thesystem is operating and be ready to takecontrol of the vehicle at any time.

Do not place any objects on the steeringwheel (e.g. steering wheel covers) thatcould interfere with the hand detectionsensor on the steering wheel.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

190


The TSR System can be activated/deactivatedin the radio system by selecting “Comfort” inthe “Driver Assistance” menu. The system acti-vation is signaled by road signs shown on theinstrument cluster display.

NOTE:

By selecting “Blinking”, the driver can activatea warning to display when the speed exceedsthe limit indicated by the TSR System. Thespeed road sign on the instrument clusterdisplay will blink until the vehicle speed dropsbelow the displayed limit.

Selecting “Offset” will set the speed atwhich “Blinking” is activated up to amaximum of 6 mph (10 km/h) above thelimit detected by the system.

If no speed limit signs are found, the systemwill revert to the speed limit signs that arestored in the NAV system.


The system status can always be viewedthrough the instrument cluster display.The instrument cluster display shows only thespeed limit indications and consists of thefollowing steps: The new speed limit recognized by the

system, which is indicated by means of apredetermined color. The road sign indi-cating the end of the speed limit or a “RoadSign Not Detected” message may appear inthis zone.

After a predetermined distance, the previ-ously displayed road sign changes color toinform the driver that the speed limitprovided may no longer be valid.

1 — Traffic Sign Recognized

WARNING!


Always remain alert and be ready to takecontrol of the vehicle in the event that theTJA system disables.

Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel when the TJA system is activated.


CAUTION!

Functionality may be limited or the systemmay not work if the sensor is obstructed.

The system may have limited operation ornot work at all in weather conditions such asheavy rain, hail, thick fog, and low tempera-tures. Strong light contrasts can influencethe recognition capability of the sensor.

The area surrounding the sensor must notbe covered with stickers or any other object.

Do not tamper or perform any operationsin the area of the windshield glass directlysurrounding the sensor.

Clean foreign matters such as bird drop-pings, insects, snow or ice on the wind-shield. Use specific detergents and cleancloths to avoid scratching the windshield.


191

INTELLIGENT SPEED CONTROL (ISC) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe Intelligent Speed Control (ISC) system isalways paired with the Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) system. The ISC system suggests anautomatic speed adjustment to the driverbased on the speed limit for the road beingtraveled. The driver can decide whether toaccept or reject the automatic speed adjust-ment, using the switch on the steering wheel.If the speed limit is exceeded according to theroad signs or traffic conditions, a dedicatedgraphic message is displayed on the instru-ment panel display.

RES/SET Switch


ActivationThe system can be activated in the radiosystem by selecting the “Driver Assistance”menu and then selecting “Comfort”. Thesymbol illuminates in the instrument clusterdisplay when the system is active.

1 — ISC System ActiveDeactivationThe system is deactivated under the followingconditions: When the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

system is deactivated

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)system is deactivated

NOTE:Selecting “Speed Offset” allows the driver toset the speed up to a maximum of 6 mph(10 km/h) above or below the suggestedspeed set by the ISC system. In this instance,the road sign information shown in the instru-ment cluster display will continue to bedetected by the TSR system.


The system status is indicated by a white orgreen icon in the instrument cluster display(similar to the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)device) to the left of the road sign indicationsprovided by the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)system.

Acceptance/Rejection Of The Suggested Speed

The system can be activated if the driver hasactivated the following systems beforehand: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

When these systems are active, a telltale willdisplay in the instrument cluster display indi-cating the suggested speed provided by theTSR system. The driver has the option toaccept or reject this using the RES/SET switchon the steering wheel.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

192

To accept the proposed speed and adjust thespeed set by ACC, move the RES/SET switch upor down in the direction indicated in the telltale.To reject the proposed speed, move the RES/SETswitch up or down in the direction opposite of thearrow in the telltale. The ACC system willcontinue to regulate to the previously set speed.If the speed set by the ACC system is the sameas the speed detected by the TSR system, thespeed limit indicator on the instrument clusterdisplay will be highlighted with a green circle.

1 — Suggested Speed Higher Than Current Speed

2 — Suggested Speed Lower Than Current Speed

1 —Road Sign Recognized

DRIVER ATTENTION ASSIST (DAA) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe Driver Attention Assist (DAA) systemdetects when the driver is feeling fatigued andwarns the driver to pull over and take a break.


The DAA system can be activated and deacti-vated through the radio system by selectingthe following in order:

1. “Driver Assistance”

2. “Safety”

WARNING!

The DAA System is an aid for driving anddoes not relieve the driver of theresponsibility of driving the vehicle. If youexperience fatigue while driving, pull oversafely for a break without waiting for theDAA to intervene. Only return to the roadwhen you are in the right physical andmental condition to prevent endangeringyourself and other drivers.


193

System Intervention

Using information from the front camera, thesystem implements two operating logics: The first operating logic takes the driving

style into account, observing the road anddetecting to what extent the driver cancontinue driving with few lane crossingevents.

The second operating logic measures thetime spent behind the wheel with thevehicle speed above 40 mph (60 km/h)and below 110 mph (180 km/h). If the“Standard” option is selected, in theseconditions, the “Dozy Driver” message mayappear after three hours of driving. If the“Early” option is selected and these condi-tions occur, the “Dozy Driver” message willbe displayed after two hours of driving.

NOTE:If the conditions described above are notdetected continuously during the entire drivingperiod, the “Dozy Driver” message may bedisplayed later than 2 or 3 hours. If the drivingstyle indicates that the driver is unable tofollow the road trajectory and respect the hori-zontal lane markings, the red symbol willappear on the instrument cluster display tosuggest that the driver should stop for a break.An audible signal will also sound.

If the driver accepts the suggestion providedby the system by pushing the MENU button onthe multifunction lever, the message willdisappear from the display and the symbol willbe displayed in the dedicated area of theinstrument cluster display until the nextengine shutdown.If the driver ignores the warning provided bythe system and does not stop, the messagewill continue to remain on the display, alongwith the symbol.

NOTE:

In the event of a DAA system failure, anamber symbol will appear in the instrumentcluster display along with a dedicatedmessage.

If the ABS system activates, “ABS ACTIVE”will display in place of the DAA symbol andwill remain active until the ABS systemdeactivates.

DAA Warning Message

DAA Warning IconChanging The System SensitivityThe system intervention sensitivity can beadjusted through the radio system by selectingthe following in order:


2. “Safety”

NOTE:

If “Race” mode (if equipped) is activated,the DAA system will be automatically deacti-vated.

The system sensitivity cannot be changed inthe event of a camera system failure.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

194

PARKSENSE SYSTEM

Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only

The parking sensors, located in the rearbumper, detect obstacles while the vehicle isin REVERSE. When an obstacle is detected, anacoustic alert will sound and visual indicationswill be displayed on the instrument cluster.

Rear Sensor LocationEngagement/DisengagementTo turn the system off, push the ParkSensebutton located to the left of the headlightswitch. The indicator light within the button willilluminate when the system is turned off.Pushing the button a second time will turn thesystem back on, and the indicator light willturn off.

ParkSense On/Off SwitchThe indicator light within the ParkSensebutton will also be on in case of system failure.If the button is pushed with a system failure,the indicator light will flash for approximatelyfive seconds. The light will then stay onconstantly.

NOTE:When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition, the ParkSense System keeps the laststate when the engine was stopped (activatedor deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/DeactivationThe system, when engaged, is automaticallyactivated by engaging the REVERSE gear. It isdeactivated by engaging another gear.

Acoustic SignalWhen REVERSE is engaged and there is anobstacle behind the vehicle, an acoustic signalwith variable frequency will sound. The acoustic signal increases in frequency

as the distance between the vehicle and theobstacle decreases.

The acoustic signal becomes continuouswhen the distance between the vehicle andthe obstacle is less than 11 inches (30 cm),and stops if the distance increases.

The acoustic signal is constant if thedistance between the vehicle and theobstacle is unchanged.

NOTE:If several obstacles are detected by thesensors, only the nearest one is considered.

An acoustic signal will not sound if the vehicleis in PARK.


195

Indication On DisplayThe driver can select the type of warning theywould like to be displayed through the radiosystem. To access the function on the mainmenu, select in the following order:

1. “Settings”


3. “ParkSense”

4. “Mode”

5. “Sound and Display”

Visual IndicationsThe system indicates the presence of anobstacle by displaying a single red arc in thedetected area, in relation to the distance ofthe object and the position of the vehicle.If the obstacle is detected in the rear centralarea, a single red arc will be displayed as theobstacle approaches, first constant, thenflashing, in addition to an acoustic signal.If the obstacle is detected in the rear left and/orright area, a single red flashing arc will be shownin the corresponding area on the display and thesystem will emit an acoustic signal, either atfrequent intervals or constantly.In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstaclewhen a single red flashing arc is shown on thedisplay and the acoustic signal becomescontinuous.

If several obstacles are detected simultane-ously in the rear area, the display will show allof them, regardless of the area in which theywere detected.It is not possible to exit from the display screenwhile the vehicle is in REVERSE.Fault IndicationParking sensor faults, if any, will be indicatedwhen REVERSE is engaged by a message onthe instrument cluster display. Refer to"Warning Lights And Messages" in "Getting ToKnow Your Instrument Panel" for further infor-mation.Messages On The DisplayIn case of system failure, a dedicatedmessage appears on the instrument clusterfor about five seconds. Cleaning The Sensors: If the display shows

a message requiring the sensors to becleaned, make sure that the outer surfaceand the underside of the rear bumper is freeof debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Oncethese areas are clear, place the ignition inthe OFF position, then return it to ON/RUN.If the message is still displayed, contact anauthorized dealer.

Audio System Not Available: If the displayshows a message that the audio system is notavailable, it means that the acoustic signal willbe emitted by the instrument panel, and notthrough the vehicles speakers.

NOTE:Some conditions may influence the perfor-mance of the ParkSense System:

Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due tothe presence of ice, snow, mud, or thickpaint on the surface of the sensor.

The sensors may detect a false obstacle(echo interference) due to mechanical inter-ference, for example when washing thevehicle or in extreme weather.

The signals sent by the sensors can bealtered by the presence of ultrasonicsystems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems oftrucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.

System performance can be influenced bythe position of the sensors. For example,due to a change in the ride setting (causedby wear to the shock absorbers or suspen-sion), by changing tires, overloading thevehicle or operations that require thevehicle to be lowered.

Be sure not to place bumper stickers orother adhesives over the sensors as this willaffect system performance.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

196

Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors

The parking sensors, located in the front andrear bumpers, detect the presence of anyobstacles and warn the driver through anacoustic signal and visual indications, whichwill be displayed on the instrument clusterdisplay.

Front Sensor Location

Rear Sensor Location

Engagement/DisengagementTo turn the front parking sensors off, push theParkSense button located to the left of theheadlight switch. The indicator light within theswitch will illuminate when the system isturned off. Pushing the button a second timewill turn the front sensors back on, and theindicator light will turn off.

NOTE:Deactivation of both the front and rear parkingsensors can only be done through the radiosystem.

The indicator light within the ParkSenseSystem switch will also be on in case of systemfailure. If the switch is pushed with a systemfailure, the indicator light will flash for approx-imately five seconds. The light will then stay onconstantly.

NOTE:When the ignition is placed in the ON/RUNposition, the ParkSense System keeps the laststate when the engine was stopped (activatedor deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/DeactivationWhen the REVERSE gear is engaged and thesystem is on, the front and rear sensors are acti-vated. If the vehicle moves from REVERSE to aforward gear, the rear sensors are deactivated,while the front sensors remain active until thespeed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the ParkSense system.Always check carefully behind your vehicle,and be sure to check for pedestrians,animals, other vehicles, obstructions, orblind spots before backing up. You areresponsible for the safety of yoursurroundings and must continue to payattention while backing up. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

The ParkSense System is only a parking aidand it is unable to recognize every obstacle,including small obstacles. Parking curbsmight be temporarily detected or notdetected at all. Obstacles located above orbelow the sensors will not be detected whenthey are in close proximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing the ParkSense System in order to beable to stop in time when an obstacle isdetected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing the ParkSense system.


197

NOTE:In certain operating conditions, the systemcould start detecting an obstacle only after thevehicle has moved slightly (a few inches).

Acoustic SignalIn the presence of an obstacle at the front orthe rear of the vehicle, an acoustic signal withvariable frequency will sound: The acoustic signal increases in frequency

as the distance between the vehicle and theobstacle decreases.

The acoustic signal becomes continuouswhen the distance between the vehicle andthe obstacle is less than 11 inches (30 cm),and stops if the distance increases.

The acoustic signal is constant if thedistance between the vehicle and theobstacle is unchanged.

NOTE:If the sensors detect several front and rearobstacles, the closest obstacle is considered.An intermittent signal will sound if the obsta-cles are at the same distance (front and rear).

When the system emits an acoustic signal, thevolume of the radio system, if activated, isautomatically lowered.

Indication On DisplayThe driver can select the type of warning theywould like to be displayed through the radiosystem. To access the function on the mainmenu, select in the following order:

1. “Settings”


3. “ParkSense”

4. “Mode”

5. “Sound and Display”

Visual IndicationsThe system indicates the presence of anobstacle by displaying a single red arc in thedetected areas, in relation to the distance ofthe object and the position of the vehicle.If the obstacle is detected in the front or rearcentral area, a single red arc will be displayedas the obstacle approaches, first constant,then flashing, in addition to an acoustic signal.If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear leftand/or right area, a single red flashing arc will beshown in the corresponding area on the displayand the system will emit an acoustic signal,either at frequent intervals or constantly.If several obstacles are detected simultane-ously in the front and rear area, the display willshow all of them, regardless of the area inwhich they were detected.

In general, the vehicle is closer to the obstaclewhen a single or several flashing arcs areshown on the display and the acoustic signalbecomes continuous.It is not possible to exit from the display screenwhile the vehicle is in REVERSE.Fault IndicationParking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated bya message on the display on the instrumentcluster. Refer to "Warning Lights And Messages"in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" forfurther information.Messages On The DisplayIn case of system failure, a dedicatedmessage appears on the instrument clusterfor about five seconds. Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: If the

display shows a message requiring thesensors to be cleaned, make sure that theouter surface and the underside of the frontand rear bumpers are free of debris (e.g.snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas areclear, place the ignition in the OFF position,then return it to ON/RUN. If the message isstill displayed, contact an authorized dealer.

Audio System Not Available: If the displayshows a message that the audio system is notavailable, it means that the acoustic signal willbe emitted by the instrument panel, and notthrough the vehicle’s speakers.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

198 (Continued)

NOTE:Some conditions may influence the perfor-mance of the ParkSense System:

Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due tothe presence of ice, snow, mud, or thickpaint on the surface of the sensor.

The sensors may detect a false obstacle(echo interference) due to mechanical inter-ference, for example when washing thevehicle or in extreme weather.

The signals sent by the sensors can bealtered by the presence of ultrasonicsystems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems oftrucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.

System performance can be influenced bythe position of the sensors. For example,due to a change in the ride setting (causedby wear to the shock absorbers or suspen-sion), by changing tires, overloading thevehicle or operations that require thevehicle to be lowered.

Be sure not to place bumper stickers orother adhesives over the sensors as this willaffect system performance.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The Lane Departure Warning system uses aforward looking camera located on the wind-shield to detect lane markings and measurevehicle position within the lane boundaries.When one or both lane limits are detected andthe vehicle passes over one without an acti-vated turn signal, the system emits a visual aswell as an audible signal.If the vehicle continues to go beyond the lineof the lane without any intervention from thedriver, the surpassed line will light up on thedisplay (left or right) to urge the driver to bringthe vehicle back into the limits of the lane.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the ParkSense system.Always check carefully behind your vehicle,and be sure to check for pedestrians,animals, other vehicles, obstructions, orblind spots before backing up. You areresponsible for the safety of yoursurroundings and must continue to payattention while backing up. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

The ParkSense System is only a parkingaid and it is unable to recognize everyobstacle, including small obstacles.Parking curbs might be temporarilydetected or not detected at all. Obstacleslocated above or below the sensors willnot be detected when they are in closeproximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly whenusing the ParkSense System in order to beable to stop in time when an obstacle isdetected. It is recommended that thedriver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing the ParkSense system.

CAUTION!

Projecting loads on the roof of the vehiclemay interfere with the correct operation ofthe camera. Before starting, make surethe load is correctly positioned in order tonot cover the camera operating range.

Do not cover the operating range of thecamera with stickers or other objects.

Do not tamper with nor operate on thecamera. Do not close the openings in theaesthetic cover located under the interiorrear view mirror. In the event of a failure ofthe camera, contact an authorized dealer.


199

System Activation/Deactivation

The system is activated/deactivated bypushing the button located on the end of themultifunction lever, or through the “DriverAssistance” widget though the radio systemwithin the “Comfort” menu.

Lane Departure Warning System Activation/Deactivation Button

NOTE:When the engine is started, the system main-tains the operating mode that was selectedwhen it was turned off.

Activation ConditionsOnce turned on, the system becomes activeonly if the following conditions are met: The vehicle speed is equal to or above

37 mph (60 km/h) (the system is deacti-vated at speeds equal to or greater than110 mph (180 km/h)).

The lane limit lines are visible at least onone side.

There are suitable visibility conditions.

The road is straight or with wide radiusbends.

A suitable distance is kept from the vehiclein front.

The turn signal is not active.

Symbols And Messages On The Display

The Lane Departure Warning system advisesthe driver when the vehicle leaves the drivinglane by showing symbols and messages on theinstrument cluster display.When the system is active and the lane limitshave not been detected, the display shows twogrey lane lines.

Lane Limits Not Detected

The camera may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions suchas: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,formation of ice layers on the windshield.

Camera operation may also be compro-mised by the presence of dust, condensa-tion, dirt or ice on the windshield, by trafficconditions (e.g. vehicles that are drivingnot aligned with yours, vehicle driving in atransverse or opposite way on the samelane, bend with a small radius of curva-ture), by road surface conditions and bydriving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).Make sure the windshield is always clean.Use specific detergents and clean clothsto avoid scratching the windshield. Thecamera operation may also be limited orabsent in some driving, traffic and roadsurface conditions.

If the windshield must be replaced due toscratches, chipping or breakage, contactexclusively your authorized dealer. Do notreplace the windshield on your own. It isadvisable to replace the windshield if it isdamaged in the area of the camera.



ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

200

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single LimitWhen the system is active and only, forexample, the left lane limit has been detected,the detected lane illuminates in white on thedisplay; the system is ready to provide visualwarnings on the display in the event of unin-tentional exiting of the lane (turn signal notactivated) to the left.

Left Lane Limit DetectedWhen the system detects that the vehicle hasapproached the lane line and is about to pass it,the left line on the display illuminates in yellow.

Left Lane Limit Approached

The system operates in the same way, butmirrored, in the event of exiting the right lanewhen only the right lane limit has beendetected.Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both LimitsWhen the system is active, both lane lines onthe display illuminate in white to indicate thesuccessful detection of both limits.When lane limits are detected, the system isready to provide indications in case the driverunintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal notactivated).As the Lane Departure Warning systemdetects the lane limits while the vehicle is inmotion, it will adjust the display accordingly(from white to yellow and vice versa, andincrease their thickness).If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by anaudible signal as well as the visual indicationin the instrument cluster. The signal is emittedthrough the speakers on the side of the lanelimit which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicleis exceeding the left line of the lane, theaudible signal will come from the speakers onthe left of the vehicle).Changing The System SettingsThe system's sensitivity can be set through theradio system. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” canbe selected.

To access the function, from the main menuselect the following in order:

1. “Settings”

2. “Comfort”

3. “Lane Departure Warning”

4. “Sensitivity”

Limited Operation WarningIf a message appears on the display, a condi-tion limiting the Lane Departure Warningsystem operation may have occurred. Thiscould be an obstruction of the camera view, ora fault in the system.If an obstruction is detected, clean the area ofthe windshield by the interior rear view mirror.Although the vehicle can still be driven innormal conditions, the system may not func-tion properly.When the conditions limiting the system arecorrected, it will go back to normal operation.Should a fault persist, contact an authorizeddealer.System Failure Warning

If the system turns off and the warning light appears on the display, it means that there isa system fault.In this case, it is still possible to drive thevehicle, but you are advised to contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.


201

LANE KEEPING ASSIST (LKA) SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPEDThe Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system uses acamera located on the windshield to detectthe lane limits and calculate the position of thevehicle within such limits, in order to makesure that the vehicle remains inside the lane.This is an active system that will apply torqueto the steering wheel if it senses that thevehicle is drifting out of the lane.When one or both lane limits are detected andthe vehicle passes over one without a turnsignal being applied, the system will applytorque to the steering wheel and a visualsignal will be displayed in the instrumentcluster display. An audible signal may alsosound.If the vehicle continues to go beyond the laneline without any driver intervention, thesurpassed lane line (left or right) will light upon the instrument cluster display to urge thedriver to bring the vehicle back inside the lanelimits.

Lane Crossed


The system is activated/deactivated by pressingthe button at the end of the multifunction lever.Each time the engine is started, the system main-tains the operating mode that was selected whenit was previously turned off.

Activation/Deactivation Button

Activation ConditionsOnce the activation button is pushed, thesystem becomes active only if the followingconditions are met: The car speed is higher than 37 mph

(60 km/h). (The system is deactivated atspeeds equal to or higher than 110 mph(180 km/h))

The lane limit lines are visible at least onone side

There are suitable visibility conditions

The road is straight or with wide radiusbends

A suitable distance is kept from the vehiclein front

The turn signal (to indicate leaving the lane)is not active


The Lane Keeping Assist system also advisesthe driver when the car changes lanes byshowing symbols and messages on the instru-ment cluster display.The message at the top of the display remainsactive only until the main reconfigurable areaof the display is activated by pressing the TRIPbutton located on the end of the windshieldwiper lever. Refer to “Instrument ClusterDisplay” in “Getting To Know Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

202

After activating the main reconfigurable area,the Lane Keeping Assist system messages willbe shown in the instrument cluster display.When the system is active and the lane limitshave not been detected, the display shows twogrey lane lines.

Lane Limits Not DetectedExiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single LimitWhen the system is active and only, forexample, the left lane limit has been detected,the detected lane lights up in white on thedisplay; the system is ready to provide visualwarnings on the display in the event of unin-tentional exiting of the lane (turn signal indi-cator not activated) to the left.

Left Lane Limit DetectedWhen the system detects that the vehicle hasapproached the lane line and is about to passit, the left line on the display lights up in yellow.

Left Lane Limit Approached

NOTE:The system operates in the same way, butmirrored, in the event of exiting the right lanewhen only the right lane limit has beendetected.

Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both LimitsWhen the system is active, both lane lines onthe display illuminate in white to indicate thesuccessful detection of both limits.When lane limits are detected, the system isready to provide indications in case the driverunintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal notactivated).As the Lane Keeping Assist system detects thelane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it willadjust the display accordingly (from white toyellow and yellow to white, and increase theirthickness).If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by anaudible signal as well as the visual indicationin the instrument cluster. The signal is emittedthrough the speakers on the side of the lanelimit which is being crossed (e.g. if the vehicleis exceeding the left line of the lane, theaudible signal will come from the speakers onthe left of the vehicle).


203

Hands Presence On The Steering WheelDetectionThe system is able to detect the presence ofthe driver’s hands on the steering wheel.When the system does not detect the pres-ence of hands on the steering wheel for a fewseconds (up to 6 seconds), the followingscreen will be displayed on the instrumentcluster display. No acoustic warning will beemitted in this case.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not Detected Display (Up To 6 Seconds)

When the system does not detect the presence ofhands on the steering wheel for a few seconds(from 6 to 15 seconds), the following screen will bedisplayed on the instrument cluster display. A shortacoustic signal will sound if hands are not detectedon the steering wheel for 6 to 12 seconds. A contin-uous signal will sound if hands are not detected onthe steering wheel for 12 to 15 seconds.

Hand Presence On The Steering Wheel Not Detected Display (6 To 15 Seconds)

After 15 seconds with the hands removedfrom the steering wheel, the LKA system willbe deactivated and a dedicated message willbe shown on the instrument cluster display. Ashort acoustic signal will sound in this case.In any of the situations above where the handsare removed from the steering wheel for morethan 6 seconds, it is necessary to repositionthe hands on the steering wheel.Changing The System SensitivityThe system's sensitivity can be set through theradio system in the “Driver Assistance” menu.Sensitivity “Early” or “Late” can be selected.Changing The System StrengthThe system’s strength can be set through theradio system in the “Driver Assistance” menu.Strength “Low” or “High” can be selected.

Limited Operation WarningIf a message appears on the display, a condi-tion limiting the LKA system operation mayhave occurred. This could be an obstruction ofthe camera view, or a fault in the system.If an obstruction is detected, clean the area ofthe windshield by the interior rear view mirror.Although the vehicle can still be driven innormal conditions, the system may not func-tion properly.When the conditions limiting the system arecorrected, it will go back to normal operation.Should a fault persist, contact an authorizeddealer.System Failure Signaling

If the system turns off and appears on thedisplay, it means that there is a system fault.In this case, it is still possible to drive thevehicle, but you are advised to contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

204

(Continued)

REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES

Description

The Rear Back-Up Camera is located justunder the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the rearlicense plate.

Rear Back-Up Camera LocationCamera Activation/DeactivationThe Rear Back-Up Camera can be activatedand deactivated through the radio system byselecting the “Settings” option on the menu.Once the Rear Back-Up Camera is activated,choose from one of the following options: “Activate”

“Switch-Off Delay”

“Camera Guidelines”

CAUTION!

Projecting loads on the roof of the vehiclemay interfere with the correct operation ofthe camera. Before starting, make surethe load is correctly positioned, in ordernot to cover the camera operating range.

If the windshield must be replaced due toscratches, chippings or breakage, contactan authorized dealer. Do not replace thewindshield on your own; there is risk ofmalfunction. It is advisable to replace thewindshield if it is damaged in the area ofthe camera.

Do not tamper with or operate on thecamera. Do not close the openings in theaesthetic cover located under the interiorrearview mirror. In the event of a failure ofthe camera, contact an authorized dealerimmediately.

Do not cover the operating range of thecamera with stickers or other objects. Alsopay attention to other objects on the hood(e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure theydo not interfere with the camera.

The camera may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions suchas: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,formation of ice layers on the windshield.

Camera operation may also be compro-mised by the presence of dust, condensa-tion, dirt or ice on the windshield, trafficconditions (e.g. vehicles that are drivingnot aligned with yours, vehicle driving in atransverse or opposite way on the samelane, bend with a small radius of curva-ture), or road surface conditions anddriving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).Make sure the windshield is always clean.Use specific detergents and clean clothsto avoid scratching the windshield. Thecamera operation may also be limited orabsent in some driving, traffic and roadsurface conditions.



205

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the radiosystem display will show the area behind thevehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up Camera,along with a warning message.

Rear Back-Up Camera Display


Indications On The DisplayThrough the radio system settings, by acti-vating the "Camera Guidelines" feature, guide-lines can be seen on the rear camera display.If activated, the guidelines are positioned onthe image to highlight the width of the vehicleand the expected reverse path based on thesteering wheel position.A superimposed central line indicates thecenter of the vehicle to assist in rear parkingmaneuvers. The various colored areas indi-cate the distance from the rear of the vehicle.

The table below shows the approximatedistances for each area:

Messages On The DisplayIf the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will not detectany obstacle behind the vehicle. The display willshow a dedicated warning message.Make sure the trunk lid is closed by pushingnext to the lock until it clicks.

Important Notes

Ice, snow or mud on the surface of thecamera may reduce its sensitivity. It isimportant to keep the camera surfaceclean, and free from debris.

When parking, be aware of obstacles thatmay be above or under the camera range.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing upeven when using the Rear Back-Up Camera.Always check carefully behind your vehicle,and be sure to check for pedestrians,animals, other vehicles, obstructions, orblind spots before backing up. You areresponsible for the safety of yoursurroundings and must continue to payattention while backing up. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-UpCamera should only be used as a parkingaid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unableto view every obstacle or object in yourdrive path.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle mustbe driven slowly when using the RearBack-Up Camera to be able to stop in timewhen an obstacle is seen. It is recom-mended that the driver look frequentlyover his/her shoulder when using theRear Back-Up Camera.

Area Distance From The Rear Of The Vehicle

Red 0–11.8 inches (0–30 cm)

Yellow 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet(30 cm–1 m)

Green 3.3 feet or more(1 m or more)


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

206

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Refueling The Vehicle

Before refueling, make sure that the fuel typeis correct.Also, stop the engine before refueling.

NOTE:An inefficient catalytic converter leads toharmful exhaust emissions, thus contributingto air pollution.

Refueling Capacity

To ensure that you fill the tank completely, topoff twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle.Further top-off could cause faults in the fuelfeeding system.

Refueling Procedure

The fuel filler door is unlocked when thecentral door locking system is unlocked. It isautomatically locked when the central lockingsystem is applied.

Opening The Fuel Filler DoorTo refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on thepoint shown by the arrow.

Fuel Door

2. Remove the fuel filler cap.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the fillerpipe.

4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,before removing the nozzle, wait for atleast 10 seconds in order for the fuel toflow inside the tank.

5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten thegas cap about ¼ turn until you hear oneclick. This is an indication that cap is prop-erly tightened.

The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADEDFUEL = gasoline).

Fuel Door Label

CAUTION!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,even in small amounts in an emergency, asthis would damage the catalytic converterbeyond repair.


207

Emergency Fuel Door OpeningIn the event of an emergency the fuel fillerdoor can be opened by operating from insidethe trunk.Proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk and locate the emergencyfuel filler release cap on the inside lining.

Fuel Door Release Cap

2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside tounlock the fuel filler door.

3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing on it(see the previous instructions).

NOTE:If the filler compartment is washed with a pres-sure washer, keep it at a distance of at least8 inches (20 cm).

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration regulations, your vehicle has acertification label affixed to the driver's sidedoor or pillar.This label contains the month and year ofmanufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)front and rear, and Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)number is included on this label and indicatesthe Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. Thebar code that appears on the bottom of thelabel is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight ofyour vehicle including driver, passengers,vehicle, options and cargo. The label alsospecifies maximum capacities of front andrear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must belimited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR arenot exceeded.

WARNING!

Never have any smoking materials lit in ornear the vehicle when the fuel door isopen or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine isrunning. This is in violation of most stateand federal fire regulations and maycause the MIL to turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped intoa portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Alwaysplace gas containers on the ground whilefilling.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

208

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as theallowable load weight a truck can carry,including the weight of the driver, all passen-gers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible loadon the front and rear axles. The load must bedistributed in the cargo area so that the GAWRof each axle is not exceeded.Each axle GAWR is determined by the compo-nents in the system with the lowest loadcarrying capacity (axle, springs, tires orwheels). Heavier axles or suspension compo-nents sometimes specified by purchasers forincreased durability do not necessarilyincrease the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Labelrepresents the actual tire size on your vehicle.Replacement tires must be equal to the loadcapacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for thetire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for yourvehicle for all loading conditions up to fullGAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as thetotal weight of the vehicle with all fluids,including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi-tions, and with no occupants or cargo loadedinto the vehicle. The front and rear curb weightvalues are determined by weighing yourvehicle on a commercial scale before anyoccupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of thefront and rear of your vehicle at the ground canbest be determined by weighing it when it isloaded and ready for operation.The entire vehicle should first be weighed on acommercial scale to ensure that the GVWRhas not been exceeded. The weight on thefront and rear of the vehicle should then bedetermined separately to be sure that the loadis properly distributed over the front and rearaxle. Weighing the vehicle may show that theGAWR of either the front or rear axles hasbeen exceeded but the total load is within thespecified GVWR. If so, weight must be shiftedfrom front to rear or rear to front as appro-priate until the specified weight limitations aremet. Store the heavier items down low and besure that the weight is distributed equally.Stow all loose items securely before driving.Improper weight distributions can have anadverse effect on the way your vehicle steersand handles and the way the brakes operate.

TRAILER TOWINGTrailer towing is not recommended for thisvehicle.

SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING

Saving Fuel

Below are some suggestions which may helpyou save fuel and lower the amount of harmfulemissions released into the atmosphere.Vehicle MaintenanceChecks and operations should be carried outin accordance with the Maintenance Plan.Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “ServicingAnd Maintenance” for further information.TiresCheck the tire pressures at least once everyfour weeks: if the pressure is too low,consumption levels increase as resistance torolling is higher.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe GVWR or the maximum front and rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, or it can change the way your vehiclehandles. This could cause you to losecontrol. Also overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.


209

Unnecessary LoadsDo not travel with an overloaded trunk. Theweight of the vehicle and its arrangementgreatly affect fuel consumption and stability.Electric DevicesUse electrical systems only for the amount oftime needed. The rear window defroster, addi-tional headlights, windshield wipers andheater blower fan require a considerableamount of energy; increasing the currentuptake increases fuel consumption (by up to+25% when city driving).Climate Control SystemUsing the climate control system will increaseconsumption: use standard ventilation whenthe temperature outside permits.Devices for Aerodynamic ControlThe use of non-certified devices for aerody-namic control may adversely affect air dragand consumption levels.

Driving Style

StartingDo not warm up the engine at low or high revswhen the vehicle is stationary; this causes theengine to warm up more slowly, therebyincreasing fuel consumption and emissions. Itis therefore advisable to drive off immediately,slowly, avoiding high speeds: by doing this theengine will warm up more quickly.

Unnecessary ActionsAvoid revving up when starting at traffic lightsor before stopping the engine. This action isunnecessary and causes increased fuelconsumption and pollution.Gear SelectionUse a high gear when traffic and road conditionsallow it. Using a low gear for faster accelerationwill increase fuel consumption. Improper use of ahigh gear increases consumption, emissions andengine wear.Max. SpeedFuel consumption considerably increases asspeed increases. Maintain a constant speed,avoiding unnecessary braking and accelera-tion, which cost in terms of both fuel consump-tion and emissions.AccelerationAccelerating violently severely affects consump-tion and emissions: acceleration should begradual and should not exceed the maximumtorque.

Conditions Of Use

Cold StartingShort trips and frequent cold starts will notallow the engine to reach optimum operatingtemperature. This results in a significantincrease in consumption levels (from +15 to+30% in city driving) and emissions.

Traffic And Road ConditionsHigh fuel consumption is caused by heavytraffic, for instance when traveling in trafficwith frequent use of low gears or in cities withmany traffic lights. Winding mountain roadsand rough road surfaces also adversely affectconsumption.Stops In TrafficDuring prolonged stops (e.g. railway crossings)turn off the engine.

Transporting Passengers

WARNING!

It is extremely dangerous to leave children ina parked vehicle when the temperatureoutside is very high. The heat inside thepassenger compartment may have serious,or even fatal, consequences.

Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. Inthe event of an accident, anyone insidethe trunk would be at greater risk ofserious or even fatal injury.

Ensure that all the occupants of thevehicle wear their seat belts correctly andthat any children are positioned correctlyon the dedicated child restraint systems.


ST

AR

TIN

G A

ND

OP

ER

AT

ING

210

Transporting Animals

The intervention of the airbags may bedangerous for an animal on the front seat. It istherefore advised to arrange animals on therear seat inside dedicated cages restrained bythe vehicle’s seat belts.Keep in mind that, in the event of a suddenbraking or an accident, an inadequatelyrestrained animal may be projected within thepassenger compartment, risking injury to theanimal itself and the other occupants of thevehicle.

Exhaust Gas

Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, andmay be lethal. They contain carbon monoxide,a colorless, odorless gas which can causefainting and poisoning if inhaled.To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take thefollowing measures: Do not keep the engine running in closed

spaces.

If, for some reason (e.g. transporting bulkyloads), it is necessary to drive with the trunkopen, close all the windows and run theclimate control fan at maximum speed. DONOT activate air recirculation mode.

Should it be necessary to stay in thestationary vehicle with engine running,adjust the ventilation/heating system andoperate the fan in such a way that outsideair will enter the passenger compartment.Activate the maximum fan speed.

Maintenance of the exhaust system providesthe best protection against leaks of carbonmonoxide into the passenger compartment.Should an unusual noise from the exhaustsystem or the presence of exhaust gas in thepassenger compartment be identified, or if theunderbody or rear section of the vehicle isdamaged, have the entire exhaust system andbodywork areas checked to identify anycomponents which are broken, damaged,worn or have moved from their correct fittingposition. If any of these things occur, contactan authorized dealer.Open welding or loose connections may permitexhaust gas to enter the passenger compart-ment.Check the exhaust system each time thevehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changeoperations. Replace the components if neces-sary, contact an authorized dealer.

Performance — Quadrifoglio

This vehicle is equipped with an enginecapable of delivering exceptionally fast accel-eration and speed: Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 RPM.

Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at 2500–5000 RPM.

Top speed: 191 mph (307 km/h).

Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to100 km/h): 3.8 seconds.

For safe driving, it is essential, particularlyduring the first days of use, to get to know thecar by driving carefully and gradually discov-ering its performance.BrakesThe car braking system may be available withfour carbon-ceramic material brake discs, oneon each wheel.In order to guarantee the maximum brakingcapacity for the first use, Alfa Romeo performsa “run-in” procedure for discs and padsdirectly at the factory.The use of carbon-ceramic material brake discsguarantees braking features (better decelera-tion/pedal load ratio, braking distances, fadingresistance) proportional to the dynamic featuresof the car in addition to considerably decreasingthe unsprung component weight.


211

The materials used and the structural featuresof the system could generate unusual noiseswhich have absolutely no adverse effect oncorrect operation and reliability of the brakingsystem.Greater pressure may need to be applied tothe brake pedal the first time to keep the samebraking capacities in presence of condensa-tion or salt on the braking surfaces, forexample after washing or if the car is not usedfor a long time.

NOTE:Given the high technological level of thissystem, any servicing on it must be performedby an authorized dealer which exclusively hasthe skills needed for the repair and mainte-nance operations.

In case of intensive, high-performance use of thecar, have the efficiency of the carbon-ceramicmaterial braking system inspected as shown onthe Maintenance Plan at an authorized dealer.

Driving On Race TracksBefore driving on a track using a racing style, itis necessary to: Attend a race track driving course.

Check the liquid levels in the enginecompartment. For more information, seethe “Checking Levels” section in the“Servicing And Maintenance” chapter.

Have the car inspected at an authorizeddealer.

Remember that the car was not designed to bedriven exclusively on the race track and thatthis use increases stress and componentwear.

NOTE:Quadrifoglio front brakes are equipped withNAO type pads (Non-Asbestos Organic). Thesepads are NOT suitable for high thermal loads(for example track use). If you want to usevehicle on a track it is recommended to usethe optional CCM Brakes (Carbon CeramicBrake disc).

Preheating The Carbon Ceramic MaterialBrake Discs (If Equipped)The brake discs must be warmed up to makethem fully efficient. You are advised to performthe following procedure to achieve optimalefficiency: Brake nine times from 80 mph to 18 mph

(130 km/h to 30 km/h) with deceleration equalto 0.7g (the longitudinal acceleration value isshown on the instrument panel display by settingRACE mode and selecting the “Performance”page) with 20 second intervals between brakeapplications; keep the car at a speed comprisedbetween 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h and100 km/h) and do not brake for four minutes toallow the brakes to cool down;

Then brake three times from 124 mph to18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with decel-eration equal to 1.1g (ABS operation) with30 second intervals between brake applica-tions; keep the car at a speed comprisedbetween 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/hand 100 km/h) and do not brake for fiveminutes to allow the brakes to cool down.


212

IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these may inter-fere with your driving experience.The section on emergencies can help you todeal with critical situations independently.In an emergency, we recommend that you callthe phone number found in the WarrantyBook.You may also consider contacting an autho-rized dealer.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is locatedin the switch bank below the radio screen.

Push the switch once to turn theHazard Warning Flashers on. Whenthe switch is activated, all directional

turn signals will flash on and off to warnoncoming traffic of an emergency. Push theswitch a second time to turn the HazardWarning Flashers off.This is an emergency warning system and itshould not be used when the vehicle is in motion.Use it when your vehicle is disabled and iscreating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seekassistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers willcontinue to operate even though the ignition iscycled to OFF.

Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

SOS - EMERGENCY CALL Your vehicle has an on-board assistancefeature that is designed to provide support incase of an accident and/or emergency. Thisfeature is automatically activated by air bagintervention, or can be activated manually bypushing the button located on the base of therear view mirror.

NOTE:SOS - Emergency Call will only work with anenabled network operator.

SOS - Emergency Call ButtonThe SOS - Emergency Call system automati-cally forwards a call to emergency services inthe event of an accident with air bag interven-tion providing that the ignition device is in RUNposition and the air bags are working.

CAUTION!

Prolonged use of the Hazard WarningFlashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery.


213

The manual Emergency Call is also possiblewhen the ignition device is OFF until its back-light stays on by pushing the SOS button at thebase of the mirror. When the connectionbetween the vehicle and a public safety oper-ator is made, your vehicle will automaticallytransmit location and vehicle information tothe emergency service operator.Only a public safety operator can remotely endthe SOS - Emergency Call and, if necessary,call the vehicle back through the EmergencyCall system. Once the call has ended, you canstill call the emergency service operator toindicate additional information by pushing thebutton again.To Use SOS - Emergency CallPush and hold the SOS - Emergency Callbutton for a few seconds. The LED, locatednext to the SOS button, will blink once andthen stay on indicating a call has been placed.

NOTE:If the SOS - Emergency Call button is acciden-tally pushed, there is a 10 second delay beforethe call is placed. The system will issue averbal alert that a call is about to be made. Tocancel the call connection, push the SOS -Emergency Call button again.

Once a connection between the vehicle and anemergency service operator is made, the SOS- Emergency Call system will transmit thefollowing important vehicle information to theoperator: Indication that the occupant placed an SOS

- Emergency Call.

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

The last known GPS coordinates of thevehicle.

You will then be able to speak with the emer-gency service operator to determine if addi-tional help is needed.The SOS - Emergency Call has priority overother audio sources, which will be muted. Ifyou have a phone connected via Bluetooth, itis disconnected and reconnected at the end ofthe SOS - Emergency Call. Voice prompts willguide you during the SOS - Emergency Call. If aconnection is made between an emergencyservice operator and your vehicle, emergencyservice operators may record conversationsand sounds within your vehicle once a connec-tion is made, and by using the service youconsent to having this information shared.

NOTE:If you have not subscribed to the SOS serviceor if the service is not available or has expired,the Connect system will display a dedicatedscreen when the button is pressed informingyou to contact the national emergency number9-1-1 (the respective graphic button will bedisplayed to make the call if you haveconnected your mobile phone via Bluetooth®The call to the national emergency number9-1-1 will be made via the mobile phone bypressing red graphic button shown on theConnect system display.

SOS Screen Message


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

214(Continued)

SOS - Emergency Call System LimitationsWhen the ignition switches to the RUN posi-tion, the Emergency Call system runs a routinecheck. During this check, a red indicator willilluminate for about three seconds. This signalmust not be confused with a fault warning. Inthe event of a malfunction, the red indicatorwould remain on. If the SOS - Emergency Callsystem detects a malfunction, any of thefollowing may occur at the time the malfunc-tion is detected:

NOTE:The SOS Call function may not be available forthe first minute after the vehicle is started

The LED next to the SOS button will becontinuously illuminated red.

The Emergency Call system is powered by itsown non-rechargeable battery to ensure oper-ation, even when the vehicle battery isdischarged or disconnected. When systembattery is discharged, the instrument clusterdisplay will show a special message, differentthan other messages referring to other typesof faults. In this case, the system works only ifpowered by the vehicle’s battery.

The instrument cluster will display amessage alerting you to contact the ServiceNetwork along with a failure warning light.

Even if the SOS - Emergency Call system is fullyfunctional, external or uncontrolled factorsmay prevent or stop SOS - Emergency Calloperation. These include, but are not limitedto, the following factors: The key fob has been removed from the

vehicle, and the delayed accessories modeis active.

The ignition is in OFF position.

The vehicle’s electrical systems are notintact.

The SOS - Emergency Call system softwareand/or hardware is damaged during avehicle collision.

There are network problems that could limitor impair service operation (e.g., error byoperator, busy network, bad weather, etc.).

If the vehicle battery connection fails due to acollision or accident, the system can supportan SOS - Emergency Call for a limited period oftime. If the battery is disconnected for service,the system turns off. In this case, it will bepossible to make an SOS - Emergency Call onlywhen the battery is reconnected to thevehicle’s electrical system.

System Requirements Vehicle must have an operable 3G network

connection.

Vehicle must be powered with a properlyfunctioning electrical system.

The ignition must be in the RUN or ACC posi-tion, or in OFF position until its backlightstays on.

WARNING!

Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s3G and GPS aerials. You could prevent 3G andGPS signal reception, which can prevent yourvehicle from placing an emergency call. Anoperable 3G network connection and a GPSsignal is required for the SOS-Emergency Callsystem to function properly.

Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. Thismay prevent your vehicle from sending a signalto initiate an emergency call. To avoid interfer-ence that can cause the SOS-Emergency Callsystem to fail, never add aftermarket equip-ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electricalsystem or modify the antennas on your vehicle.IF YOUR VEHICLE AND SYSTEM LOSESBATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT)THE SOS FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICESAMONG OTHERS WILL NOT OPERATE.


215

Frequently Asked Questions:What happens if I accidentally push the SOS -Emergency Call Button? You have 10 secondsafter pushing the emergency button to cancelthe call. To cancel the call, push the buttonagain.What type of information is sent when I makean SOS - Emergency Call from my vehicle?Certain vehicle information, such as the VIN, istransmitted along with last known GPS loca-tion. Also note that emergency service opera-tors may record conversations and soundswithin your vehicle once a connection is made,and by using the service you consent to havingthis information shared.

When can I use the SOS - EmergencyCall button? You can ONLY Use theSOS - Emergency Call button tomake a call if you or someone else

needs emergency assistance.

BULB REPLACEMENT

General Instructions

Before replacing a bulb, check the contactsfor oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others of thesame type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb, alwayscheck its alignment.

When a light is not working, check that thecorresponding fuse is intact before changingthe bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to“Fuses” in this chapter.

NOTE:In some particular climate conditions, such aslow temperature, humidity, or after washingthe car, a thin condensation layer may form onthe internal surfaces of the front and rearheadlights. This condensation will disappearafter switching on the headlights.

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)turns on the air bag warning light in theinstrument cluster if a malfunction in anypart of the air bag system is detected. Ifthe air bag warning light is illuminated, theair bag system may not be working prop-erly and the SOS-Emergency Call systemmay not be able to send a signal to anemergency service operator. If the air bagwarning light is illuminated, contact theService Network to have the air bagsystem checked immediately.

Ignoring the LED on the SOS-EmergencyCall button could mean you will not haveemergency call services if needed. If theLED on SOS-Emergency Call button is illu-minated red, contact the Service Networkto have the emergency call systemchecked immediately.

If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous roadconditions or location), do not wait for voicecontact from an emergency service oper-ator. All occupants should exit the vehicleimmediately and move to a safe location.

Failure to perform scheduled maintenanceand regularly inspect your vehicle may resultin vehicle damage, accident or injury.



IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

216

Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbsGlass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.


217

Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type PowerFront direction indicators PY24W 24 W

Rear Fog lights H11 55 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W

Glove compartment light W5W 4 W

Trunk lid light W5W 5 W

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

218

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

NOTE:Only replace the bulb when the engine is off.Also ensure that the engine is cold, to preventthe risk of burns.

Direction IndicatorsTo change the bulb of these lights, proceed asfollows:

1. Operating inside the engine compartment,remove the protective cover.

Protective Cover Location

2. Remove protective cover.

Protective Cover

3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly coun-terclockwise, and then slide it off the head-light body.

Bulb/Connector

4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulbholder.

5. Install the new bulb, making sure it iscorrectly inserted in the bulb holder.

6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in thehousing on the headlight body and turn itclockwise, making sure that it is lockedcorrectly.

7. Install the protective cover.

Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Xenon GasDischarge HeadlightsTo replace the bulbs of the main beam head-lights, contact an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.Oil contamination will severely shorten bulblife. If the bulb comes in contact with anyoily surface, clean the bulb with rubbingalcohol.


219

Replacing Interior Bulbs

Courtesy Mirror LightTo replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the lens,using a suitable tool.

Sun Visor

2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the sidecontacts, then insert the new bulb, makingsure that it is correctly fastened betweenthe contacts.

3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on oneside and then pressing on the other sideuntil it clicks into place.

Glove Compartment LightTo replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, usinga suitable tool.

Courtesy Lamp Indent

3. Open protective cover up and remove thebulb pulling out of the connector.

Cover And Bulb Removal Direction

4. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctlyinserted fully.

5. Close the protective cover on the lens.

6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first onone side and then pressing on the otherside until it clicks into place.

1 — Mirror Cover2 — Lens


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

220

Luggage Compartment Courtesy LightsTo replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunklamp assembly using a suitable tool.

Ceiling Light Indent





5. Install trunk lamp in the correct position,inserting it firstly on one side, and thenpressing on the other side until it clicksinto place.

Puddle Lights On Door PanelTo replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Open the door and remove the puddle lightassembly, using a suitable tool.

Puddle Light Indent


221





5. Install puddle light in the correct position,inserting it firstly on one side and thenpressing on the other side until it clicksinto place.

FUSES

General Information

The fuses protect electrical systems againstexcessive current.When a device does not work, you must checkthe electrical circuit inside of the fuse for abreak/melt.Also, please be aware that using power outletsfor extended periods of time with the engineoff may result in vehicle battery discharge.

Blade Fuses

J-CASE Fuse

1 — Electrical Circuit2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit

1 — Electrical Circuit2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

222

Fuse Extracting PliersTo replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked to thefuse box.

Fuse BoxGrab the pliers from the upper tabs, pressthem, and extract the pliers pulling upwards.

The pliers have two different ends, both ofwhich are specifically designed to remove thedifferent types of fuses present in the vehicle:

Fuse Extracting Pliers

After use, return the pliers to their proper posi-tion by following the below procedures: Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and

insert them into their housing.

Push downward on the pliers into theirhousing until they click into place.

1 — MINI fuse2 — J-CASE fuse

WARNING!

When replacing a blown fuse, always use anappropriate replacement fuse with the sameamp rating as the original fuse. Neverreplace a fuse with another fuse of higheramp rating. Never replace a blown fuse withmetal wires or any other material. Do notplace a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity orvice versa. Failure to use proper fuses mayresult in serious personal injury, fire and/orproperty damage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure that theignition is off and that all the other servicesare switched off and/or disengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contactan authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safetysystems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system, trans-mission system) or steering system blows,contact an authorized dealer.


223

Fuse Location

The fuses, which can be replaced by the user,are grouped in two boxes below the passengerside foot board and inside the trunk.

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on thepassenger side, pulling to release the twobuttons.

Release Buttons On Footboard

2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove thepanel pulling downward.

Release Hooks On Footboard

The fuses are freely accessible on the controlunit.After replacing the fuse, make sure that paneland footboard are correctly locked.

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.

2. Remove the control unit cover.

Control Unit

The fuses are freely accessible on the controlunit.The number identifying the electrical compo-nent corresponding to each fuse is shown onthe cover.After replacing a fuse, make sure that youhave closed cover correctly.1 — Footboard

2 — Panel


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

224

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

Passenger Side Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGEFront power window (driver side) F33 25

Front power window (passenger side) F34 25

Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port F36 15

Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors unlock, Central lock F38 20

Windshield washer pump F43 20

Rear left power window F47 25

Rear right power window F48 25

Heater rear window coil F94 15


225

Under hood Power Distribution Center (PDC)

To access the fuses, remove the access door that islocated under the hood on the left side rear.

Under Hood Access Cover

To remove fuse cover, remove the screws witha suitable tool.

Under hood Fuse Panel Cover

Under hood Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGETow Hook Module (TTM) F1 40

Hi-Fi system F8 30

KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5

I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10

KL15/a 12 Volts Power outlet (R053) F22 20


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

226

TIRE SERVICE KIT

Description

If a tire is punctured, you can make an emer-gency repair using the Tire Service Kit locatedin the trunk beneath the load floor.

Tire Service Kit LocationThe Tire Service Kit includes: Sealant cartridge containing the sealing

fluid.

Filler tube.

Adhesive label with the writing "Max.50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in aposition easily visible to the driver (e.g onthe dashboard) after repairing the tire.

Air compressor, complete with pressuregauge and connectors.

An instruction pamphlet for reference inprompt and correct use of the Tire Service Kit,which must be then given to the personneldealing with the sealant-treated tire.

A pair of protective gloves.

Adapters for inflating different elements.

Tire Service Kit Components

NOTE:The sealant is effective with external tempera-tures of between -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F(50°C). The sealant has an expiration date.

To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as follows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position where youcan repair the tire safely. You should be asfar as possible from the side of the road,and in a position that is not dangerous foroncoming traffic. Activate the hazardwarning flashers, remove the safetytriangle from the trunk, and place it at asuitable distance from the vehicle to makeother drivers aware of your presence.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheelwith the deflated tire) is in a position thatis near to the ground. This will allow the tireservice kit hoses to reach the valve stemand keep the tire repair kit flat on theground.

3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P).

4. Apply the electric park brake and cycle theengine OFF.

1 — Sealant Cartridge2 — Filler Tube3 — Adhesive Label4 — Air Compressor


227

(Continued)

Inflation Procedure To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed asfollows:

1. Apply the electric park brake.

2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing thesealing fluid in the proper compressorholder, pushing down hard. Unscrew thetire valve cap, take out the filler tube andtighten the fitting on the tire valve.

Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire

WARNING!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side ofthe vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger ofbeing hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive thevehicle under the following circumstances:

• If the puncture in the tire tread is approx-imately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

• If the tire has any sidewall damage.

• If the tire has any damage from drivingwith extremely low tire pressure.

• If the tire has any damage from drivingon a flat tire.

• If the wheel has any damage.

• If you are unsure of the condition ofthe tire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from openflames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward ina collision or hard stop could endangerthe occupants of the vehicle. Always stowthe Tire Service Kit in the place provided.Failure to follow these warnings can resultin injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents of TireService Kit to come in contact with hair,eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant isharmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbedthrough the skin. It causes skin, eye, andrespiratory irritation. Flush immediately withplenty of water if there is any contact witheyes or skin. Change clothing as soon aspossible, if there is any contact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution containslatex. In case of an allergic reaction orrash, consult a physician immediately.Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of chil-dren. If swallowed, rinse mouth immedi-ately with plenty of water and drink plentyof water. Do not induce vomiting! Consulta physician immediately.


1 — Sealant Cartridge2 — Filler Tube


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

228

3. Make sure the power switch of thecompressor is in the O (off) position.

4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in thecenter console, then start the engine.

Center Console Power Outlet

5. Start the compressor by placing the powerswitch in the I (on) position.

6. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated onthe tire placard, located on the driver’sside B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’sside door. Refer to “Tires” in “ServicingAnd Maintenance” for more information.In order to obtain a more precise reading,check the pressure value on pressuregauge with the compressor off.

Air Compressor

7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi (1.8 bar)after 15 minutes, disengage the compressorfrom the valve and power outlet. Then, movethe vehicle forwards approximately five tireturns in order to distribute the sealant insidethe tire evenly, and then repeat the inflationoperation.

8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of atleast 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes ofturning the compressor on, do not drivethe vehicle, and contact an authorizeddealer.

9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km),stop, apply the electric park brake, andrecheck the tire pressure.

10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar),DO NOT drive the vehicle, and see anauthorized dealer.

11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)is detected, restore the correct pressure(with engine running and electric park brakeapplied), and drive immediately with greatcare to an authorized dealer.

12. Apply the adhesive label from the sealantbottle where it can be easily seen by thedriver as a reminder that the tire has beentreated with a Tire Service Kit, as well asnot to exceed the speed restriction for thetreated tire.

5 — Power Switch6 — Pressure Gauge

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tirerepair. Have the tire inspected and repaired orreplaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do notexceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire isrepaired or replaced. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in injuries that are seriousor fatal to you, your passengers, and othersaround you. Have the tire checked as soon aspossible at an authorized dealer.


229

Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure

The compressor can also be used to checkand, if necessary, restore the tire pressure.Proceed as follows:

1. Release the quick connector and connectit directly to the valve of the tire to beinflated.

2. Push the air release button.

Air Compressor Components

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

NOTE:Only use original cartridges, which can bepurchased at an authorized dealer.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the sealant cartridge by pushingthe release button located on the side ofthe compressor.

2. Insert the new sealant cartridge bypushing downward firmly.

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

WARNING!

Do not adhere the speed restriction stickerto the padded area on the steering wheel.Adhering the speed restriction sticker to thepadded area on the steering wheel isdangerous because the air bag may notoperate (deploy) normally resulting inserious injury. In addition, do not adherethe sticker to areas where warning lights orthe speedometer cannot be viewed.

7— Air Release Button8— Quick Connector9— Release Button

1 — Sealant Cartridge9 — Release Button


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

230

JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it canbe jump started using a set of jumper cablesand a battery in another vehicle, or by using aportable battery booster pack. Jump startingcan be dangerous if done improperly, soplease follow the procedures in this sectioncarefully.

NOTE:When using a portable battery booster pack,follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-tions and precautions.

Remote Battery Connection Posts

The remote posts of the battery for jumpstarting can be found inside the enginecompartment. The battery itself is located inthe luggage compartment.The negative terminal (-) is positioned next tothe passenger side hood lock.

Remote Negative Post Location

The positive post (+) can be accessed byremoving the cover, and opening the protec-tive flap.

Protective Cover

Protective Flap

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the batteryis frozen. It could rupture or explode andcause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster packor any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage tothe battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could cause thebattery to explode and could result in seriousinjury. Only use the specific ground point, donot use any other exposed metal parts.


231

Remote Positive PostTo carry out the operation, you need to have thecorrect cables to connect to the battery ofanother vehicle or a portable battery boosterpack to the remote posts of the dischargedbattery. Usually, these cables have terminals atthe ends and are identified by different sheathcolors (red = positive, black = negative).

Jump Starting

Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle theignition to OFF.

2. Turn off all electrical features in thevehicle.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start thebattery, park the vehicle within the jumpercables reach, apply the park brake andmake sure the ignition is OFF.

Cable ConnectionProceed as follows to perform a jump startingprocedure:

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumpercable to the positive (+) post of the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post ofthe booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumpercable to the negative (-) post of the boosterbattery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative(-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a fewminutes, and then start the engine in thevehicle with the discharged battery. Ifusing a portable battery booster pack,before starting the vehicle, wait a fewseconds after completing the connection.

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump startingprocedure could result in personal injury orproperty damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could resultin damage to the charging system of thebooster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each otheras this could establish a ground connectionand personal injury could result.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to thenegative (-) post of the discharged battery.The resulting electrical spark could cause thebattery to explode and could result in seriousinjury. Only use the specific ground point, donot use any other exposed metal parts.


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

232

Cable DisconnectionOnce the engine is started, remove theconnection cables in reverse sequence, asdescribed below:

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the remote negative (-) post of thedischarged vehicle.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of thejumper cable from the negative (-) post ofthe booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of thejumper cable from the positive (+) post ofthe vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start yourvehicle, you should have the battery and chargingsystem inspected at an authorized dealer.

Bump Starting

Never jump start the engine by pushing,towing or coasting downhill.

NOTE:You cannot start a vehicle with an automatictransmission by pushing it.

ENGINE OVERHEATINGEngine overheating may occur in situations ofextreme environmental temperatures, frequentengine stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. Ifthe engine becomes overheated, the EngineTemperature Warning Light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate along with a dedicatedmessage. Refer to “Warning Lights AndMessages” in the “Getting To Know Your Instru-ment Panel” for more information.In any of the following situations, you canreduce the potential for overheating by takingthe appropriate action. On the highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, place thetransmission in NEUTRAL, but do notincrease engine idle speed.

NOTE:There are steps that you can take to slow downan impending overheat condition:

If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.The A/C system adds heat to the enginecooling system and turning the A/C off canhelp remove this heat.

You can also turn the temperature controlto maximum heat, the mode control to floorand the blower control to high. This allowsthe heater core to act as a supplement tothe radiator and aids in removing heat fromthe engine cooling system.

If Steam Is Coming From The Engine CompartmentDo not go near the front of the vehicle. Stopthe engine. Wait until the steam dissipates.Then, open the hood and start the engine.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle poweroutlets draw power from the vehicle’sbattery, even when not in use (i.e., cellularphones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, thevehicle’s battery will discharge sufficientlyto degrade battery life and/or prevent theengine from starting.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never try to open a cooling systempressure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system coulddamage your vehicle. If temperature gaugereads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle.Idle the vehicle with the air conditionerturned off until the pointer drops back intothe normal range. If the pointer remains onthe “H”, turn the engine off immediately,and call for service.


233

If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is EscapingOpen the hood and idle the engine until itcools.

NOTE:

If the cooling fan does not operate while theengine is running, the engine temperaturewill increase. Stop the engine and contactan authorized dealer.

If the engine continues to overheat orfrequently overheats, have the coolingsystem inspected. The engine could be seri-ously damaged unless repairs are made.Contact an authorized dealer.

MANUAL PARK RELEASESee an authorized dealer to disengage themanual park release lever.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEThis section describes procedures for towing adisabled vehicle using a commercial towingservice.

The operators of the assistance vehicle mustbe informed with regard to the vehicle'sminimum height from ground in order to avoidcontact between the ends of the bumpers withthe equipment of the breakdown truck.The following image illustrates the front andrear attachment corners of the vehicle, to betaken into consideration when loading thevehicle on the assistance vehicle.

Front And Rear Loading Angles

WARNING!

A special tool is required to perform thisprocedure. Damage to the vehicle orserious injury or death may occur if theprocedure is performed improperly. Pleasecontact an authorized dealer to have thisprocedure performed.

CAUTION!

The vehicle should be transported with allfour wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed ofa roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towingwith only the front (or rear) wheels lifted.When towing with only the front (or rear)wheels lifted, in addition to damaging thebody, it could damage the transmission.

Do not use sling-type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flatbedtruck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake isreleased, and remain released, whilebeing towed.

Damage from improper towing is notcovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

RWD Models

AWD Models

A — Front Loading Angle 12.880° 15.160°

B — Rear Loading Angle 17.105° 18.400°


IN C

AS

E O

F E

ME

RG

EN

CY

234

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with allfour wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of aroadside assistance vehicle.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is notavailable, the vehicle must be towed with therear wheels lifted from the ground using atrailer or special equipment allowing lifting ofthe rear wheels.

All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with allfour wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of aroadside assistance vehicle.

TOW EYES If the vehicle has been in an accident or hasbroken down, a tow eye is provided in the toolscontainer located inside the luggage compart-ment for vehicle towing. There are two loca-tions on the front bumper available for TowEye installation, and one in the rear on thepassenger side. Towing is meant only for shortdistances on a paved road surface.

Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. Unhook the cap on the front (left or rightside) or rear bumper, pushing on the upperpart.

Front Tow Eye Cap Locations

Rear Tow Eye Cap Location

CAUTION!

Do not use sling type equipment whentowing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flat bedtruck, do not attach to front or rearsuspension components. Damage to yourvehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake isreleased, and remains released, whilebeing towed.

CAUTION!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage tothe drivetrain will result.

DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of atowing dolly can cause significant damageto your vehicle.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmissiondamage. Damage from improper towing is notcovered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.


235

(Continued)

2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in thetrunk and carefully clean the threadedhousing on the vehicle before using it.

3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place(about 11 turns).

NOTE:The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix onthe tow hook must not exceed 15°.

Work Angle Of Tow Cable

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an EnhancedAccident Response System.Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”in “Safety” for further information on theEnhanced Accident Response System (EARS)function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedunder certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle.Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”in “Safety” for further information on the EventData Recorder (EDR).

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chainsmay break, causing serious injury or death.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Towstraps may break or become disengaged,causing serious injury or death.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usage maycause components to break resulting inserious injury or death.

CAUTION!

The tow eye must be used exclusively forroadside assistance operations. Only usethe tow eye with an appropriate device inaccordance with the highway code (a rigidbar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a shortdistance to the nearest service location.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehiclesoff the road or where there are obstacles.

In compliance with the above conditions,towing with a tow eye must take place withtwo vehicles (one towing, the other towed)aligned as much as possible along the samecenter line. Damage to your vehicle mayoccur if these guidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that cantow vehicles with low ground clearancesas extensive damage can result by using astandard tow truck platform.



236

SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE Correct servicing permits the performance of

the vehicle to be maintained over time, as wellas limited running costs and safeguarding theefficiency of the safety systems.This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICINGCorrect servicing is crucial for guaranteeing along life for the vehicle under the best conditions.For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned aseries of checks and services for your vehicleat fixed intervals based on distance and time,as described in the Scheduled Servicing Plan.Before each service, it is always necessary tocarefully follow the instructions in the Sched-uled Servicing Plan (e.g. periodically checklevel of fluids, tire pressure, etc.).Scheduled Servicing is offered by an autho-rized dealer according to a set time schedule.If, during each operation, in addition to theones scheduled, the need arises for furtherreplacements or repairs, these may be carriedout with the owner’s explicit consent only.

NOTE:Scheduled Servicing intervals are required bythe Manufacturer. Failure to have themcarried out may invalidate the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

You are advised to inform an authorizeddealer of any small operating irregularitieswithout waiting for the next service.

Periodic Checks

Every month or every 600 miles (1,000 km) orbefore long trips check and, if necessary, top off: Engine coolant level.

Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see anauthorized dealer as soon as possible).

Windshield washer fluid level.

Tire inflation pressure and condition.

Operation of lighting system (headlights, direc-tion indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshield washing/wipingsystem and positioning/wear of wiper blades.

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Oil consumption of the engine depends onconditions and driving style. For this reason,the engine oil level must be checked every1,860 miles (3,000 km), and top off if neces-sary refer to “Engine Oil” in this chapter forfurther information.

Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of the followingconditions: Dusty roads.

Short, repeated journeys less than 4 miles(7 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.

Engine often idling or driving long distancesat low speeds or long periods of inactivity.

In the event of a long period of inactivity.

The following checks must be carried out moreoften than indicated in the Scheduled ServicingPlan: Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

Visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmis-sion, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements (sleeves/bushes,etc.).

Check battery charge and battery fluid level(electrolyte).

Visually inspect conditions of the accessorydrive belts.

Check and, if necessary, change engine oiland replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace cabin airfilter.

Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.

Severe Duty All ModelsChange engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)if the vehicle is operated in a dusty andoff-road environment or is operated predomi-nately at idle or only very low engine RPM. Thistype of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.


237

Maintenance Plan — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

SOS backup battery replacement (if equipped)1 ● ● ●

Check battery charge status with the properinstrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, ifnecessary. Check the tire repair kit rechargecondition and expiration date

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights,direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunklid, passenger compartment, glove compartment,instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostictool) and, if equipped, engine oil degradation 3

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust,fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves,bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washersystem and adjust nozzles, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

238

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartmentlocks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/reardisc brake pads and operation of pad wearindicators

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning ofthe accessory drive belt(s) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter4

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●

Replace accessory drive belt(s) ●

Replace air cleaner cartridge 5 ● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change the brake fluid6


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240


239

(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner 7 o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement 8 ● ●

1. The SOS backup battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.2. Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the

system is intact.3. If oil degradation ratio (data collectible from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is

recommended.4. The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the

warning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles.5. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).6. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.7. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).8. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

240

Maintenance Plan — 2.9 V6 Engine


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

SOS backup battery replacement (if equipped) 1 ● ● ●

Check battery charge status with the properinstrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, ifnecessary. Check the tire repair kit rechargecondition and expiration date

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights,direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunklid, passenger compartment, glove compartment,instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine control system operation (viadiagnostic tool) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust,fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves,bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washersystem and adjust nozzles, if necessary ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●


241

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartmentlocks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wearindicators

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the brake discs surface andedge ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Brake pads/brake discs replacement3

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning ofthe accessory drive belt(s) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change engine coolant ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Replace accessory drive belt/s4

Replace air cleaner 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change the brake fluid6


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

242

(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

Replace the cabin air filter 7 o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o

Spark plug replacement 8 ● ● ● ● ●

1. The SOS backup battery must be replaced every five years, regardless of mileage.2. Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the

system is intact.3. The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled

by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. After each discs replacement, reset the warning light using the diagnostic socket.4. Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced

every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

5. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).6. The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.7. If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).8. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.


110

120

130

140

150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15


128

144

160

176

192

208

224

240

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.This could cause an accident.


243

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Checking Levels — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine

1 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 –Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

244

Checking Levels — 2.9L V6 Engine

1 – Engine Oil Dipstick 4 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap2 – Engine Oil Filler 5 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap


245

Engine Oil

The engine oil level can be seen on the instru-ment cluster display every time the engine isstarted, or on the Information and Entertain-ment system display by activating on the mainmenu (MENU button) the following functions insequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil Level”.Check on the display using the six notches thatthe oil level is between the MIN and MAX level:one notch MIN level, six notches MAX level.If the oil level is close to or below the MINmark, add oil gradually through the filler, (referto “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update OnDisplay” in this section) considering that eachnotch shown on the display corresponds toapproximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml).The oil level can also be checked manually on2.9L Quadrifoglio models.

NOTE:Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten toproper torque whenever it is removed to addoil to engine. Never run the engine with capremoved as this could cause oil to leak fromengine.

Manual Oil Level Checking Procedure — 2.9L QuadrifoglioCheck that the oil level is between the MIN andMAX marks on dipstick, clean it with a lint-freecloth and reinsert it. Extract the dipstick againand check that the level is between the MINand MAX marks.Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update OnDisplay — 2.9L QuadrifoglioIf an engine oil top-off is needed, in order toensure the correct indication of the oil level onthe display, proceed with the process below: Leave the car on flat ground with the engine

running for approximately five minutes(temperature higher than 198°F (90°C)and shut the engine off

Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition to theON mode without starting the engine andwait for a few seconds.

NOTE:If the level indication is not updated after thepreviously described procedure, repeat theengine adjustment, shut the engine off andwait another five minutes before starting itagain. If the indication is not updated after thesecond start, contact an authorized dealer.

Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update OnDisplay — 2.0L T4 MAirIf an engine oil top-off is needed, in order toensure the correct indication of the oil level onthe display, proceed with the process below: Leave the car on flat ground with the engine

running for approximately five minutes(temperature higher than 176°F (80°C)and shut the engine off.

Start the engine again and idle it for abouttwo minutes.

NOTE:If you have added the specified amount of oiland the indicator is not reading “Full”, pleasecontact an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Make sure not to add too much oil whentopping off the engine. Engine oil in excessmay damage the engine. Have the vehiclechecked. Never exceed the MAX level whentopping off engine oil. It is advisable to checkthe oil level in intermediate steps using the oildipstick (2.9L Quadrifoglio Only).

CAUTION!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately onthe display after topping off. Consequently,wait for the oil level to be refreshed on thedisplay and follow the procedure below.

WARNING!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait forthe engine to cool down before looseningthe filler cap, particularly for vehicles withaluminum cap (if equipped). WARNING: riskof burns!


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

246

Engine Coolant Fluid

If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of reser-voir and add the fluid described in the “Tech-nical Specifications” chapter.

Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights

The windshield and headlights washer fluidreservoir has a telescopic filler.If the level is too low, remove reservoir cap andlift the filler. Then, add the fluid described inthe “Technical Specifications” chapter.

NOTE:The headlight washing system will not work ifthe liquid level is low (as indicated by thesymbol on the instrument cluster display). On

vehicles equipped with headlight washers,there is a reference notch on the dipstick:ONLY the windshield/rear window washeroperates with the level below this reference.

Brake Fluid

Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. Ifthe fluid level in the tank is low, contact anauthorized dealer to have the system checked.

Automatic Transmission Activation System Oil

The transmission control oil level should onlybe checked at an authorized dealer.

Useful Advice For Extending The Life Of Your Battery

To avoid draining your battery and make it lastlonger, observe the following instructions: When you park the car, ensure that the

doors and trunk are closed properly toprevent any lights from remaining on insidethe passenger's compartment.

Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazardwarning lights, etc.) switched on for a longtime when the engine is not running.

Before performing any operation on theelectrical system, disconnect the negativebattery cable.

If you wish to install electrical accessoriesafter purchasing the car that require perma-nent electrical supply (e.g. alarm, etc.), oraccessories which influence the electricalsupply requirements, contact an authorizeddealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate theoverall electrical consumption.

NOTE:After the battery is disconnected, the steeringmust be initialized. The warning light on theinstrument panel switches on to indicate this. Tocarry out this procedure, simply turn the steeringwheel all the way from one end to the other, andthen turn it back to the central position.

Battery

The battery does not require the electrolyte tobe topped up with distilled water. A periodiccheck carried out at an authorized dealer,however, is necessary to check efficiency.Follow the battery manufacturer's instructionsfor maintenance.

CAUTION!

The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark.

If the MAX mark is exceeded (last notch onthe right turns red) after the fill-up, go to anauthorized dealer as soon as possible tohave the oil in excess removed.

Do not add oil with specifications differentfrom those of the oil already in the engine.

Used engine oil and oil filters containsubstances which are harmful to theenvironment. To change the oil and filters, weadvise you to contact an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

If the charge level remains under 50% for along time, the battery may be damaged bysulphation, reducing its capacity andefficiency at start the vehicle. The battery isalso more prone to the risk of freezing (attemperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).


247

Replacing The BatteryIf necessary, replace the battery with anotheroriginal battery with the same specifications.Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructionsfor maintenance.

NOTE:It will not be possible to open the trunk with akey or by pressing the button in the passengercompartment when the battery is discon-nected. So, always position the manual trunkopening strap on the trunk lock before discon-necting the battery. The procedure isdescribed in the “Storing The Vehicle” para-graph in this chapter.

Pressure Washing

BATTERY RECHARGING

Important Notes

NOTE:

Before using the charging device, alwaysmake sure that it is appropriate for theinstalled battery, with constant voltage(below 14.8 Volts) and low amperage(maximum 15 Amps).

Recharge the battery in a well ventilatedenvironment.

Before using any devices to charge or tomaintain the charge of the battery, carefullyfollow the instructions provided with thedevice in order to properly and safelyconnect it to the car battery.

WARNING!

Battery acid is a corrosive solution andcan burn or even blind you. Do not allowbattery acid to contact your eyes, skin, orclothing. Do not lean over a battery whenattaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyesor on skin, flush the area immediately withlarge amounts of water. Refer to “JumpStarting” in “In Case Of Emergency” forfurther information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive.Keep flame or sparks away from thebattery. Do not use a booster battery orany other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

Cleaning the engine compartment with ahigh pressure washer is not recommended.Precautions have been taken to safeguardall parts and connections however, thepressures generated by these machines issuch that complete protection againstwater ingress cannot be guaranteed.

WARNING!

Never charge or recharge a frozen battery:it may explode because of the nitrogentrapped inside the ice crystals.

At all times while charging or rechargingthe battery, make sure that any sparks oropen flames are kept sufficiently far awayfrom the battery.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

248

You can recharge the battery without discon-necting the wires of the vehicle's electricalsystem. To reach the battery, remove the access

panel inside the trunk.

Battery Access Panel Remove the protective cover and connect

the positive cable terminal of the charger(usually red) to the positive terminal (+) ofthe battery.

Connect the negative terminal of thecharger (usually black) to nut next to thenegative terminal (-) of the battery.

Battery

The vehicle is equipped with an IBS (IntelligentBattery Sensor), which is able to measure thecharge and discharge voltage and calculatethe charge level and the general condition ofthe battery. The sensor is placed next to thenegative terminal (-) of the battery.

For a correct charge/discharge procedure, thecharge voltage must go through the IBSsensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow the instruc-tions on the user's manual to completelyrecharge the battery.

2. When the battery is charged, turn thecharger off before disconnecting it fromthe battery.

3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of thebattery charger and then the red cableterminal.

4. Refit the protective cover of the positiveterminal of the battery and the accesscover to the battery compartment.

NOTE:If a “quick-type” battery charger is used withthe battery fitted on the vehicle, beforeconnecting it disconnect both cables of thebattery itself. Do not use a “quick-type” batterycharger to provide the starting voltage.

1 — Protective Cover2 — Negative Post (Nut)


249

DEALER SERVICEThe following pages contain instructions onthe required maintenance from the technicalpersonnel who designed the vehicle.In addition to these specific maintenanceinstructions specified for routine scheduledservicing, there are other components whichmay require periodic maintenance or replace-ment over the vehicle’s life cycle.

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Level CheckTo ensure correct engine lubrication, the oilmust always be kept at the prescribed level(see “Engine Compartment” in this chapter).Check the oil level at regular intervals, forexample every 1,864 miles (3,000 km).It must be checked once full operatingtemperature is reached.The vehicle must also be parked on as level asurface as possible.The engine oil level can be checked using theInformation and Entertainment system. Toaccess the function, activate the main menu(MENU button) and select the followingoptions in sequence: “Applications”; “My Car”;“Oil level”.

Changing The Engine OilSee the “Maintenance Plan” for the correctservicing intervals.Choice Of Engine Oil TypeTo ensure optimal performance and maximumprotection in all operating conditions, it isadvisable to use solely certified engine oils(see description in “Fluid And Lubricants” inthe “Technical Specifications” chapter).Additives For Engine OilIt is strongly recommended not to use addi-tives (other than leak detection dyes) with theengine oil.The engine oil is a product designed specially forthe vehicle and its performance may be deterio-rated through the use of further additives.Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And FiltersFor the disposal of the engine oil and filters,contact the appropriate body to determinelocal regulations.

NOTE:Used engine oil disposed of incorrectly mayseriously harm the environment.

Engine Oil Filter

Replacing The Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter must be replaced eachtime the engine oil is changed. It is advised toreplace it with a genuine spare part, specifi-cally designed for this vehicle.

Air Filter

Replacing The Air CleanerSee the “Maintenance Plan” for the correctservicing intervals. It is advised to replace it witha genuine spare part, specifically designed forthis vehicle.

Air Conditioning System Maintenance

To ensure the best possible performance, theair conditioning system must be checked andundergo maintenance at an authorized dealerat the beginning of the summer.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemicals to clean the airconditioning system, since the internalcomponents may be damaged. This kind ofdamage is not covered by warranty.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

250

Replace The Cabin Air FilterSee the “Maintenance Plan” for the correctservicing intervals. For cleaner replacement,contact an authorized dealer.

Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Bodywork

Ensure that the locks and bodywork junctionpoints, including components such as the seatguides, door hinges (and rollers), trunk and hoodare periodically lubricated with lithium-basedgrease to ensure correct, silent operation and toprotect them from rust and wear.Thoroughly clean the components, eliminatingevery trace of dirt and dust. After lubricating,eliminate excess oil and grease. Also payparticular attention to the hood closingdevices, to ensure correct operation. Duringoperations on the hood, to be carried out withthe engine cold, also remember to check,clean and lubricate the locking, release andsafety devices.

Lubricate the external lock barrels twice ayear. Apply a small amount of high-qualitylubricant directly into the lock barrel.If necessary, contact an authorized dealer assoon as possible.

Windshield Wiper

Periodically clean the windshield and rearwindow and rubber profile of the windshieldwiper blades, using a sponge or a soft cloth anda non-abrasive detergent. This eliminates thesalt or impurities accumulated when driving.Prolonged operation of the windshield windowwipers with dry glass may cause the deteriora-tion of the blades, in addition to abrasion ofthe surface of the glass. To eliminate the impu-rities on the dry glass, always operate thewindshield washers.In the event of very low outdoor temperatures,below 0°F (-17.8°C) , ensure that the move-ment of the rubber part in contact with theglass is not obstructed. Use a suitable deicingproduct to release it if required.Avoid using the windshield wipers to removefrost or ice.Also avoid contact of the rubber profile of theblades with petroleum derivatives such asengine oil, gas, etc.

NOTE:The life of the windshield wiper blades variesaccording to the usage frequency. In any case,it is advised to replace the blades approxi-mately once a year. When the blades are worn,noise, marks on the glass or streaks of watermay be noticed. In the presence of theseconditions, clean the windshield wiper bladesor, if necessary, replace them.

Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades(“Service Position” Function)The “service position” function allows thedriver to replace the windshield wiper bladesmore easily. It is also recommended to acti-vate this function when it is snowing and tomake it easier to remove any dirt deposits inthe area where the blades are normally posi-tioned, when washing.Activation Of The FunctionTo activate this function, disable the wind-shield wiper before setting the ignition deviceto OFF.This function can only be activated within twominutes of placing the ignition in OFF.

WARNING!

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricantsapproved by the manufacturer for your airconditioning system. Some unapprovedrefrigerants are flammable and can explode,injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants orlubricants can cause the system to fail, requiringcostly repairs. Refer to Warranty InformationBook, located in your owner’s information kit, forfurther warranty information.

WARNING!

Driving with worn windshield wiper bladesis a serious hazard, because visibility isreduced in bad weather conditions.


251

To activate this function, move the leverupward for at least three seconds.

Windshield Wiper StalkFunction DeactivationThe function is deactivated if: More than two minutes passes before

placing the ignition in the STOP positionafter having raised the lever and putting thewipers into service position.

The ignition is placed in the ACC positionand the windshield wiper control is used.

If, after using the function, the ignition is setback to ACC with the blades in a position otherthan rest position (at the base of the wind-shield), they will only return to rest positionfollowing a command given using the stalk(stalk upwards, into unstable position) orwhen a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.

Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades Proceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of theattachment spring and remove the bladefrom the arm.

Wiper Release Tab

2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in thededicated housing in the arm andchecking that it is locked.

3. Lower the wiper arm onto the windshield.

NOTE:Do not operate the windshield wiper with theblades lifted from the windshield.

Windshield WasherThe window washer nozzles are fixed. If thereis no jet of fluid, first check that there is fluid inthe reservoir (see paragraph “Engine Compart-ment” in this chapter).

Windshield Washers

Then, check that the nozzle holes are notclogged; use a needle to unblock them ifnecessary.

Exhaust System

Adequate maintenance of the engine exhaustsystem represents the best protection againstleaks of carbon monoxide into the passengercompartment.If an unusual noise from the exhaust or thepresence of smoke in the passenger compart-ment is identified, or if the underbody or rearsection of the vehicle have been damaged,have the entire exhaust system and adjoiningbodywork areas checked at an authorizeddealer to identify any components which arebroken, damaged, worn or have moved fromtheir correct fitting position.

1 — Washer Nozzles


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

252

(Continued)

Open welding or loose connections may permitexhaust gas to enter the passenger compartment.Have the exhaust system checked every timethe vehicle is raised. Replace the componentswhere necessary (for these operations,contact an authorized dealer).In normal operating conditions, the catalyticconverter does not require maintenance. Toensure that it operates correctly, however, andprevent it from getting damaged, it isextremely important that the engine operatesperfectly.To minimize the risk of damaging the catalyticconverter, proceed as follows: Do not stop the engine or deactivate the

ignition with gear engaged and vehicle inmotion.

Do not attempt to start the engine by bumpstarting.

Do not persist in using the vehicle if idling isvery irregular or the operating conditionsare very notably irregular.

Cooling System

Coolant CheckYour vehicle has two cooling systems and theyboth need to be checked to ensure they are atproper fill levels. Refer to the “EngineCompartment” section for the locations.Check the engine coolant and intercoolercoolant level every oil change or before longtrips.If there are impurities in the engine coolant,the system must be drained, flushed andrefilled: contact an authorized dealer.Check the front part of the condenser to checkfor any build-up of insects, leaves or otherdebris. Should it be dirty, clean it by sprayingdelicately with water.Check the hoses of the engine/intercoolercooling system to ensure that the rubber hasnot deteriorated and that there are no cracks,tears, cuts or obstructions in the expansiontank side and radiator side connectors. Shouldthere be any doubt regarding leaks from thesystem (e.g. if frequent top ups are required),have the seal checked at an authorizeddealer.With the engine off and at normal operatingtemperature, check that the cooling systemradiator cap is closed properly.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Theycontain carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless and odorless. Breathing it canmake you unconscious and can eventuallypoison you.

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if youpark over materials that can burn. Suchmaterials might be grass or leaves cominginto contact with your exhaust system. Donot park or operate your vehicle in areaswhere your exhaust system can contactanything that can burn.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hotengine coolant (antifreeze) or steam fromyour radiator. If you see or hear steamcoming from under the hood, do not openthe hood until the radiator has had time tocool. Never open a cooling system pres-sure cap when the radiator or coolantbottle is hot.

Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelryaway from the radiator cooling fan whenthe hood is raised. The fan starts automat-ically and may start at any time, whetherthe engine is running or not.

When working near the radiator coolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turnthe ignition to the OFF mode. The fan istemperature controlled and can start atany time the ignition is in the ON mode.



253

NOTE:Before removing the coolant reservoir cap,wait for the system to cool down.

Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The Engine/Intercooler CoolantIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, havecleaning and flushing carried out at an autho-rized dealer.See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correctservicing intervals.

NOTE:

For topping up, use a fluid with the samecharacteristics as those indicated in the“Fluids And Lubricants” table (see “Tech-nical Specifications” chapter).

Do not use pure water, alcohol-based cool-ants, corrosions inhibitors or additionalanti-rust products because they may beincompatible with the engine coolant andcause the clogging of the radiator. The useof propylene glycol-based coolant is also notrecommended.

Engine Cooling/Intercooler System CapTo prevent loss of engine coolant, make surethat the expansion tank cap is closed. If it isopen, screw it completely until you reach/hearthe click.Periodically check the cap and clean it fromany foreign bodies that may have deposited onthe external surface.

Disposal Of Used CoolantDisposal of engine/intercooler coolant is subjectto legal requirements: contact the appropriatebody to determine local regulations.

NOTE:

To prevent the fluid from being ingested bychildren or animals, do not keep it in opencontainers or pour it on the ground. Ifingested, contact a doctor immediately.Eliminate any traces of fluid from theground immediately.

When the vehicle stops after a short trip,steam may be seen coming out from front ofthe hood. This is a normal phenomenon whichis due to the presence of rain, snow or a lot ofmoisture on the surface of the radiator.

With engine and system cold, do not top upwith coolant beyond the maximum levelindicated on the reservoir in the enginecompartment.

Braking System

In order to guarantee the efficiency of thebraking system, periodically check its compo-nents; for this operation, contact an autho-rized dealer.See the “Maintenance Plan” for the correctservicing intervals.

WARNING!

Do not open hot engine cooling system.Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) whenthe engine is overheated. Do not loosen orremove the cap to cool an overheatedengine. Heat causes pressure to build up inthe cooling system. To prevent scalding orinjury, do not remove the pressure cap whilethe system is hot or under pressure.

Do not use a pressure cap other than theone specified for your vehicle. Personalinjury or engine damage may result.

WARNING!

Never add coolant with the engine hot oroverheated.

Do not attempt to cool an overheatedengine by loosening or removing the cap.The heat causes a considerable increasein pressure in the cooling system.

To prevent damage to the engine, only usethe engine cooling circuit caps provided.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

254

(Continued)

NOTE:Driving with your foot resting on the brake pedalmay compromise its efficiency, increasing therisk of accidents. When driving, never keep yourfoot on the brake pedal and don’t put unneces-sary strain on it to prevent the brakes from over-heating: excess pad wear may cause damage tothe braking system.

When an insufficient oil level is detected,contact an authorized dealer to have thesystem checked.

Always keep the cap of the brake fluid reser-voir (in the engine compartment) completelyclosed.

Automatic Transmission

Use only a transmission oil with the same char-acteristics as those indicated in the “Fluidsand Lubricants” table (see “Technical Specifi-cations” chapter).

Special AdditivesDo not use any type of additive with the auto-matic transmission oil. The automatic transmis-sion oil is a product designed specially for thisvehicle and its performance may be compro-mised through the use of further additives.

Frequency Of Oil ChangesIn normal vehicle operating conditions, it is notnecessary to change the transmission oil.

Replacing The Battery

If necessary, replace the battery with anotherbattery with the same specifications. It isadvised to contact an authorized dealer forreplacement.

WARNING!

Use only manufacturer's recommendedbrake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”in “Technical Specifications” for furtherinformation. Using the wrong type of brakefluid can severely damage your brakesystem and/or impair its performance. Theproper type of brake fluid for your vehicle isalso identified on the original factoryinstalled hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

To avoid contamination from foreignmatter or moisture, use only new brakefluid or fluid that has been in a tightlyclosed container. Keep the mastercylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.Brake fluid in a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in a lowerboiling point. This may cause it to boilunexpectedly during hard or prolongedbraking, resulting in sudden brake failure.This could result in a collision.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engineparts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.Brake fluid can also damage painted andvinyl surfaces, care should be taken toavoid its contact with these surfaces.

Do not allow petroleum based fluid tocontaminate the brake fluid. Brake sealcomponents could be damaged, causingpartial or complete brake failure. Thiscould result in a collision.


CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in yourtransmission as the chemicals can damageyour transmission components. Such damageis not covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit anauthorized dealer immediately. Severetransmission damage may occur. Anauthorized dealer has the proper tools toadjust the fluid level accurately.


255

Follow the battery manufacturer's instructionsfor maintenance.

NOTE:It will not be possible to open the trunk with a keyor by pressing the button in the passengercompartment when the battery is disconnected.So, always position the manual trunk openingstrap on the trunk lock before disconnecting thebattery. The procedure is described in the“Storing The Vehicle” section in this chapter.

RAISING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an autho-rized dealer which is equipped with shop jacksor jack arms.The vehicle lifting points are marked on theside skirts with the symbols.

Vehicle Lift Point Locations

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects ofthe following information: Tire Markings, TireIdentification Numbers, Tire Terminology andDefinitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

Tire Markings

NOTE:

P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is basedon US design standards. P-Metric tires havethe letter “P” molded into the sidewallpreceding the size designation. Example:P215/65R15 95H.

European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-pean design standards. Tires designed to thisstandard have the tire size molded into thesidewall beginning with the section width. Theletter "P" is absent from this tire size designa-tion. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is basedon US design standards. The size designa-tion for LT-Metric tires is the same as forP-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” thatare molded into the sidewall preceding thesize designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designed fortemporary emergency use only. Temporaryhigh pressure compact spare tires have theletter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewallpreceding the size designation. Example:T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based on USdesign standards and it begins with the tirediameter molded into the sidewall.Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)2 — Size Designation3 — Service Description4 — Maximum Load5 — Maximum Pressure6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-ture Grades


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

256

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure,vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)


257

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the fullTIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mountedon the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

EXAMPLE:DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

EXAMPLE:


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

258

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term DefinitionB-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sittingfor a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflationpressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.


259

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge ofthe driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire,including the spare tire (if equipped), at leastmonthly and inflate to the recommended pres-sure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Tire And Loading Information PlacardThis placard tells you important informationabout the:

1. Number of people that can be carried inthe vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must notexceed the load carrying capacity of the tire onyour vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's loadcarrying capacity if you adhere to the loadingconditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-sures specified on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “StartingAnd Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the frontand rear axles must not be exceeded. For furtherinformation on GAWRs, vehicle loading, andtrailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditionsof your vehicle, locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on theTire and Loading Information placard. Thecombined weight of occupants, cargo/luggageand trailer tongue weight (if applicable) shouldnever exceed the weight referenced here.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

260

Steps For Determining Correct LoadLimit—(1) Locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.(2) Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750(5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo and luggageload capacity calculated in Step 4.(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces the avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.Metric Example For Load LimitFor example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kgand there will be five 68 kg passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. The following table shows exampleson how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of yourvehicle with varying seating configurationsand number and size of occupants. Thistable is for illustration purposes only andmay not be accurate for the seating andload carry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, the combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed 865 lbs (392 kg).


261


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

262

(Continued)

Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential tothe safe and satisfactory operation of yourvehicle. Four primary areas are affected byimproper tire pressure: Safety

Fuel Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Safety

Both underinflation and overinflation affectthe stability of the vehicle and can produce afeeling of sluggish response or over respon-siveness in the steering.

NOTE:

Unequal tire pressures from side to sidemay cause erratic and unpredictablesteering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side maycause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel EconomyUnderinflated tires will increase tire rolling resis-tance resulting in higher fuel consumption.Tread WearImproper cold tire inflation pressures cancause abnormal wear patterns and reducedtread life, resulting in the need for earlier tirereplacement.Ride Comfort And Vehicle StabilityProper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring anduncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of thedriver's side door.At least once a month: Check and adjust tire pressure with a good

quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do notmake a visual judgment when determiningproper inflation. Tires may look properlyinflated even when they are underinflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visibledamage.

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehiclehandling, and increase your stopping distance.Use tires of the recommended load capacity foryour vehicle. Never overload them.

WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerousand can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing andcan result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability tocushion shock. Objects on the road andchuckholes can cause damage that resultin tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires can affectvehicle handling and can fail suddenly,resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Unequal tire pressures can cause steeringproblems. You could lose control of yourvehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side ofthe vehicle to the other can cause thevehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to therecommended cold tire inflation pressure.



263

Inflation pressures specified on the placardare always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Coldtire inflation pressure is defined as the tirepressure after the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours, or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum ofthree hours. The cold tire inflation pressuremust not exceed the maximum inflation pres-sure molded into the tire sidewall.Check tire pressures more often if subject to awide range of outdoor temperatures, as tirepressures vary with temperature changes.Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperaturechange. Keep this in mind when checking tirepressure inside a garage, especially in theWinter.Example: If garage temperature = 68°F(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressureshould be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), whichequals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) forthis outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reducethis normal pressure build up or your tire pres-sure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safespeeds and within posted speed limits. Wherespeed limits or conditions are such that thevehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-taining correct tire inflation pressure is veryimportant. Increased tire pressure andreduced vehicle loading may be required forhigh-speed vehicle operation. Refer to anauthorized tire dealer or original equipmentvehicle dealer for recommended safe oper-ating speeds, loading and cold tire inflationpressures.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation PressuresFor vehicle speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h),recommended cold tire inflation pressures arelisted on the Tire And Loading InformationPlacard located on driver’s side B-pillar or therear edge of the driver's side door.When driving at speeds 100 mph (160 km/h)and above, increased tire pressures andreduced vehicle loading are required forhigh-speed vehicle operation.For driving speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h)recommended cold tire inflation pressures arelisted below under "High Speed Tire InflationPressure". Vehicle loading condition must notexceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + three passen-gers + 88 lbs. (40kg) luggage).

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tirepressure, always reinstall the valve stemcap. This will prevent moisture and dirt fromentering the valve stem, which coulddamage the valve stem.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them to fail.You could have a serious collision. Do notdrive a vehicle loaded to the maximumcapacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle undermaximum load is dangerous. The addedstrain on your tires could cause them to fail.You could have a serious collision.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

264

2.0L Engine

(*) All Season Tires, If Equipped(**) Matching Rims/Tires

2.9L Engine

(*) Recommended tire size when tire chains are necessary. Refer to “Tire Chains” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for further information.

Tires WheelRecommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear225/50 R17 94W or 225/50 R17 94V * 17x7.5J 32 psi/220 kpa 35 psi/240 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 43 psi/300 kpa

225/45 R18 91W or 225/45 R18 91V * 18x8J 32 psi/220 kpa 36 psi/250 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 43 psi/300 kpa

225/40 R19 89W 19x8J 35 psi/240 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 39 psi/270 kpa 43 psi/300 kpa

225/40 R19 89W ** 19x8J ** 35 psi/240 kpa – 39 psi/270 kpa –

255/35 R19 92W ** 19x9J** – 35 psi/240 kpa – 42 psi/290 kpa

Tires WheelRecommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear245/35 Z R19 (93Y) XL 19x8.5J 35 psi/240 kpa - 42 psi/290 kpa -

265/35 R19 98V* - - 32 psi/220 kpa - 42 psi/290 kpa

285/30 ZR19 (98Y) XL 19x10J - 32 psi/220 kpa - 42 psi/290 kpa


265

Radial Ply Tires

Tire RepairIf your tire becomes damaged, it may berepaired if it meets the following criteria: The tire has not been driven on when flat.

The damage is only on the tread section ofyour tire (sidewall damage is not repair-able).

The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of aninch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tirerepairs and additional information.Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires thathave experienced a loss of pressure should bereplaced immediately with another Run Flattire of identical size and service description(Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace thetire pressure sensor as well as it is notdesigned to be reused.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after arapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid lossof inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflationpressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Oncea Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it haslimited driving capabilities and needs to bereplaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is notrepairable. When a run flat tire is changedafter driving with underinflated tire condition,please replace the TPM sensor as it is notdesigned to be reused when driven under runflat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.

NOTE:TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving thevehicle on a flat tire condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loadedat full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire isin the run flat mode.See the tire pressure monitoring section formore information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 secondscontinuously without stopping.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-ment tires to help you in determining whenyour tires should be replaced.

Tire Tread

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other typesof tires on your vehicle will cause yourvehicle to handle poorly. The instabilitycould cause a collision. Always use radialply tires in sets of four. Never combine themwith other types of tires.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheel speeds may causetire damage or failure. A tire could explode andinjure someone. Do not spin your vehicle'swheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for morethan 30 seconds continuously when you arestuck, and do not let anyone near a spinningwheel, no matter what the speed.

1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

266

(Continued)

These indicators are molded into the bottom ofthe tread grooves. They will appear as bandswhen the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch(1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the treadwear indicators, the tire should be replaced.Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this sectionfor further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including, but not limited to: Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflationpressures can cause uneven wear patternsto develop across the tire tread. Theseabnormal wear patterns will reduce treadlife, resulting in the need for earlier tirereplacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speed ratingof V or higher, and Summer tires typicallyhave a reduced tread life. Rotation of thesetires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-nance is highly recommended.

NOTE:Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as wellwhen installing new tires due to wear and tearin existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible. Protecttires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide abalance of many characteristics. They shouldbe inspected regularly for wear and correctcold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturerstrongly recommends that you use tires equiv-alent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-mance when replacement is needed. Refer tothe paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” inthis section. Refer to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the Vehicle Certifica-tion Label for the size designation of your tire.The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tirewill be found on the original equipment tiresidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the“Tire Safety Information” section of thismanual for more information relating to theLoad Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.It is recommended to replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing justone tire can seriously affect your vehicle’shandling. If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specifications matchthose of the original wheels.It is recommended you contact an authorizedtire dealer or original equipment dealer withany questions you may have on tire specifica-tions or capability. Failure to use equivalentreplacement tires may adversely affect thesafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replacedafter six years, regardless of the remainingtread. Failure to follow this warning canresult in sudden tire failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting inserious injury or death.

WARNING!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, orspeed rating other than that specified for yourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtires and wheels may change suspensiondimensions and performance characteristics,resulting in changes to steering, handling, andbraking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-dictable handling and stress to steering andsuspension components. You could losecontrol and have a collision resulting in seriousinjury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for yourvehicle.


267

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE:For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kitinstead of a spare tire, please refer to “TireService Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” forfurther information.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tireand wheel equivalent in look and function tothe original equipment tire and wheel found onthe front or rear axle of your vehicle. This sparetire may be used in the tire rotation for yourvehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer toan authorized tire dealer for the recom-mended tire rotation pattern.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergencyuse only. This tire may look like the originallyequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may havelimited tread life. When the tread is worn to thetread wear indicators, the temporary use fullsize spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it isnot the same as your original equipment tire,replace (or repair) the original equipment tireand reinstall on the vehicle at the first oppor-tunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. This tire is identified by alabel located on the limited use spare wheel.This label contains the driving limitations forthis spare. This tire may look like the originalequipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limiteduse spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since itis not the same as your original equipmenttire, replace (or repair) the original equipmenttire and reinstall on the vehicle at the firstopportunity.

Never use a tire with a smaller load indexor capacity, other than what was originallyequipped on your vehicle. Using a tire witha smaller load index could result in tireoverloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tireshaving adequate speed capability canresult in sudden tire failure and loss ofvehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a differentsize may result in false speedometer andodometer readings.

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,do not take your vehicle through anautomatic car wash with a compact orlimited use temporary spare installed.Damage to the vehicle may result.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency useonly. Installation of this limited use sparetire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,do not drive more than the speed listed onthe limited use spare wheel. Keep inflatedto the cold tire inflation pressures listed onyour Tire and Loading Information Placardlocated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or therear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace(or repair) the original equipment tire at thefirst opportunity and reinstall it on yourvehicle. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

268

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminumand chrome plated wheels, should be cleanedregularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and waterto maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.Wash wheels with the same soap solutionrecommended for the body of the vehicle andremember to always wash when the surfaces arenot hot to the touch.Your wheels are susceptible to deteriorationcaused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesiumchloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other roadchemicals used to melt ice or control dust ondirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mildsoap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harshchemicals or a stiff brush. They can damagethe wheel’s protective coating that helps keepthem from corroding and tarnishing.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includingexcessive brake dust, care must be taken in theselection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicalsand equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.

Select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner foraluminum or chrome wheels.

NOTE:If you intend parking or storing your vehicle foran extended period after cleaning the wheelswith wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle andapply the brakes to remove the water dropletsfrom the brake components. This activity willremove the red rust on the brake rotors andprevent vehicle vibration when braking.

Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Trac-tion levels may vary between different allseason tires. All season tires can be identifiedby the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tires only insets of four; failure to do so may adverselyaffect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet anddry conditions, and are not intended to bedriven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle isequipped with Summer tires, be aware thesetires are not designed for Winter or cold drivingconditions. Install Winter tires on your vehiclewhen ambient temperatures are less than40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice orsnow. For more information, contact an autho-rized dealer.Summer tires do not contain the all seasondesignation or mountain/snowflake symbol onthe tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in setsof four; failure to do so may adversely affectthe safety and handling of your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes thatuse acidic solutions or strong alkalineadditives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarketwheel cleaners and automatic car washesmay damage the wheel's protective finish.Such damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soapis recommended.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristlebrush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Theseproducts may damage the wheel's protectivefinish. Such damage is not covered by theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car washsoap is recommended.

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with thesespecialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheelcleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.They will permanently damage this finish andsuch damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFTCLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all thatis required to maintain this finish.


269

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use ofsnow tires during the Winter. Snow tires canbe identified by a “mountain/snowflake”symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tiresequivalent in size and type to theoriginal equipment tires. Use snowtires only in sets of four; failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.Snow tires generally have lower speed ratingsthan what was originally equipped with yourvehicle and should not be operated atsustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer tooriginal equipment or an authorized tire dealerfor recommended safe operating speeds,loading and cold tire inflation pressures.While studded tires improve performance onice, skid and traction capability on wet or drysurfaces may be poorer than that ofnon-studded tires. Some states prohibitstudded tires; therefore, local laws should bechecked before using these tire types.

Tire Chains And Traction Devices

Use of traction devices require sufficienttire-to-body clearance. Follow these recom-mendations to guard against damage.

NOTE:

Traction device must be of proper size forthe tire, as recommended by the tractiondevice manufacturer

Use on rear tires only

Due to limited clearance, the following trac-tion devices are recommended:

For a 255/35R19 tire, use of a snow trac-tion device with a maximum projection of7 mm beyond the tire profile is recom-mended.

For 225/50R17, 225/45R18 or 225/40R19tires, use of a snow traction device with amaximum projection of 9 mm beyond the tireprofile is recommended.

For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of azero-clearance snow traction device recom-mended.

It is not possible to install traction devices on285/30R19 tires.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/iceconditions. You could lose vehicle control,resulting in severe injury or death. Drivingtoo fast for conditions also creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction deviceclearance between tires and othersuspension components, it is importantthat only traction devices in good condi-tion are used. Broken devices can causeserious damage. Stop the vehicle immedi-ately if noise occurs that could indicatedevice breakage. Remove the damagedparts of the device before further use.

Install device as tightly as possible andthen retighten after driving about ½ mile(0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turnsand large bumps, especially with a loadedvehicle.

Do not drive for a prolonged period on drypavement.

Observe the traction device manufac-turer’s instructions on the method ofinstallation, operating speed, and condi-tions for use. Always use the suggestedoperating speed of the device manufac-turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Do not use traction devices on a compactspare tire.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

270

Tire Rotation Recommendations

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehiclesoperate at different loads and performdifferent steering, driving, and braking func-tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequalrates. These effects can be reduced by timelyrotation of tires. Rotation will increase treadlife, maintain traction levels and contribute toa smooth, quiet ride.To resolve this problem, tires should be rotatedat each service interval (approximately every10,000 miles [16,000km]). More frequent rota-tion is permissible if desired. The reasons for anyrapid or unusual wear should be corrected priorto rotation being performed.Tire Rotations Not Recommended — IfEquippedDue to different size tires and wheels on frontand rear axles tire rotation is not possible for: 2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a 225/40R19

front and 255/35R19 rear tires

2.9L V6 Engine Equipped with 19” tires andwheels

Tire rotation contributes to the preservation ofthe grip and traction performance on wet,muddy or snowy roads, guaranteeing optimaldriveability of the vehicle.In the case of irregular wear of the tires iden-tify the cause and correct it as soon aspossible, by contacting an authorized dealer.Tire Rotation for Directional Tires — IfEquippedDirectional tires are equipped on the following: 2.0T GME Engine equipped with same size

tires and wheels on front and rear axles

The rotational direction of the tire must betaken into consideration when rotating thetires. The recommended rotation pattern fordirectional tires is shown below.

Tire RotationAll Wheel Drive (AWD) ModelsIt is recommended to avoid situations with alarge difference in wear between the front andrear tires and to strictly use Winter tires of thesizes given on the tire placard.The AWD system and the original tires aredeveloped together to ensure the vehicle’sbest performance. When changing the tires, itis recommended to us the same “AR” markedtires, to maintain the same level of perfor-mance and component life.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear tires are rotated

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19”front and rear tires are rotated


271

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories wereestablished by the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration. The specificgrade rating assigned by the tire's manu-facturer in each category is shown on thesidewall of the tires on your vehicle.All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal safety require-ments in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparativerating, based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled conditions ona specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand one-half times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-tive performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service prac-tices, and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thesegrades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement, as measuredunder controlled conditions on speci-fied government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heat,when tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a level of performance, whichall passenger vehicle tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel, than theminimum required by law.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

272

STORING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle is left inactive for longer than amonth, the following precautions should beobserved: Park the vehicle in an area that is covered

and dry, and well-ventilated if possible.Slightly open the windows.

Check that the electric park brake is notactivated.

Carry out the procedure: “manual trunkopening device” procedure described in thisparagraph.

Disconnect the negative battery terminaland check the battery charge. Repeat thischeck once every three months duringstorage.

If the battery is not disconnected from theelectrical system, check its state of chargeevery thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted parts usingprotective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metal parts usingspecial compounds available commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshieldwiper rubber blades, and lift them off theglass.

Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforatedplastic sheet, paying particular care not todamage the painted surface by draggingany dust that may have accumulated on it.Do not use compact plastic sheets, as theydo not allow humidity to evaporate from thesurface of the vehicle.

Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) abovethe standard prescribed pressure andcheck it periodically.

Do not drain the engine cooling system.

Any time the vehicle is left inactive for two weeksor more, operate the air conditioning system withengine idling for at least five minutes, settingexternal air and with fan set to maximum speed.This operation will ensure appropriate lubrica-tion for the system, thus minimizing the possi-bility of damage to the compressor when thesystem is operated again.

NOTE:After placing the ignition in STOP and havingclosed the driver side door, wait at least oneminute before disconnecting the electricalsupply from the battery. When reconnectingthe electrical supply to the battery, make surethat the ignition is in the STOP position and thedriver side door is closed.

Manual Trunk Opening DeviceProceed as follows if the battery needs to bedisconnected:

1. From the trunk interior covering, rotate theplug counterclockwise of the lock andextract the cord connected to it.

Trunk Compartment

Trunk Manual Release Cord


273

2. Make sure the free end of the cordremains outside the trunk when closingthe trunk lid.

Manual Release Cord Shown With Trunk Closed

3. The trunk can now be opened manually bypulling the cord.

4. After releasing the trunk, rewind the straparound the plug, put it back into itshousing and turn it clockwise.

BODYWORK

Protection Against Atmospheric Agents

The vehicle is equipped with the best availabletechnological solutions to protect the body-work against corrosion.These include: Painting products and systems which give

the vehicle resistance to corrosion andabrasion.

Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corrosion.

Spraying of plastic parts, with a protectivefunction in the more exposed points: under-door, inner wing, edges, etc.

Use of “open” boxed sections to preventcondensation and pockets of moisture whichcould favor the formation of rust inside.

Use of special films to protect against abrasion inexposed areas (e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).

Corrosion Warranty

Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion Warrantyagainst perforation due to rust of any originalelement of the structure or bodywork. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer to theWarranty Booklet.

Preserving The Bodywork

Paint Touch up abrasions and scratches immedi-ately to prevent the formation of rust.Maintenance of paintwork consists of washingthe car: the frequency depends on the condi-tions and environment where the car is used.For example, it is advisable to wash the vehiclemore often in areas with high levels of atmo-spheric pollution or salted roads.Some parts of the vehicle may be covered witha matte paint which, in order to be maintainedintact, requires special care.To correctly wash the vehicle, follow theseinstructions: If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to

wash the vehicle, keep a distance of at least15 inches (40 cm) from the bodywork toavoid damage or alteration. Build up ofwater could cause damage to the vehicle inthe long term.

To make it easier to remove any dirtdeposits in the area where the blades arenormally located it is recommended to posi-tion the windshield wipers vertically (serviceposition), for more information, refer to“Dealer Service” in this chapter.

CAUTION!

The Manual Trunk Opening Device allowsthe trunk to be opened without a key, evenif the vehicle is locked. Do not use thisDevice unless the vehicle is parked in asecure area.


SE

RV

ICIN

G A

ND

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

274

Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jetof water if possible.

Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solutionover the bodywork, frequently rinsing thesponge.

Rinse well with water and dry with a leatherchamois.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door frames,hood, headlight frames, etc.) with special care,as water may stagnate more easily in theseareas. Do not wash the car after it has beenleft in the sun or with the hood hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in thesame way as the rest of the vehicle.If washing the car in a service that moves thecar, for cars with automatic transmissions,PARK (P) must be cut out. You have to shut offthe engine in the following conditions: carstopped, transmission in NEUTRAL (N), pushthe starter button for at least three seconds.

NOTE:Avoid parking under trees; the resin droppedby trees makes the paintwork go opaque andincreases the possibility of corrosion.

Windows Use specific detergents and clean cloths toprevent scratching or altering the transparency.

Front Headlights Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergentfor washing cars.

NOTE:

Never use aromatic substances (e.g. gaso-line) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for cleaningthe plastic lenses of the headlights.

When cleaning with a pressure washer,keep the pressure washer at least eightinches (20 cm) away from the headlights.

Engine Compartment At the end of every Winter, wash the enginecompartment thoroughly, taking care not toaim the jet of water directly at the electroniccontrol units or at the windshield wipermotors. Have this operation performed at aspecialized workshop. Refer to “PressureWashing” in “Engine Compartment” for furtherinformation.

NOTE:The washing should take place with the enginecold and the ignition device in the STOP position.After the washing operation, make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards)have not been removed or damaged.

INTERIORSPeriodically check the cleanliness of the inte-rior, beneath the mats, which could causeoxidation of the sheet metal.

Seats And Fabric Parts

Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuumcleaner. Rub the seats with a sponge moist-ened with a solution of water and neutraldetergent.Cleaning heat press images on seats — ifequipped:Due to the color, opacity and wear-resistantprotection with which the heat press imageson some seats are made, they may be subjectto temporary scratching if they are touched byfinger nails, keys, or other hard objects. Insuch cases, the visible signs do not impair theprofiled images, and can easily be removed bywiping the affected area with a microfibercloth moistened with water (not dry) to restorethe seat to its original condition. The micro-fiber cloth must not have been previouslysoaked in other substances or detergents.

CAUTION!

Wipe the rear window inside gently with acloth following the direction of the filamentsto avoid damaging the heating device.


275

Leather Seats

Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or slightlydamp cloth, without exerting too much pressure.Remove any liquid or grease stains using anabsorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. Thenclean with a soft cloth or buckskin cloth damp-ened with water and mild soap. If the stainpersists, use specific products and observethe instructions carefully.

NOTE:Never use alcohol. Make sure that thecleaning products used contain no alcohol oralcohol derivatives, even in small quantities.

Plastic And Coated Parts

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (ifpossible made from microfiber), and a solution ofwater and neutral, non-abrasive detergent.To clean oily or persistent stains, use specificproducts free from solvents and designed tomaintain the original appearance and color ofthe components.Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, ifnecessary moistened with water. The use ofpaper tissues is not recommended as thesemay leave residues.

Alcantara Parts — If Equipped

Alcantara parts maintenance procedure: Treat the surface with a microfiber cloth

moistened with mild marseille soap andwater, taking care to apply a uniform lightpressure over the entire area (do not rubvigorously).

Rinse and wring out the microfiber cloth,and pass it over the entire area again.

Let it dry, and then brush gently with a softbrush.

Genuine Leather Parts — If Equipped

Use only water and mild soap to clean theseparts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-basedproducts.Before using a specific product for cleaninginteriors, make sure that it does not containalcohol and/or alcohol based substances.

Carbon Fiber Parts

To eliminate small scratches and marks on thecarbon, contact an authorized dealer. Animproperly performed operation may irrepa-rably damage the carbon.

CAUTION!

Do not use “hard” synthetic brushes asthey can damage the fabric.

Do not clean small areas because it couldcause “aesthetic” differences betweentreated and untreated areas.

Do not use alcohol or acetone-basedsolvents.


276

TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S For the enthusiasts, the technician, or thosewho just want to know every detail of theirvehicle, useful information on understandinghow your vehicle works is contained in thischapter and illustrated with data, tables, andgraphics.

IDENTIFICATION DATA

Vehicle Identification Number

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) isstamped on a plate on the front left corner ofthe dashboard cover, which can be seen fromoutside the vehicle, through the windshield.

Windshield VIN Location

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Plate

The plates are located on the left side A-pillarand contain the data about: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).

Color code.

Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA andMexico only).

Vehicle manufacturing date.

Maximum permitted weights.

Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA andCanada only).


277

ENGINE2.0L T4 MAir Engine 280 HP

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 4 inline

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 90

Total displacement (cm³) 1,995

Compression ratio 10:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280

Maximum power (kW) 209

Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 5,200

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306

Maximum torque (Nm) 415

Corresponding engine speed (RPM) 3,300 – 4,400

Fuel 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is 0–15%.

2.9L V6 EngineCycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 6 / V

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82

Total displacement (cm³) 2,891

Compression ratio 9.3:1

Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375


TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

278

POWER SUPPLY

TRANSMISSION

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505


Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443


Fuel 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is 0–15%.

Power Supply2.0L T4 MAir Engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control

Power supply

2.9L V6 Engine Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable intake valve actuation

Model Transmission Traction

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight forward gears plus reverseRear-wheel drive

orAll-wheel drive

Model Transmission Traction2.9L V6 Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear

2.9L V6 Engine


279

BRAKES

SUSPENSION

STEERING SYSTEM

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake2.0L T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.9L V6 EngineDiscor

Carbon Ceramic disc

Discor

Carbon Ceramic discElectric

CAUTION!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it isbetter to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

Model Front Rear

2.0L T4 MAir Engine and 2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel double-wishbone suspension Independent wheel with multi-link system

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m) Rack and pinion with electric power steering

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) Rack and pinion with electric power steering


TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

280

DIMENSIONS — 2.0L T4 MAir EngineDimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

AFront

Overhang

BWheelbase

CRear

Overhang

DOverall Length

EOverall Height

FFront Track

GRear Track

HOverall

Width (Incl. Mirrors)

IOverall Width (Excl.

Mirrors)

31.30 Inches

111.02 Inches

40.47 Inches

182.80 Inches

56.54 Inches1 57.09 Inches2

1. RWD models2. AWD models





79.69 Inches

73.23 Inches


281

DIMENSIONS — 2.9L V6 EngineDimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

AFront

Overhang

BWheelbase

CRear

Overhang

DOverall Length

EOverall Height

FFront Track

GRear Track

HOverall

Width (Incl. Mirrors)

IOverall Width (Excl.

Mirrors)31.30 Inches

111.02 Inches

40.31 Inches

182.64 Inches

56.14 Inches

61.22 Inches

63.27 Inches

79.69 Inches

73.74 Inches


TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

282

WEIGHTS — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine

WEIGHTS — 2.9L V6 Engine

Weights (lbs) 2.0L T4 MAir Engine With AWD 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With RWDUnloaded weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 3,622 3,522

Payload including the driver1

1. If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in rela-tion to the maximum permitted loads.

905 905

Maximum permitted loads2

2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within themaximum permitted loads.

155 155

Front axle 2,205 2,205

Rear axle 2,646 2,646

Total 4,723 4,612

Weights (lbs) 2.9L V6 EngineUnloaded weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 3,820

Payload including the driver1

1. If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in rela-tion to the maximum permitted loads.

905

Maximum permitted loads2

2. Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within themaximum permitted loads.

155

Front axle 2,260

Rear axle 2,646

Total 4,774


283

FUEL REQUIREMENTSThis engine is designed to meet all emis-sion regulations, and provide satisfac-tory fuel economy and performancewhen using high-quality unleaded

“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane numberof 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. Foroptimal performance the use of 91 or higher octane“Premium” gasoline is recommended in theseengines.While operating on gasoline with the requiredoctane number, hearing a light knockingsound from the engine is not a cause forconcern. However, if the engine is heardmaking a heavy knocking sound, see a dealerimmediately. Use of gasoline with a lower thanrecommended octane number can causeengine failure and may void or not be coveredby the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Poor quality gasoline can cause problemssuch as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations.If you experience these symptoms, try anotherbrand of gasoline before considering servicefor the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use ofcleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor-mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasolinecontains oxygenates and are specificallyblended to reduce vehicle emissions andimprove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-mended. Properly blended reformulated gaso-line will provide improved performance anddurability of engine and fuel system compo-nents.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasolinewith oxygenates such as ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasolinecontaining more than 15% ethanol (E-15) orgasoline containing methanol are not theresponsibility of the manufacturer and mayvoid or not be covered under New VehicleLimited Warranty.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to run onCompressed Natural Gas (CNG) or LiquidPropane (LP) may result in damage to theengine, emissions, and fuel system compo-nents. Problems that result from running CNGor LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-turer and may void or not be covered under theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricar-bonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containingmetallic additive that is blended into somegasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blendedwith MMT provides no performance advantagebeyond gasoline of the same octane numberwithout MMT. Gasoline blended with MMTreduces spark plug life and reduces emissionssystem performance in some vehicles. Themanufacturer recommends that gasolinewithout MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMTcontent of gasoline may not be indicated onthe gasoline pump; therefore, you should askyour gasoline retailer whether the gasolinecontains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federaland California reformulated gasoline.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containingmethanol, or gasoline containing more than15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blendsmay result in starting and drivabilityproblems, damage critical fuel systemcomponents, cause emissions to exceedthe applicable standard, and/or cause theMalfunction Indicator Light to illuminate.Please observe pump labels as they shouldclearly communicate if a fuel containsgreater than 15% ethanol (E-15).


TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

284

(Continued)

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with theproper octane rating, gasolines that containdetergents, corrosion and stability additivesare recommended. Using gasolines that havethese additives will help improve fueleconomy, reduce emissions, and maintainvehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasolinecontains a higher level of detergents tofurther aide in minimizing engine andfuel system deposits. When available,

the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recom-mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaningagents should be avoided. Many of thesematerials intended for gum and varnishremoval may contain active solvents or similaringredients. These can harm fuel systemgasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

NOTE:Intentional tampering with the emissionscontrol system can result in civil penaltiesbeing assessed against you.

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited byFederal law. Using leaded gasoline canimpair engine performance and damagethe emissions control system.

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel orignition malfunctions can cause the cata-lytic converter to overheat. If you notice apungent burning odor or some lightsmoke, your engine may be out of tune ormalfunctioning and may require imme-diate service. Contact an authorizeddealer for service assistance.

The use of fuel additives, which are nowbeing sold as octane enhancers, is notrecommended. Most of these productscontain high concentrations of methanol.Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-mance problems resulting from the use ofsuch fuels or additives is not the responsi-bility of the manufacturer and may void ornot be covered under the New VehicleLimited Warranty.



http://www.toptiergas.com

285

FLUID CAPACITIES

2.0L T4 MAir Engine

US MetricFuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters

Engine oil sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters

Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine 9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.8 Quarts(AWD Model) 9.4 Liters (RWD Model) / 9.3 Liters (AWD Model)

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV – –

RDU 230-LSD differential - if equipped 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

RDU 210/215-LSD differential - if equipped 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters

AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters

AWD System Transfer Case 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters


TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

286

2.9L V6 Engine

US MetricFuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters

Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters

Automatic transmission – –

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 – –

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TVMain body: 0.8 Quarts

Left TV: 0.5 QuartsRight TV: 0.6 Quarts

Main body: 0.8 LitersLeft TV: 0.5 Liters

Right TV: 0.6 Liters

RDU 230-LSD differential – –

RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) – –

RDU 210/215-LSD differential – –


287

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTSYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the ScheduledServicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucialfor engine operation and durability.

Engine Lubrication — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this caseoptimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

Engine Lubrication — 2.9L V6 Engine

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this caseoptimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

Features Specification Replacement intervalMopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 0W-30 Full

Synthetic Engine Oil FCA Material Standards MS-13340 According to the Maintenance Plan

CAUTION!

Using lubricants that do not meet the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil specifications can cause engine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Features Specification Replacement interval5W-40

ACEA C3API SN

FPT 9.55535-GH2MS-12991 According to the Maintenance Plan


TE

CH

NIC

AL

SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S

288

Chassis Lubrication — 2.0L T4 MAir Engine

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants and greases

ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9

DifferentialRDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU

210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD /2.0 T4 MAir engine

SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case

SAE 75W Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

Engine coolant CUNA NC 956-16ASTMD3306 MS.90032

Use rate 50% Not mixable with different formulation products. 1

1. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043

To be used diluted or undiluted in windshield washer/wiper systems

HVAC R1234yf or R134yf (depending on market) – –


289

Chassis Lubrication — 2.9L V6 Engine

PERFORMANCE — 2.0L T4 MAir EngineTop performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

*Based on manufacturer testing.

PERFORMANCE — 2.9L V6 EngineTop performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

*Based on manufacturer testing.

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants and greases

ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA8 Differential and reduction units

RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

Engine coolant CUNA NC 956-16ASTMD3306 MS.90032

Use rate 50% Not mixable with different formulation products. 1

1. For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 To be used diluted or undiluted in

windshield washer/wiper systems

HVAC R1234yf or R134yf(depending on market) – –

Models Maximum speed mph Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec. RWD 149 * 5.5 *

AWD 149 * 5.1 *

Maximum speed mph Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec.191 * 3.8 *


290

CU

ST

OM

ER

AS

SIS

TA

NC

E SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sureto bring the right papers with you, as well asyour warranty folder. All work to be performedmay not be covered by the warranty. Discussadditional charges with the service manager.Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle'sservice history, as this can often provide a clueto the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems orthe specific work you want done. If you've had anaccident or work done that is not on your mainte-nance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you musthave your vehicle by the end of the day,discuss the situation with the service advisorand list the items in order of priority. At manyauthorized dealers, you may obtain a rentalvehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you needa rental, it is advisable to make these arrange-ments when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealersare vitally interested in your satisfaction. Wewant you to be happy with our products andservices.Warranty service must be done by an autho-rized dealer. We strongly recommend that youtake the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Theyknow your vehicle the best, and are mostconcerned that you get prompt and highquality service. The manufacturer's authorizeddealers have the facilities, factory-trainedtechnicians, special tools, and the latest infor-mation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctlyand in a timely manner.This is why you should always talk to an autho-rized dealer service manager first. Mostmatters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied,

talk to the general manager or owner of theauthorized dealer. They want to know if youneed assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable to resolvethe concern, you may contact the manufac-turer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer'scustomer center should include the followinginformation: Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (mobile, homeand office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Romeo Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) Phone:1-877-515-9112 (French)


291

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficul-ties, the manufacturer has installed specialTDD Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf(TDD) equipment at its customer center. Anyhearing or speech impaired customer, whohas access to a TDD or a conventional tele-typewriter (TTY) in the United States, cancommunicate with the manufacturer by dialing1-800-380-2479.Canadian residents with hearing difficultiesthat require assistance can use the specialneeds relay service offered by Bell Canada.For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and forVoice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connectwith a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract fora vehicle to help protect you from the high costof unexpected repairs after the manufac-turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.The Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are theONLY vehicle extended protection plansauthorized, endorsed and backed by FCA USLLC to provide additional protection beyondyour vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased aMopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receivePlan Provisions and an Owner IdentificationCard in the mail within three weeks of thevehicle delivery date. If you have any ques-tions about the service contract, call themanufacturer's Service Contract National

Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Cana-dian residents, call (877) 230-0563 English /(877) 515-9112 French).The manufacturer will not stand behind anyservice contract that is not the manufacturer'sservice contract. It is not responsible for anyservice contract other than the manufacturer'sservice contract. If you purchased a servicecontract that is not a manufacturer's servicecontract, and you require service after themanufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warrantyexpires, please refer to the contract docu-ments, and contact the person listed in thosedocuments.We appreciate that you have made a majorinvestment when you purchased the vehicle.An authorized dealer has also made a majorinvestment in facilities, tools, and training toassure that you are absolutely delighted withthe ownership experience. You will be pleasedwith their sincere efforts to resolve anywarranty issues or related concerns.

WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information for the termsand provisions of FCA US LLC and FCA CanadaInc. warranties applicable to this vehicle andmarket.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect that could cause a crash orcause injury or death, you should imme-diately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying FCA US LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problemsbetween you, an authorized dealer or FCAUS LLC.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion enginesonly), some of its constituents, and certainvehicle components contain, or emit, chemicalsknown to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Inaddition, certain fluids contained in vehicles andcertain products of component wear contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects, or otherreproductive harm.


CU

ST

OM

ER

AS

SIS

TA

NC

E

292

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., WestBuilding, Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safetydefect, you should contact the CustomerService Department immediately. Canadiancustomers who wish to report a safetydefect to the Canadian government shouldcontact Transport Canada, Motor VehicleDefect Investigations and Recalls at1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may useeither the website or the phone numbers listedbelow. Visa, Mastercard, American Express,and Discover orders are accepted.Service ManualsThese comprehensive Service Manualsprovide the information that students andprofessional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. Acomplete working knowledge of the vehicle,system, and/or components is written instraightforward language with illustrations,diagrams, and charts.Diagnostic Procedure ManualsDiagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled withdiagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.These practical manuals make it easy forstudents and technicians to find and fix prob-lems on computer-controlled vehicle systemsand features. They show exactly how to findand correct problems the first time, usingstep-by-step troubleshooting and drivabilityprocedures, proven diagnostic tests and acomplete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's ManualsThese Owner's Manuals have been preparedwith the assistance of service and engineeringspecialists to acquaint you with specific FCAUS LLC vehicles. Included are starting, oper-ating, emergency and maintenance proce-dures as well as specifications, capabilitiesand safety tips.To access your Owner’s Information online,visit www.mopar.comTo order a hard copy of your Owner’s Informa-tion, call Tech Authority toll free at: 1-800-890-4038 (US)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

OrTo obtain a hard copy of your Owner’s Informa-tion, visit: www.techauthority.com


http://www.safercar.gov/



http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm

https://www.techauthority.com/en-us/

https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html

293

AAccessories Purchased By The Owner.......... 3Active Blind Spot Assist .............................105Active Safety Systems.................................. 99Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System ........99Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) ..........................................173

Off ...........................................................175On............................................................175

Additives, Fuel ............................................284Air Bag.........................................................127

Air Bag Operation...................................128Air Bag Warning Light ............................126Driver Knee Air Bag................................129Enhanced Accident Response .....133, 235Event Data Recorder (EDR)...................235Front Air Bag...........................................127If Deployment Occurs ............................132Knee Impact Bolsters ............................129Maintaining Your Air Bag System..........135Maintenance ..........................................135Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.........126Side Air Bags ..........................................129Transporting Pets...................................148

Air Bag Light ......................................126, 150Air Pressure

Tires ........................................................262Alarm

Security Alarm ..........................................19Alfa Active Suspension (AAS).....................167Alfa DNA System ........................................164Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System.................. 99Automatic Headlights................................... 37Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........47

Automatic Transmission............................ 158Auxiliary Driving Systems .......................... 102

BBack-Up Camera ........................................ 204Battery ........................................................ 246Battery Recharging ....................................247Belts, Seat ..................................................150Blind Spot Monitoring................................ 103Bodywork (Cleaning And Maintenance) ...273B-Pillar Location ......................................... 259Brakes ........................................................ 279

Brake Fluid Level ................................... 246Bulbs, Light ................................................ 151

CCamera, Rear ............................................. 204Carbon Monoxide Warning........................ 149Cargo Tie-Downs .......................................... 59Certification Label...................................... 207Chart, Tire Sizing........................................ 256Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ............................................. 97Checking Levels ................................ 243, 244Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 149Checks, Safety ...........................................149Child Restraint ...........................................136Child Restraints

Booster Seats ........................................ 139Child Seat Installation ........................... 147How To Stow An unused ALR

Seat Belt ............................................144Infant And Child Restraints................... 138LATCH Positions.....................................141

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ............................................. 141

Older Children And Child Restraints .... 138Seating Positions................................... 140Using The Top Tether Anchorage ......... 148

Clean Air Gasoline ..................................... 283Cleaning

Wheels ................................................... 268Climate Control ......................................46, 50Contract, Service ....................................... 291Cruise Control (Speed Control) ................. 171Cupholders....................................................65Customer Assistance ................................ 290

DDaytime Running Lights ...............................37Deck Lid

Power Release..........................................57Defroster, Windshield ............................... 150Dimmer Switch

Headlight ..................................................43Door Opener, Garage ...................................59Drive Train Control (DTC) System ............. 100Driving Modes............................................ 165Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System .. 100

EElectric Park Brake.................................... 156Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).......................................... 171Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ....................................................... 100Emergency

In Case Of ..................................... 212, 226SOS Emergency Call.............................. 212


294

IND

EX Emergency, In Case Of

Jacking....................................................255Jump Starting .........................................230Overheating ............................................232Tow Hooks ..............................................234Towing.....................................................233

Emission Control System Maintenance...... 97Engine .........................................................277

Block Heater...........................................155Engine Coolant Level .............................246Exhaust Gas Caution .............................149Fuel Requirements ................................283Jump Starting .........................................231Overheating ............................................232

Engine Compartment.................................243Engine Compartment (Washing) ...............274Engine Oil

Level Check ............................................245Enhanced Accident Response Feature...............................................133, 235Ethanol........................................................283Exhaust Gas Cautions................................149Exhaust System..........................................149Exterior Lights.............................37, 151, 218

FFlashers

Turn Signals............................................151Fluid Leaks .................................................151Fluids And Lubricants ................................287Fog Lights, Rear ...........................................38Forward Collision Warning.........................109Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights (Bulb Replacement) ...................................218

FuelAdditives................................................. 284Clean Air ................................................. 283Ethanol ...................................................283Materials Added ....................................284Methanol ................................................ 283

Fuses ................................................. 221, 223

GGarage Door Opener (HomeLink) ............... 59Gasoline, Clean Air ....................................283Gasoline, Reformulated ............................ 283Gauges

Engine Oil Temperature .......................... 69Fuel........................................................... 70Speedometer ........................................... 70Tachometer.............................................. 69

Glove Compartment Storage ...................... 64GVWR.......................................................... 207

HHazard Warning Flashers .......................... 212Head Restraints ........................................... 32Head Rests................................................... 32Headlights .................................................... 37

Automatic ................................................. 37Delay......................................................... 38High Beam ............................................... 39Switch....................................................... 37

Headlights (Cleaning) ................................ 274Heated Mirrors ............................................. 37Heated Seats ............................................... 29Heated Steering Wheel ............................... 35Heater, Engine Block ................................. 155Hill Start Assist (HSA) System ................... 101

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ................59Hood

Closing ......................................................56Opening.....................................................56

Hood Release ...............................................56

IIdentification Data..................................... 276Ignition ..........................................................17

Switch .......................................................17Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ..............................19In Case Of Emergency ............................... 212Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices......... 3Instrument Cluster

Display ......................................................70Instrument Panel

Features....................................................68Interior And Instrument Lights.............. 41, 43Interior Lights.......................................40, 219Interiors (Cleaning).................................... 274Internal Equipment.......................................64

Cupholders ...............................................65

JJacking And Tire Changing........................ 255Jump Starting............................................. 230

KKeyless Enter-N-Go.......................................22

Passive Entry ............................................22Keys...............................................................14

LLane Change And Turn Signals ...................39Lane Change Assist ......................................39


295

LaneSense..................................................198Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................120Latches .......................................................151Leaks, Fluid ................................................151Life Of Tires.................................................266Light Bulbs..................................................151

Types Of Bulbs .......................................216Lights ..........................................................151

Air Bag ...........................................126, 150Ambient ....................................................41Courtesy/Reading............................. 40, 42Daytime Running .....................................37Exterior ............................................ 37, 151Fog ............................................................ 38Hazard Warning Flasher ........................212High Beam/Low Beam Select .................39Interior ...................................................... 40Park........................................................... 38Turn Signals..................................... 39, 151

Loading Vehicle ..........................................207Tires ........................................................259

LocksChild Protection........................................ 26

MMalfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .............................................97Manual

Service ....................................................292Methanol.....................................................283

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming................................. 36Electric Powered...................................... 36Exterior Folding........................................ 36Heated...................................................... 37Rearview................................................... 36Vanity...................................................... 219

OOccupant Restraints .................................. 118Onboard Diagnostic System........................ 97Opener, Garage Door (Homelink) ............... 59Operator Manual

Owner's Manual.....................................292

PPaintwork (Cleaning And Maintenance)...273Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System.............. 101ParkSense System.....................................194Passive Entry................................................ 22Performance (Top Speed) ......................... 289Pets............................................................. 148Pinch Protection........................................... 55Placard, Tire And Loading Information..... 259Power

Deck Lid Release..................................... 57Seats ........................................................ 27Sunroof..................................................... 54

Power Supply.............................................. 278Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ............. 124Pretensioners

Seat Belts............................................... 124Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...................... 272

RRadial Ply Tires .......................................... 265Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones ....... 4Rear Camera.............................................. 204Rear Cross Path......................................... 103Reformulated Gasoline ............................. 283Refueling Procedure.................................. 206Refueling The Vehicle................................ 206Refuelling ................................................... 285Reminder, Seat Belt .................................. 119Remote Keyless Entry ..................................14Remote Starting System ........................... 152Remote Trunk Release ................................57Replacement Bulbs................. 215, 218, 219Replacement Tires .................................... 266Reporting Safety Defects .......................... 291Restraints, Child ........................................ 136Rims And Tires........................................... 255

SSafety Checks Inside Vehicle.................... 150Safety Checks Outside Vehicle................. 151Safety Defects, Reporting ......................... 291Safety Information, Tire ............................ 255Safety Tips ................................................. 149Safety, Exhaust Gas .................................. 149Saving Fuel ................................................ 208Scheduled Servicing.................................. 236Scheduled Servicing Program(2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) .................. 237Scheduled Servicing Program (2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine Versions)........... 240


296

IND

EX Seat Belts ..........................................119, 150

Child Restraints......................................136Energy Management Feature ...............124Front Seat......................................119, 120Inspection...............................................150Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting...............122Lap/Shoulder Belts................................120Pregnant Women ...................................124Pretensioners.........................................124Rear Seat................................................120Reminder................................................119Seat Belt Pretensioner ..........................124Untwisting Procedure ............................122

Seats ............................................................. 27Adjustment ............................................... 27Head Restraints ....................................... 32Heated ...................................................... 29Power ........................................................27

Security Alarm .............................................. 19Service Assistance .....................................290Service Contract .........................................291Service Manuals.........................................292Servicing Procedures .................................249Shoulder Belts............................................120Signals, Turn...............................................151Snow Chains...............................................269Snow Tires ..................................................269Spare Tires..................................................267

Speed ControlAccel/Decel............................................172Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ......................... 176Cancel .................................................... 173Distance Setting (ACC Only).................. 177Resume ..................................................172Set .......................................................... 172

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ................. 171Starting

Button....................................................... 17Cold Weather ......................................... 153

Starting The Engine ................................... 152Steering

Tilt Column............................................... 34Wheel, Heated ......................................... 35Wheel, Tilt ................................................ 34

Steering System......................................... 279Stop/Start System .....................................167Storage

Console .................................................... 64Glove Compartment ................................ 64

Suggestions For Driving.............................208Sun Roof....................................................... 54Sun Visor ...................................................... 64Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ........................................................ 127Suspension ................................................ 279Symbols ...........................................................6

TTie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................59Tire And Loading Information Placard ..... 259Tire Markings ............................................. 255Tire Safety Information ............................. 255Tire Service Kit........................................... 226Tires................................. 151, 262, 267, 271

Aging (Life Of Tires) ............................... 266Air Pressure ........................................... 262Flat Changing......................................... 226General Information..................... 262, 267High Speed ............................................ 263Inflation Pressure.................................. 262Life Of Tires............................................ 266Load Capacity ........................................ 259Quality Grading...................................... 271Radial ..................................................... 265Replacement ......................................... 266Safety ............................................ 255, 262Sizes....................................................... 256Snow Tires ............................................. 269Spare Tires............................................. 267Spinning................................................. 265Tread Wear Indicators .......................... 265

Tow Hooks.................................................. 234Towing

Disabled Vehicle.................................... 233Towing Trailers........................................... 208


297

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .......................................................115Traction Control System (TCS)...................102Transmission ..............................................278Transporting Animals .................................210Transporting Passengers...........................209Transporting Pets .......................................148Tread Wear Indicators ...............................265Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .....................................57Turn Signals..................................................39

UUconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features ........22Passive Entry Programming .................... 22

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......................271Universal Transmitter................................... 59Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...............122Use Of The Owner’s Manual .......................... 5

VVehicle Changes/Alterations .........................3Vehicle Identification Number .................. 276Vehicle Loading................................. 207, 259Vent Operation ............................................. 46

WWarranty Information ................................ 291Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights ..................................................246Washers, Windshield ................................... 44Weights....................................................... 282Wheel And Wheel Tire Care.......................268Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .......................268

Wheels And Tires....................................... 255Windows (Cleaning)................................... 274Windshield Defroster ................................ 150Windshield Washers.....................................44Windshield Wiper

Replacing Blades .................................. 251Windshield Wipers........................................43Wipers, Intermittent .....................................44Wipers, Rain Sensitive .................................44


WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-844-253-2872 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation /Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.alfaromeousa.com (U.S.), www.alfaromeo.ca (Canada) or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

WARNING!

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

2 0 2 0 O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

2020

GIU

LIA

20_GA

_OM

_EN

_US

C

Second Edition

©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Alfa Romeo brand vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Alfa Romeo” (U.S. residents only).

Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date documents by visiting these links:

Owner’s Manual and Media:www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/owners-service-manual (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Warranty Booklet:www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/warranty (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

20 ga om en usc t - alfa romeo … · with respect to any vehicles sold in canada, the name fca us...

Documents